BCC Presort

User Guide

Version 8.00c.32.00

i

COPYRIGHT ©2019 BCC Software, LLC75 Josons DriveRochester, NY 14623-3494

This manual and software are copyrighted by BCC Software. All rights are reserved and neithermanual nor software may be copied in any way without prior consent.

BCC Software and BCC Presort are registered trademarks of BCC Software, LLC. EasyTrack,BCC Software, and the BCC Software logo are trademarks of BCC Software in the United Statesand other countries.

TDbf software used under license. TDbf Copyright © 1991, 1999, Free Software Foundation, Inc. RapidJSONCopyright(C) 2015 THL A29 Limited, a Tencent company, and Milo Yip. All rights reserved. Borland, dBase, and Paradox areregistered trademarks of Borland International Incorporated. Microsoft, Windows, NT, MS, Access, Excel, and FoxProare registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp. Zip and Jaz are trademarks of Iomega Corporation. Adobe® and AdobePDF Library™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc. in the US and other countries. All printerbrands or other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveholders.

To the extent the software of BCC Software, LLC. described in this manual integrates data products and software ofthe United States Postal Service, such as RDI, DPV®, LACSLink®, RDI®, NCOALink FSP®, NCOALink LSP® with ANKLink®,DSF2®, eLOT®, SuiteLink®, AIS Products, Labeling Lists, National Zone Charts Matrix Product, and AMS API®), you agreeto be bound by the terms of the license agreements between BCC Software, LLC. and the United States PostalService.

BCC Software is a non-exclusive licensee of the USPS for the following: NCOALink Interface Developer and Distributor;NCOALink® Full and Limited Service Provider Licensee; LACSLink, DPV, and RDI™. DSF2 services are provided by anon.exclusive licensee of the United States Postal Service and/or a direct license..

Prices for BCC Software products and services are not established, controlled or approved by the United StatesPostal Service or the United States Government.

For a list of trademarks owned by the United States Postal Service, please see Trademarks of the USPS:https://postalpro.usps.com/mnt/glusterfs/2018-03/Trademarks.pdf ⇨ .

The names, logos and international property rights of other companies regarding products and services remain theproperty of their respective owners.

201912121022

User Guide | ii

Contents

Introduction to Presort 1

The software automates the presorting process 1Members of the Presort family 2

Presort Job 2Presort Views 3Presort for PrintForm 4

Overview of features 4

Presort for beginners 7

Eight key tasks in any job 7Tips on sequence of job-file sections 9

Tips for setting up your definition (DEF) file 10Tips for setting up reports 10Tip for nonprofit mailers 10

Using the Views wizard 11Selecting your schemes and reports 11Setting up your mailing list and input files 11

Input fields 12Setting up your mail piece: Version Description 12

Processing categories 13Packages and containers are too big or small 15Automation compatibility 15

Setting up your post office: Entry Point Description 16Setting up your postage and forms: Mailing Information 17Setting up your mailing labels: Output File 17

Available output data 18Set up your output files 18

Auxiliary files 19Mail direction data 21Downloading and installing directories 21Directory lifecycle 21Directory filenames 23Storing directories 24Selecting the directory files 25Removing expired directories 34

How to verify that your job is ready 34Verification messages 35Batch verifier 36

Tips for running your job 36

User Guide | iii

From the USPS®: Ten common mistakes and how to avoid them 37

Schemes and sort levels 39

Introduction to schemes 39How presort schemes work 42

Example 43The software can help you select and arrange schemes 44

Set up schemes 44Scheme priorities 45

Scheme options and settings 46Optional sort levels 47

Carrier-route trays and sacks 475-digit scheme containers 48Automation-compatible letters without barcodes 48

Schemes sift out some records 48Is the record eligible? 49Does the record qualify under USPS rules? 49Does the piece fit into a package and container? 50

Mailing leftover pieces at single-piece rate (or preventing it) 51Prevent single-piece-rate pieces 51Prepare single-piece-rate pieces 52Standard Mail regular-rate pieces 52Single-piece price for Standard Mail and First-Class 53

Protecting pallets 53SCF protection 54NDC protection 56

How schemes affect reports and output files 56Options for output files 56

Assembling pieces, packages, containers, pallets, and air freight boxes 58

Packages 58Package size limits 58Periodicals and Standard Mail flats package size 59Options for weekly and daily periodicals 60Packages that exceed the maximum height 60Spanned (split) packages 60Stacking uneven pieces 61Minimum STD flats 5DG/5DG scheme package size 62If you save work files 63

Co-Packaging: Automation and regular flats 63Setting up co-packages 64One package per destination 64

User Guide | iv

Co-packaging rates 64Create 5-digit scheme (L007) packages 65

Co-sacking BPM flats 65Letter trays 66

Tray preparation 66Size limits 66Overflow and reduced overflow trays 67STD flats in letter trays 68Periodicals letter trays on pallets 69

Flat trays 71Filling trays 72Stacks 72Packages 73Periodicals flats in trays 73Selvage 74Flats dimensions 75Testing the flexibility and droop of your flat-sized mail piece 76

Standard Mail Marketing parcels 77Physical standards 78Preparation 79Pricing 79Mail.dat 79

Priority Mail parcels 79Priority Mail Preparation 80Priority Mail Sortation 81Priority Mail Parcel Commercial Base and Commercial Plus Pricing 82Setting up a Priority Mail job 84

First-Class™ Package Service Commercial Parcels 85Reports 86

First-Class Commercial Residual Single-Piece mail 86First Class Residual Single-Piece rate for combined residual pieces 88First Class Metered rate by ounce for mixed weight residual pieces 89Verifying the application of Commercial Residual Rates 89

Sacks 90Size limits for sacks 90Periodicals origin split 91

Periodicals Exception to Sacking 92Pitfalls to Avoid 93

Palletization 93Pallet size limits 94How the software applies your pallet limits 95Adjust your pallet limits 95

User Guide | v

Packages and containers on pallets 96Prepare packages and containers on pallets 97Packages on pallets 98Trays on pallets 98Sacks on pallets 100Mixed container support for First-Class Customer/Supplier Agreements (CSA) 101

Air freight boxes for Periodical Flat Mailings 102Air freight box preparation 103Air freight box sortation 105Air freight box pricing 106

"Fletters" 107Combination of rates on pallets 107Process Standard Mail fletters jobs as flats 107Process Periodicals fletter-sized mail as flats 109

Reaching beyond USPS regulations: Optional Procedures 109Leveling 110

Multiple versions, editions, or rate categories 112

Multiple versions or editions 112Custom assembly 113Ways to set up multiple versions or editions 113Create links between input records and a Version Description 114

Separately describe each version 114Use Version Defaults and Version Description blocks 115Use a "version code" field 116Link each description to a field value 116

Automatic, physically identical versions 116Link each description to a field value 117

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions 118Set up your job for Auto Dimension 119Version ID field is optional for Auto Dimension 119Automatic version by advertising percentage 120Automatic version by dimension for a First-Class mailing 120

Repositionable Notes (RPNs) 121Rules and procedures for RPNs 122

Bindery sets: Mingling selected versions 122Important information to consider with bindery sets 123

Non-selective binderies: How to prevent mingling 124Use bindery sets to prevent mingling 125Split output by version 125Print pieces together by version 126

Ride-along enclosures 127

User Guide | vi

Eligibility for ride-along enclosures 127Ride-along enclosure dimensions can exceed host piece 128

Auto dimension and ride-along enclosures 128Multi-version ride-along enclosures 128

Mailing with or without ride-along enclosure 129Set up a multi-version ride-along job 130Reporting ride-alongs 130

How versions affect reports and output files 131Separate mailings and reports 131Output files 131Output fields 131

Multiple rate categories 132Periodicals 132Standard Mail 132

Multiple entry points 134

Introduction to multiple entry points 134Every USPS facility serves a territory 135Our ZIP ranges are conservative 135Entry point sequence is critical 136The 24/50 rule for Standard Mail 136

Manual drop-ship planning 136Processing Center Listing Report 137ZIPCount utility 138

Setting up SCF, ADC, NDC, and DDU entry points 138Setting up multiple entry points in Presort Views 140

How Presort Views generates valid entry points 140Creating entry point descriptions in chronological order 141If the range of dates is too wide 143"Forcing" Presort Views to select the same directories 143

Essential points of setting up entry points 144The Maildirshow utility 145

Maildirshow values 145Create drop-ship discount entry points 147

Determine if an entry point is worthwhile 148Improve delivery time 148Multiple mailings 149

How the software assigns mail pieces to entry points 149Two or three entries at the same place 151How to limit a mailing by ZIP 151

Last Entry Point 151Use coded fields to indicate entry points 152

User Guide | vii

Eligibility for discounts 153DSCF, DADC, and DNDC discounts 155DDU discounts 156Link schemes to entry points 157

Manually linking schemes to entry points 157How multiple entry points affect reports and output files 159

Use output fields to identify entry points 159

Mixed-class comail 161

Introduction to Mixed-class comail 161Mixed-class comail mailing minimums 161Mixed-class comail sortation and other rules 162Mixed-class comail Periodicals Bundle and Container pricing 165

Setting up a Mixed-class comail job 166Mixed-class comail reports 167Preventing and troubleshooting problems with Mixed-class comail 168

Segmenting 169

Introduction to segmenting 169Prevent mingling of versions 169Pseudo entry points 170Stagger your mailing 170Several "jobs" per job 170Separate mailings and reports 170

Think before segmenting 171Automatic segmenting 172Manually describing each segment 173How segments affect output files 174

Output field to use when segmenting 175

Firm packaging and multi-piece parcels 177

Periodicals firm packages 177Forming firm packages using the matching method 178Forming firm packages using the copies method 179Preparing of firm packages and multi-piece parcels 180Bundling Periodicals non-automated pieces 186Setting up Standard Mail multi-piece parcels 186

Split output by scheme 188Output selection method 188Set up input posting 189

Single piece preparation for BPM multi-piece parcels 189Institutional firming 190

User Guide | viii

PW field 191AP fields 191

Multiple components in a single version 191Mail.dat information 192Ride Alongs, RPNs, and 1C Incidentals 193Setting up multiple components 193

Polybags 195

Creating Static Polybags 195Polybag Details 199

A Note on "Copies" vs. "Pieces" 199Piece Charges and Advertising Percentages 200Calculation of Dimensions for Polybag Versions 200Reports 201Output Files 201Firm Bundles 201

Subscribers and Nonsubscribers in Polybag Versions 201Set up your job to track subscription status within polybags 202

Polybag Limitations 204No Mixing of Preferred and Non-Preferred Publications 204

Carrier-sequence mailing: LOT and walk sequence 206

If your bindery equipment stacks pieces "upside down" 206Line-of-travel (LOT) sequencing 206

Prepare your mailing list for LOT processing 207LOT field example 208

Introduction to walk-sequenced mailing 210The Computerized Delivery Sequence file (CDS) and your mailing lists 211

How the software handles walk-sequenced mailing 212Qualify for residential saturation rates 213Walk-sequence processing 214

DPBC required for ECR walk-sequence letters 215Non-automation-compatible mail 215Letter tray labels 215

Standard Mail letter walk-sequencing 216Tips for setting up STD Letter walk sequencing 217

Mix simplified and non-simplified walk sequence carrier route mail 218Preparation requirements 218Required fields 220Mixing simplified and non-simplified mail in a walk sequenced mailing 220Setting a separate walk sequence setting for simplified mail only 221Populating AP fields for simplified mail 222

User Guide | ix

Combining walk sequence and line-of-travel carrier route mail 222Dropping WS basic priced pieces to the LOT sortation level 222Using the Retain Walk Sequence parameter when combining WS and LOT 223Using the copies field with simplified mailings 223Reporting WS and LOT pieces 224

Flats Sequencing System 225

FSS labeling lists 225Rules and regulations 225

FSS packages (bundles) 226FSS preparation for PER flats in trays 228FSS pallets 229

FSS Pricing 230Carrier route pieces 230Periodical bundle charges 231Periodical container and pallet charges 231

FSS reports 232Qualification Report 232Mail Sort Listing 232Manifest listing 232Summary Listing Report, Processing Listing Report, and ZIP Code Listing Report 232

Excluding mail from FSS preparation 233

Intelligent Mail® barcodes 234

Terminology clarification 234Intelligent Mail barcode support for letters and flats 234

IM barcode format for letters and flats 235Types of IM barcodes for letters and flats 235IM discounts for letters and flats 238Creating IM barcodes for letters and flats 241IM barcode input fields 242IM barcode output fields 245IM barcode service types for letters and flats 246IM barcode and IM package barcode serial numbers 249Mailer IDs for letters and flats 252Service type identifiers for letters and flats 256Firming and serial numbers for Piece barcodes 258

Intelligent Mail® package barcode (IMpb) support for parcels 260Supported Commercial Mail constructs 261IMpb fields 262Creating IM package barcodes for parcels 262IMpb input and output fields 265

User Guide | x

Shipping Services File 267Required D1 fields 272Required D2 fields 276Assigning and tracking unique serial numbers 283

Uniqueness periods of serial numbers 283How unique serial numbers are created 285To assign and track unique barcode serial numbers 285To assign and track electronic file numbers 288Regenerating reports and output files without re-presorting 289

Introduction to reports 290

The software creates reports for each mailing 290Figuring out the total number of mailings in a job 291

Required reports 291First-Class reports 292Periodicals class reports 292Standard Mail reports 293Package Services reports 294Mixed-class comail reports 295

Report file set up 295Organize your report files 296

Report formats 297Banner pages 298Printer controlled report formats 298Smooth report lines 299Printable area for reports 299

On-Demand Reporting 300Set a range for On-Demand Reporting 300Choose which pieces to show on your reports 301Avoid overwriting report files 302

USPS forms to submit with mailings 303

Introduction to Postage Statements 303Options for report scope 303

USPS Qualification Report 3045-digit scheme reporting 305

USPS Postage Statement Form 3600 for First-Class mailings 305USPS Postage Statement Form 3541 for Periodicals mailings 306USPS Postage Statement Form 3602 for Standard mailings 306USPS Postage Statement Form 3605 for Package Services 307USPS Pallet Mixed-Zone Listing for Package Services 307USPS Manifest Listing for First-Class and Standard Mail 308

User Guide | xi

PVDS Consolidated Postage Statement Register for Standard Mail 308USPS Drop Shipment Document Form 8125 309USPS Consolidated Postage Statement for CPP 309USPS Register of Mailings for CPP 310ZIP Code Listing in "USPS" format 310

Reports for your ownmail management 311

Abbreviations 311Job Summary 313Mail Sort Listing 314ZIP Code Listing 315Processing Center Listing 315Summary Listing 316Mail.dat 316

IDEAlliance 316PostalOne! 317Mail.dat files provided by BCC Software 317PostalOne!-required fields 319FAST-required fields 324PBC or PDR? 324One segment per Mail.dat 326Tracking multiple Mail.dat file sets 327Defining your own version descriptions 328Identifying the mail owner by CRID 329The seed file 329Split output 329File masking 330

Handling foreign records 331

Input country field for foreign records 331Options for handling foreign records in output files 331

Separate foreign output file 332Additional sorting on foreign pieces 332How foreign records are sorted 333

How to create and manipulate output files 334

Introduction to output files 334Address output file 334Package output file 335Container output file 335Pallet output file 335

Setting up output files 335

User Guide | xii

Output file templates 336Output file sequence 337

Introduction to Mailflow 337Using Mailflow to change the sequence of mailings 338Using Mailflow to change sequence within each mailing 339

Alternate mailstream hierarchy 341Output selection 343

Output selection by segment 343Output selection by entry point 343

Split output 344Split output example 344Naming your split output files 345Concatenating files 345

ZIPCount 346

General block 346Estimated Drop Date (YYYYMMDD) 348Work File Directory (Location) 348

Auxiliary Files block (ZIPCount) 348Mail Proc Ctr Dir (Location & YYMM_mpc.dir) 349Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_facility dir) 349Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_maildirect.dir) 349Default ASCII FMT File (Location & <file>.fmt) 349

Input File block 350Report block 351Command line options 353

Command line vs. job file 353Messages during verification and processing 354

Correcting errors 354Processing messages 354

Reports generated without the YYMM_mpc.dir file 355Reports generated with the YYMM_mpc.dir and YYMM_maildirect.dir files 355

Zoneshow 357

Using ZoneShow 357

DSF_Show 359

Using DSF_Show 359To run DSF_Show 359Command Line Parameters 360

Accessing Documentation 363

User Guide | xiii

PDFs 363Help Files 363

Additional Resources 365

Documentation Updates Available Online 365Knowledge Base 365How to Contact Support 366

User Guide | 1

Introduction to PresortPresorting is the task of sorting mail and preparing it in containers so that it can be transportedthrough the postal system. It's called presorting because you sort the mail before you submit it tothe U.S. Postal Service® (USPS) , instead of paying them to sort it.

A presort scheme is a set of USPS® rules for presorting. There are several schemes for each class ofmail and type of mail piece. Each scheme is linked with a particular type of container (trays, sacks, orpallets) and a range of postage rates.

When you run the software, it plans for you how packages and containers will be formed, accordingto the USPS scheme rules. Every package and container has a destination—either a local office or alarger, central facility—and a label or mark that identifies that destination. When it reaches its des-tination, the package or container is opened and processed—perhaps for further routing, eventuallyfor delivery.

The software automates the presorting process

Think of Presort as a system that helps you turn a database into a prepared mailing with labels,reports, and USPS forms.

Based on information from you—for example, piece and container dimensions—and USPS rules, thesoftware figures out how many pieces fit into each package, tray, sack, or pallet. When this is done,the software does the following:

l Produces output files (databases) containing the data needed to print address and containerlabels in correct USPS sequence. You can use output files as input for Label Studio or otherlabel-printing software.

l Calculates postage and produces USPS forms, including documentation for mailing accept-ance. If your job involves more than one documented mailing, the software automatically pre-pares a separate form for each mailing.

l Produces reports to guide you in assembling packages and containers.

The software carries out many USPS rules automatically. And when it's not fully automatic, the soft-ware still helps you comply with USPS rules.

User Guide | 2

Members of the Presort family

This guide covers three different programs:

l Presort Job

l Presort Views

l PrintForm Presort

We provide details of each program on the following pages. We're covering them all here in oneguide because they have so much in common.

This section explains a little about each program. When we use the simple name "Presort," it meansthat the feature we're discussing applies to all products in the Presort family.

See Also

Overview of features

Presort Job

Presort Job is a program for processing database files. It takes input records from up to 255 inputdatabases. You can send Presort Job output to another database or split it among several outputdatabases. Presort Job also produces statistical reports and postal forms.

Presort Job is batch job-oriented software. It does not directly support the task of job setup. It isstrictly for job processing.

To set up a job, you use a text editor or word-processing program. You put your instructions andinformation into a text file called a job file. Here's an excerpt:

BEGIN Execution ========================Presort (Y/N)........................ = y+ Name Optimizer (Y/N)............... = n+ USPS Optional Procedures (Y/N)..... = n+ Sequence Output by Mailflow (Y/N).. = nIntelligent Mail Barcode(see NOTE)... = imbCreate Presort Reports (Y/N)......... = y+ On-Demand Reporting (Y/N).......... = n

User Guide | 3

Create Address Output File (Y/N)..... = nCreate Package Output File (Y/N)..... = nCreate Container Output File (Y/N)... = nCreate Pallet Output File (Y/N)...... = n+ Post to Input File (Y/N)........... = nWarn Before File Overwrite (Y/N)..... = yShow Detailed Process Messages (Y/N). = ySave Work Files (Y/N)................ = yWork File Directory (path)........... =END

When your job file is ready, start the software. On most computers you type a command line; on Win-dows systems, you may type a command line or simply double-click the program icon.

When the software starts, it verifies the entries in your job file. If there is any error, the programreports and stops. You edit your job file, fix the problem, and start the software again.

When you finish verification, the software begins processing your job. During processing, the soft-ware displays progress messages on your screen. (It is often possible, and preferable, to direct thesemessages into a log file.)

See Also

Tips on sequence of job-file sections

How to verify that your job is ready

Tips for running your job

Presort Views

Presort Views is a program for processing database files. In a way, Views is built on top of Presort,just as your house sits on its foundation. With Views, you have these additional features:

l Views presents easy-to-use, graphical screens with menus, wizards, toolbars, and onlinehelp. These guides and tools save time and prevent setup errors, especially for new users.When it's time to process your job, you simply select a command from a menu.

l Views can set up some parts of your job automatically. And it verifies your job setup as yougo, so it catches and corrects most errors more quickly.

User Guide | 4

Many users perform job setup and processing on the same computer. It is also possible to use Viewsfor job setup on one computer and then process on another, perhaps more powerful, computer.

Remote procedure may require a special license from BCC Software and may also require somethird-party software. Also, the remote procedure does not support running jobs within Views. Formore information, see Views Quick Start Guide.

See Also

Using the Views wizard

Presort for PrintForm

PrintForm Presort is a program for processing print-image files. It is part of the PrintForm Mailing Sys-tem, an integrated set of programs that bring postal automation and discounts to forms, statements,and other documents produced on high-speed laser printing and inserting systems.

PrintForm Presort offers an appropriate subset of the features of Presort.

See Also

Overview of features

Overview of features

The following table gives you a brief overview of some key features that the software provides. Thisis not a complete list of features.

Feature Presort, and Presort Views

Schemes and sortlevels and Reportsfor your own mailmanagement

Offers a full line of presort schemes and reports for First-Class™, Peri-odicals, Standard Mail, and Package Services.

Carrier-sequencemailing: LOT andwalk sequence

Does not assign LOT or walk sequence; however, it does accept mailinglists that have been through LOT or Computerized Delivery Sequence(CDS) processing. Presort verifies eligibility for high-density and/or sat-uration rates.

User Guide | 5

Feature Presort, and Presort Views

Multiple entrypoints

Supports destination entry, zone skipping, and plant-verified drop ship-ment. Prepares all required USPS® forms. Supports up to 32,500 entrypoints per job.

Setting up yourmailing list andinput files

Extracts ZIP™ and ZIP+4™ Codes from a multi-line record format or from acombined city-state-ZIP-ZIP+4 field.

Multiple versions,editions, or ratecategories

Supports mixed-weight mail, multiple editions, and other multi-versionmail pieces. Prepares the Manifest Listing. Supports up to 32,500 ver-sions per job.

Firm packaging andmulti-piece parcels

Prepares Periodicals firm bundles and applies proper rates. In PackageServices, Presort supports a concept that works like a firm bundle, but itis called a multi-piece parcel and it is documented differently.

Static polybags Facilitates the creation of polybags containing multiple periodicals ver-sions, each of which can be treated as a single flat, potentially resultingin large savings on piece charges.

Segmenting Breaks a job into separate mailings for whatever reason you like. Sup-ports up to 9,999 segments per job.

Introduction toMailflow

Alters the usual mail-stream sequence to suit truck dispatching or otherneeds, in one run. Performs a "back-end" resorting to resequence wholemailings, or to change the sequence of packages, containers, or palletswithin mailings, or to alter the traditional mailstream hierarchy.

Mixed-classcomail

Puts a mix of Periodicals flats, Standard Mail flats, and Bound Printed Mat-ter flats (or any two of those three) in the same bundles when makingpackages on pallets. Comailing can benefit mailers through increased dis-counts, fewer packages (less labor), more efficient pallet makeup, andimproved drop-ship penetration.

Intelligent Mail®

barcode (IMb)support for lettersand flats

The IM® barcode is a single 4-state barcode that combines routing ZIPCode information and tracking information. The IMb replaces thePOSTNET™ and PLANET barcodes. You can use the IM barcode to qualifyfor automation discounts as long as you met all other automation require-ments.

User Guide | 6

Feature Presort, and Presort Views

Intelligent Mail®

package barcode(IMpb) support forparcels

The Intelligent Mail® Package barcode (IMpb) is to be used on all parcelsthat are claiming presort or destination entry pricing. This includes First-Class™ Package Service parcels, Standard Mail parcels, Bound PrintedMatter, Media Mail®, Library Mail, and Parcel Select®, and Parcel SelectLightweight pieces.

Flats SequencingSystem (FSS)

FSS is a mail-sortation machine that sorts flat-sized mail into deliverypoint sequence (in the order that the mail is to be delivered). The FSSpreparation is optional and available for palletized bundles of StandardMail, Periodicals, Package Services Bound Printed Matter (PSVC BPM)flats, and Mixed class comail. FSS does not support bundles placed insacks or trays.

Assigning andtracking uniqueIM barcode serialnumbers

As a requirement to comply with the Full Service Mail option, IntelligentMail barcodes must be unique for at least 45 days from the postage state-ment mailing date. Presort can automatically create unique IM barcodeserial numbers and assign them to letters and flats, parcels, trays/sacks,pallets, and air freight boxes (AFB).

Air freight boxsupport

Air freight boxes (AFBs) are used for expedited delivery of time-sensitivematerials. You can prepare, label, pay, and transport AFB mailings anduse eInduction to identify the AFB as a container.

User Guide | 7

Presort for beginnersThe software takes the information about you, the mail piece, the database, and your mailing plans,and provides output for reports and labels. You can use that output to print labels, assemble the mailpieces, and enter the mail.

The following graphic shows you a broad overview of the mailing process:

Eight key tasks in any job

In any job, there are some key tasks that you have to perform to set up your jobs. Beyond theseeight basics, the rest is either optional or purely administrative.

These basic tasks are intended for new users, along with tips for running your jobs.

l Select your schemes. A scheme is a set of USPS rules for mail preparation (how to form pack-ages and containers, how to calculate postage, and so on). Some jobs involve only onescheme, others more. The software can help you select the schemes you need.

User Guide | 8

l Select reports and forms. Which reports do you need? The software can help you choose thereports and forms that the USPS requires. You'll probably want one or two others for yourown use.

l Describe your mail piece. The software needs information about the design, size, and weightof your mail piece. With this information, the software figures out how many pieces will fitinto a tray, sack, or pallet, and how to calculate your postage.

l Describe mailer and postage payment method. To fill out USPS forms, the software needsinformation about you (and, if applicable, your client) such as name, address and phone. Thesoftware also needs information about how you pay postage (for example, your permit num-ber, meter setting, and so on).

l Specify the post office. Which post office will you enter (submit) your mail to? This inform-ation will appear on your reports and container labels. It may also affect your postage.

l Describe your input file(s). You have a database: a mailing list of customer names andaddresses. You have to tell the software where that file is and how to interpret it (see theDatabase Prep guide for details on input-file setup).

l Define your output files. Output files (databases) give you the data you need to print labelsor mail-merge documents in mail-stream sequence. You may need address labels, tray andsack tags, and pallet placards. Output files become input for Label Studio or other label-print-ing systems.

l Specify the location of the auxiliary files. The software depends on a small set of files con-taining USPS data. We provide you with updated files every month. All you have to do isinstall these updates promptly and tell the software where the files are located on your com-puter.

See Also

Selecting your schemes and reports

Setting up your postage and forms: Mailing information

Setting up your mail piece: Version description

Setting up your post office: Entry point description

User Guide | 9

Setting up your mailing list and input files

Setting up your mailing labels: Output file

Auxiliary files

Tips on sequence of job-file sections

The sequence of sections (blocks) in job files is crucial for two kinds of job sections. Getting thesesections in the wrong order can cause problems.

Job section Where to get help determining blocksequence

Presort schemes To get your schemes in the right order, useour template jobs or the Views Wizard.

Multiple entry points If your job involves multiple entry points, youneed to be careful about the sequence ofEntry Point Descriptions.

For three other kinds of job sections, no particular sequence is mandatory. The sequence of job sec-tions will affect sequence in your reports and output files. So for efficiency, you might want to placesections in a particular sequence of your own devising.

Job section How block sequence affects the job

Reports The software creates most reports in the order that Report sections appear inyour job. Changing that order usually doesn't make much difference one wayor another.

Multipleversions

If your job involves multiple versions or editions, consider the sequence ofVersion Descriptions. This will affect sequence in reports and output files.

Segmenting If your job involves the Segmenting feature, consider the sequence of Seg-ment Descriptions. This will affect sequence in reports and output files.

Other than the sections mentioned above, the sequence of sections does not matter and you mayarrange sections in any order you find convenient. Some users who edit job files say that it's helpfulto place at the top those sections that you edit most often.

User Guide | 10

See Also

Selecting your schemes and reports

Setting up your postage and forms: Mailing information

Setting up your mail piece: Version description

Setting up your post office: Entry point description

Setting up your mailing list and input files

Setting up your mailing labels: Output file

Auxiliary files

Tips for setting up your definition (DEF) file

Be sure to create a definition (DEF) file to accompany your input file into the software. See the Data-base Prep manual for details.

If you try to run the software without performing this important step, it will be unable to read yourinput file and the job won't run.

Tips for setting up reports

Be careful when you set up the format of your reports. If you set left and right margins, remember tosubtract them from the width of the paper itself. The same applies to the top and bottom margins.When you subtract the margins from the sheet size, the result is the printable area. Most reportsrequire a printable area at least 132 characters wide. You might have to set up your printer to use acondensed font or landscape orientation.

USPS forms require letter-size paper (8.5 by 11 inches). For reports, we recommend a wide-carriageprinter and 11 by 14-inch paper.

If you print reports on a Hewlett-Packard laser printer, or one that can emulate an HP laser, we canhelp you set the right Printer Init and Printer Reset codes to control margin, font, and so on. See theReports section of the Presort Job-File Reference manual.

Tip for nonprofit mailers

Nonprofit rates are available in Periodicals Class and Standard Mail, but not First-Class. If you selectFirst-Class and indicate that you are a nonprofit mailer, the software will report an error.

User Guide | 11

Using the Views wizard

Use the wizard in Views to create new jobs.

The wizard asks you a few questions about your job and how to prepare it. Then, the wizard sets upyour job with the right combination of presort schemes and reports.

1. Choose File > New > Wizard.

2. At each window, provide the information the wizard asks for. Then click Next.

3. When you get to the last window, you can run the job right away. Or, if you prefer, you cansimply save the job. If you save the job rather than running it, you can look at and adjust set-tings before you run the job.

Selecting your schemes and reports

Selecting schemes and reports can be daunting — you would need to know a lot about USPS rules.Fortunately, that usually isn't necessary when using our software.

Several template job files are installed with the software. Templates are half-completed job files, pre-set with schemes and reports. You can find them in the Template directory.

The templates are not quite as helpful as the wizard. However, the templates are useful for cus-tomers who don't use the Views program. To see what template is right for you, see the tableexplaining templates in the Presort Job-File Reference or Views online help. Then you'll have theright schemes and reports selected, and they will be set up with reasonable starting values. Fromthere, you can fill out the rest of the job.

Setting up your mailing list and input files

The software accepts up to 255 input files in one job. Most jobs involve only one input file. Inputfiles are explained in our Database Prep manual. You should read that guide before trying to run thesoftware.

For flat files and some types of databases, you have to provide a separate file that describes thephysical format of your mailing list. Database Prep explains guidelines for format files.

Most of the work of setting up your input file is done outside of the software. Within the software,you need to define the location and filename of the input file. Use the Override Default Format Fileand Override Default DEF File parameter to specify the format and definition file options that youwant to use above all other settings.

User Guide | 12

For example, let's say that you typically use a template when creating a job, and you have the formatand definition files already specified in the Auxiliary Files block. You can set these override optionsto use a different format or definition file without having to remove the default options in the Aux-iliary Files block.

Input fields

The software recognizes a specific set of input fields. Some of the field names are listed below. Thislist is meant to be just a glimpse of what's available. For complete details, refer to the Quick Refer-ence for Views and Job-File Products.

You will not necessarily work with all of these fields. In fact, simpler jobs often involve only a dozenor so of these fields.

Database Prep explains how to set up these fields. The Quick Reference for Views and Job-FileProducts discusses each field, to help you choose the fields you need.

Example input fields

CART Entry_ID LOT_Order Version_ID

City Firm_ID Meter_Rate Walk_Seq

Copies Height Name_Line Width

Country Intl_Regn Priority Wt_Lbs

County Key_Code Seed_ID Wt_Oz

Delete Last_Line Segment_ID ZIP

Bus_Ind Line1–Line6 Subscriber ZIP4

DPBC LOT Thickness ZIP10

Setting up your mail piece: Version Description

In any job, the software needs information about your mail piece. This part of job setup is called theVersion Description.

CAUTION Accurate size and weight information is critical. We urge you to obtain somesample mail pieces and measure them carefully.

User Guide | 13

The procedure for measuring samples depends on whether you are preparing your mail loose intrays, or in sacks of packages. You'll find detailed instructions for measuring samples in the PresortJob-File Reference or Views online help.

CAUTION If you overstate or understate the weight or size of your mail piece, the software isnot able to sort the mail into containers properly, and your reports will be less accurate. It is alsopossible that you might pay more postage than you should, or your whole mailing might berejected at the post office.

See Also

Multiple versions, editions, or rate categories

Processing categories

Mail pieces are divided into processing categories according to attributes such as shape, size, thick-ness, rigidity, weight, and barcoding.

In your job setup, you indicate which category you believe applies to your piece. The software com-pares your choice with your piece's characteristics to make sure you have legal settings. You canchoose from the following processing categories:

Processing category 1C PER STD PSVC Comail PM

Automated Letter X X X

Machinable Letter X X

Nonmachinable Letter X X

PER Nonauto. Letter X

Automated Flat X X X X X

PER Alternative Auto Flat X X

Flat X X X X X

Postcard X

Double Postcard X

User Guide | 14

Processing category 1C PER STD PSVC Comail PM

Machinable Parcel X X

Irregular Parcel X X X

Machinable MarketingParcel

X

Irregular MarketingParcel

X

1C Parcel X

Customized Marketing Mail X

1C Irregular Parcel X

PM Parcel X

If you're unsure which category applies to your mail piece, check USPS publications or talk with yourpostmaster or USPS account representative.

Changing physical dimensions

Perhaps you must run your job before the pieces have been printed. Ask your client or company ifyou can get paper samples and make mock-up pieces. Or you might derive size and weight datafrom a previous, similar job.

Here's a typical problem: A big mailing is coming up and the pieces are being printed now. You'vegot to be ready to assemble the mail as soon as the printing is finished. So you estimate piecedimensions. You run the presort and print your address and container labels and reports.Everything's ready. Or so you think.

The mail pieces are then delivered and it turns out that they are slightly heavier and longer, andthey contain more advertising than you were told.

Don't panic. You might be able to recover without too much trouble. You may still be able to useyour labels and even some of your reports. You can go into your job, and adjust the Version Descrip-tion as necessary. Then reprint your USPS forms.

User Guide | 15

The software detects that you changed the piece dimensions since you ran the presort, and warnsyou about this. But it will then produce USPS forms that reflect the actual weight and size (and inPeriodicals, advertising percentage) of your pieces.

CAUTION Points of caution about this technique:

The piece must remain in the same processing category.

The dimension changes should be slight. If your pieces are thicker or thinner than you estim-ated, you may have some problems with packages being too thin or thick, or trays being under-or over-filled. If the pieces are heavier or lighter than you estimated, you might have problemswith under- or overweight sacks or pallets.

BCC Software, LLC cannot be responsible for any acceptance problems that might result from ajob in which the piece dimensions are adjusted after presorting.

Packages and containers are too big or small

Be careful when setting the dimensions of your mail piece in Version Description. Accurate inform-ation is critical. If your dimensions (especially piece thickness and weight) are off by as little as onepercent, you may face problems in assembling containers, and the USPS could reject your mailing.

Prepare a sample package or tray (as appropriate), then count the pieces, weigh it, and measure itcarefully. Ask your postmaster or acceptance clerk to demonstrate how they measure packages andtrays, and follow the same procedure.

Don't guess, and don't measure by eyeball. Remember, your results must be accurate. A fewminutes of careful work at this step in the process can save you big headaches later. If you'll pardonthe pun, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure.

Sometimes, the software users are asked to run a job before pieces have arrived from the printer. Inthat case, you might:

l Mock up some sample pieces from blank paper and envelopes.

l Copy dimensions from a previous, similar job for the same client.

l Negotiate for permission to wait to run the job until dimensions are known.

Automation compatibility

To qualify for automation rates, your letters or flats must comply with some very specific USPS rules.The USPS sets these rules based on what their machinery can handle. The rules are spelled out in

User Guide | 16

the Domestic Mail Manual. Refer to DMM 201.

From the dimensions that you enter in the Version Description block, the software may be able todetermine that your piece is not automation-compatible. The software can detect a piece that is toobig or small, too thick or heavy, for example. the software can also check the aspect ratio (widthdivided by height). If the software determines that your piece is not automation-compatible, it willissue a verification error message.

The software cannot check many other characteristics, such as glue or tabs or how the piece is prin-ted. So successful job verification does not give you any assurance that your piece is fully auto-mation-compatible.

Fletters

Fletters, also know as digest-size pieces, are treated partly as automation flats and partly as regularletters. You have to be careful when setting up the Version Description and the presort schemes.

Setting up your post office: Entry Point Description

To fill out USPS forms, the software needs information about the USPS facility where you plan toenter your mail and any discounts for which your mail may be eligible.

You should be able to get the following information from your postmaster or USPS account rep-resentative:

Information Description

USPS facility The software needs information about the office where you will enter your mail.

You may need to identify two offices if you verify the mail locally (that's the ori-gin office), but then you truck it to another office for entry. For example, youmight have your mail verified by the USPS in your city, and then truck it tonearby towns for a "destination-entry" discount.

Discounts You may be able to claim a destination-entry discount on mail that will bedelivered within the service area of the entry office. The USPS doesn't have totruck this mail to another office, so some of the transportation savings may bepassed on to you. Ask your postmaster or USPS account rep about your eli-gibility.

See Also

User Guide | 17

Eligibility for discounts

Introduction to multiple entry points

Setting up your postage and forms: Mailing Information

To fill out USPS forms, the software needs information about you and how you pay postage. In theMailing Information block of your job, enter the following information:

Information Description

Postage To fill out your reports and USPS forms, the software needs to know how youintend to pay postage: stamps, meter, or permit. If you apply stamps, includethe denomination.

Contacts To save time filling out USPS forms, you'll need to give information about thecompany that owns the mail and the company that prepares and submits themail. Often, these are the same company.

For information about parameters available in this block and related parameters,refer to the Presort Job-File Reference or the help file.

See Also

Introduction to reports

USPS forms to submit with mailings

Reports for your own mail management

Setting up your mailing labels: Output File

Label and document printing are the most common purposes for output files. You can use them asinput for our Label Studio program, or other label software. Then your labels or documents will beprinted in mail-stream sequence. The software can make four types of output databases:

l Address

l Package

User Guide | 18

l Container

l Pallet

An address file usually contains one record for each mail piece. Typically it contains the same fieldsas your input mailing list—name, address, and so on—plus Presort information appended to eachrecord.

A package, container, or pallet file usually contains one record per package, container, or pallet(respectively). All of the fields in these files are generated by the software, although the package filecan contain fields from the input file.

Available output data

While processing, the software generates data about your mail pieces, packages, sacks or trays, andpallets (as appropriate). These pieces of data are available for you to place in the fields of outputfiles.

The list below provides just a glimpse of what's available. For complete details on output fields, referto the Quick Reference for Views and Job-File Products.

Example output fields

Contents File_No Pkg_Level Record_No

Ctn_Barcd Issue_Date Pkg_Rate Scheme_No

Ctn_Level Mailing_ID Pkg_Thk Ver _Name

Ctn_Rate Manfst_Key Pkg_Wt Ver_No

Ctn_Type No_Pkgs Plt_Vol Ver_Wt

Ctn_Wt Opt_Endrs Plt_Wt Zebra

Ent_Pt_Nam Pallet Postage ZIP_Range

Ent_Pt_No Piece_Rate Rate_Endrs Zone

Set up your output files

There are two tasks you need to do when setting up an output file:

User Guide | 19

l Define the format. Most of the time, you will want to create a new database for output. If so,you have to define the format of that new file. That includes the file type, the sequence offields, their names and lengths, and so on. If you would prefer to overwrite or appendrecords to an existing database, then you don't need to define the format of a new file.

l Determine the content. You determine what information will be placed, or posted, in thefields of the output file.

For address files, you can define the format and determine the content manually or automaticallywith cloning.

Method Description

Cloning Your address output file can automatically be created with the same format and con-tent as your input file. You can add additional fields generated by the software, suchas endorsements, keylines, and so on, at the end of the file. For package, container,or pallet files, cloning applies only to setting the file's format. You have to manuallyset up the data that will be placed in each field.

To clone the format and content of the input file, provide the input file name at theCreate File For Output block.

Manual If your input file contains fields that you don't want to clone, you can turn off cloningand specify each field manually.

Use the Create File For Output and the Output File blocks to perform these tasksmanually. If you prefer to set up the file format and data manually for package, con-tainer, or pallet files, you can look for help setting up the output file blocks in any ofthe template job files in the software's template subdirectory.

Auxiliary files

With the software, you receive a set of supporting files that contain USPS data such as labeling lists,zone information, and facility information used for mail sortations. Each month, you will receive anemail from BCC Software when the monthly directories have been updated and are available onlinefrom the BCC Software Community. It is important to update your directories as soon as they areavailable. The 2018 schedule can be found here:https://postalpro.usps.com/Jan2018Release/LabelingListandMDFSchedule.

You will receive updated directory files in the month prior to when they become effective, and theyare effective for two months. See Directory lifecycle for more information.

User Guide | 20

The Auxiliary Files block is where you specify the locations of these files. Depending on how youspecify the path and filenames in the USPS Presort Data Folder parameter and individual directoryfile parameters, Presort can select the directories automatically, or you can specify which directoriesyou want Presort to use. See Presort can select the directories automatically and You can select thedirectories yourself for more information.

This table contains information about the auxiliary files and how they are used.

Directory name Filename Applicablemailings

Purpose

ZIP-City File(ZCF) directory

YYMM_zcf.dir All mailings Can verify that zip codes are valid.Also used in sorting and labeling of5 digit containers.

Mail ProcessingCenter (MPC)directory

YYMM_mpc.dir All mailings Contains information about serviceareas of SCFs, ADCs, NDCs, andother facilities, used for sortingmail and for forms and labels. Usedin creating containers and labelsusing the labeling lists.

Zone directory YYMM_zone.dir PER, PSVCBPM, ParcelSelect

Determines zone "distance"between entry and delivery point.

DeliveryStatistics File(DSF) directory

YYMM_dsf.dir Walk-sequencedmailings

Used for saturation mailings tocheck the number of stops todetermine density was met for thesaturation rate.

Facilitydirectory

YYMM_facility.dir All mailings Contains information about USPSdrop ship facilities, such as dropsite keys, drop site names, anddrop site delivery addresses.

Mail Directiondirectory

YYMM_mail-direct.dir

All mailings Used to determine where mailshould be dropped based on whenthe drop will occur to receive dis-counts.

User Guide | 21

Directory name Filename Applicablemailings

Purpose

Default Formatfile

<file>.fmt N/A Indicates the format file to use foryour input files if an FMT file cor-responding to the input file is notfound.

DefaultDefinition file

<file>.def N/A Indicates the definition file to useto map input file fields to Presortfields if a DEF file corresponding tothe input file is not found.

Mail direction data

When you claim destination discounts, the software uses USPS FAST data to determine valid Net-work Distribution Centers (NDCs), Area Distribution Centers (ADCs), Sectional Center Facilities(SCFs), and Destination Delivery Units (DDUs) for your mailings based on the mailing date and themail piece's shape and class. Some postal facilities accept only certain mail classes and shapes,because of their sorting equipment.

USPS FAST data is updated regularly, when facilities change what mail they accept and process. Forinstance, if a postal facility is closed because of a natural disaster, the FAST data is updated to divertmail from that facility to another facility. The concept of postal facilities changing what they acceptand diverting mail to other facilities is known as mail redirection or mail direction.

The FAST data used to determine valid facilities for your mailings is part of the FAST drop-datescheduling program. Participation in this program is optional and in no way affects your use of FASTdata within the software. See the FAST web site for more information.

Downloading and installing directories

When postal directory updates are available, you will receive an email from BCC Software with dir-ections for accessing the download page where you will find the new directory files, release notes,and installation instructions.

Directory lifecycle

Directories have a three-month lifecycle, which is comprised of three phases: Notification, Active,and Outgoing. Directories are valid for mailings with estimated drop dates that fall in either the Act-ive phase or Outgoing phase for that directory release, which are during the second and thirdmonths of the lifecycle.

User Guide | 22

Notification phase

During the first month, the directories will be available around the second week of the month so youcan review the upcoming changes and plan for mailings with estimated drop dates that fall withinthe next two months. The directories cannot be used for estimated drop dates in that month.

Active phase

During the second month, the directories become effective on the first day of the month and arevalid to use for mailings with estimated drop dates in that month and the next month. This is the pre-ferred directory set to use for mailing dates that fall within that month.

Outgoing phase

During the third month, the directories are valid to use only for estimated drop dates in that month;the directories expire at the end of that month. There is a newer set of data files in a differentrelease that are in active phase, but files in the outgoing phase are acceptable to use for mailingswith estimated drop dates in that month.

Example

The following example demonstrates the lifecycle for USPS Release 5, also referred to as the"September directories." These directories can only be used for estimated drop dates that fall inSeptember and October. The filename structure for each of the “September directories” will be1409_<directory>.dir. (See Directory filenames for information about the directory filenamestructure.)

l In August, the "September directories" in Release 5 are in the Notification phase and cannotbe used for estimated drop dates in August. They can be used for estimated drop dates inSeptember and October.

l In September, the "September directories" in Release 5 are in the Active phase and the dir-ectories can be used for estimated drop dates in September and October.

l In October, the "September directories" in Release 5 are in the Outgoing phase and the dir-ectories can still be used for estimated drop dates in October.

l In November, the "September directories" in Release 5 cannot be used because they will beexpired by October 31. Either the "October directories" in Release 6 (1410_<dir-ectory>.dir) or "November directories" in Release 7 (1411_<directory>.dir) canbe used for estimated drop dates that fall in November.

User Guide | 23

See Which directories are valid for my mailing? for information about the directories that can beused based on your mailing's estimated drop date.

Directory filenames

Each directory file is uniquely named with a filename structure of YYMM_<directory>.dir. Theprefix YYMM represents the year and month that the directory file first becomes effective. See Dir-ectory lifecycle for more information about when directories can be used for mailings.

Each file in a directory set for a given month will have the same YYMM prefix. For example, the Octo-ber 2016 directories are named as follows:

Directory name Filename

ZIP-City File (ZCF) directory 1610_zcf.dir

Mail Processing Center (MPC) directory 1610_mpc.dir

Zone directory 1610_zone.dir

Delivery Statistics File (DSF) directory 1610_dsf.dir

Facility directory 1610_facility.dir

Mail Direction directory 1610_maildirect.dir

User Guide | 24

The YYMM prefix allows for chronological sorting of files within a folder so that all of the directoryfiles for one set will appear together. This is handy when you are browsing to identify a specific dir-ectory when selecting the directories to use yourself. Because the filenames are unique, you canstore all directory files in one folder without risk of overwriting any files.

See Selecting the directory files for a list of the jobfile parameters that are used to specify the dir-ectory files.

Storing directories

Because each directory filename is unique, all directory files can be stored together in the samefolder, which we highly recommend. The ...\ss\dir folder is the default directory location.

At any given time, there are three sets of directories that are available to use for your mailing: Noti-fication, Active, and Outgoing. We highly recommend storing these three directory sets in the samefolder. When allowing Presort to select the directories automatically, Presort will look for directoriesonly in the folder you specify in the USPS Presort Data Folder parameter. Presort will not search fordirectories in other folders. See Directory lifecycle for more information about when directories arevalid to use.

Keeping all directories in the same folder will allow Presort to find the appropriate directories to usefor your mailing. If you are selecting the directories yourself, this will make finding the appropriatedirectories easier. See Presort can select the directories automatically and You can select the dir-ectories yourself for more information about specifying the directories to use.

There is no automated way to remove directories from this folder that are no longer valid andexpired. Directories will continue to accumulate in this location until you manually delete or removethem. See Removing expired directories for guidelines on removing expired directory files that youno longer use.

User Guide | 25

Selecting the directory files

To select the directory files, use the following parameters in the Auxiliary Files block.

USPS Presort Data Folder (See Note).. =ZCF Directory ([path]YYMM_zcf.dir)... =Mail Proc Ctr Dir([path]YYMM_mpc.dir) =PER/PSVC Zone Dir([path]YYMM_zone.dir)=PER/STD Del Stats([path]YYMM_dsf.dir) =MailDirect.([path]YYMM_facility.dir). =MailDirect.([path]YYMM_maildirect.dir)=

See "Auxiliary Files block (Presort)" in the Job File Reference for specific information about theseparameters.

You can configure Presort to select the directories automatically (recommended), or you can specifythe directory files yourself (default behavior). This depends on how you populate these parameters.See Presort can select the directories automatically and You can select the directories yourself formore information.

Presort can select the directories automatically

You can configure Presort to select the directories automatically. This is the recommended methodof selecting directories to ensure that correct ones will always be used. Presort will select the cor-rect directories based on the estimated drop dates of your mailing. See Which directories are validfor my mailing? for details on how the correct directories for your mailing are determined.

To configure Presort to select the directories:

1. Specify the folder path and filename of where the directories are located in the USPS Pre-sort Data Folder parameter in the Auxiliary Files block. Presort will look for and choose thecorrect directories from this folder. See "USPS Presort Data Folder parameter" in the Job FileReference for details about this parameter.

2. Leave all of the individual directory file parameters blank. If these parameters are populatedwith any path and/or filenames, Presort will use those directories.

NOTE In Views, you can quickly remove any existing information from the individual dir-ectory file parameters by using the Use ZCF Path for all Directories button. See Copyingfile paths in Views for more information.

Valid files must be located in the folder specified in the USPS Presort Data Folder parameter thatmatch the filenames Presort expects to find. If the files cannot be found, Presort will error. Presort

User Guide | 26

will not search any other location for the files. We highly recommend that you download and installthe latest directories every month to ensure that valid directories are always available. See Storingdirectories for more information.

When a file like the Zone directory (YYMM_zone.dir) or the Delivery Statistics File (DSF) directory(YYMM_dsf.dir) is not required for your job, such as Standard Mail not using zones or a non-CARTmailing that doesn’t use delivery statistics, those directory files do not have to be present in thefolder specified in the USPS Presort Data Folder parameter.

To specify the directories to use yourself, see You can select the directories yourself.

You can select the directories yourself

If you prefer, you can select the directories to use yourself. However, the process of determiningwhich directories are valid to use for your mailing is complex, especially when there are multipleestimated drop dates and multiple entry points. We recommend letting Presort choose the dir-ectories automatically to ensure that the correct directories are always used. (See Presort can selectthe directories automatically.)

To select the directories yourself, you must first determine the correct directories to use. The dir-ectories you specify must be within the effective date range of the estimated drop dates. See Whichdirectories are valid for my mailing? for assistance in determining the correct directories to use.

IMPORTANT If you only run a job occasionally, you should verify each time that the dir-ectories specified are valid. If you need to specify new directories, you will need to set up all ofyour entry points again using those new directories.

When selecting the directories, we highly recommend that you use directories that are all for thesame month, which all start with the same YYMM prefix.

You specify the directories to use by populating parameters in the Auxiliary Files block. The wayyou populate the parameters depends on where the files are located, either all in the same folder orin different folders.

NOTE The USPS Presort Data Folder parameter individual directory file parameters willaccept a relative path based on the current working directory.

To specify the directories yourself

User Guide | 27

If you want to specify the directories to use yourself and they are located in the same folder, enterthe pathname of the folder that contains the directories into the USPS Presort Data Folder para-meter, and enter the appropriate filename with no path (YYMM_<directory>.dir) into each indi-vidual directory file parameter.For example, to use the directories for the month of October 2014 located in C:\ss\dirs, youwould populate the parameters like this:

USPS Presort Data Folder (See Note).. = C:\ss\dirsZCF Directory ([path]YYMM_zcf.dir)... = 1410_zcf.dirMail Proc Ctr Dir([path]YYMM_mpc.dir) = 1410_mpc.dirPER/PSVC Zone Dir([path]YYMM_zone.dir)= 1410_zone.dirPER/STD Del Stats([path]YYMM_dsf.dir) = 1410_dsf.dirMailDirect.([path]YYMM_facility.dir). = 1410_facility.dirMailDirect.([path]YYMM_maildirect.dir)= 1410_maildirect.dir

If you want to specify the directories to use yourself and they are located in different folders (thisis not common, and not recommended), enter the appropriate full path and filename of each dir-ectory ([path]YYMM_<directory>.dir) into each parameter. Leave the USPS Presort DataFolder parameter blank.For example, to use some directories for the month of October 2014, with some located inC:\ss\dirs, and some located in C:\ss\data_files, you might populate the parameters likethis:

ZCF Directory ([path]YYMM_zcf.dir)... = C:\ss\dirs\1410_zcf.dirMail Proc Ctr Dir([path]YYMM_mpc.dir) = C:\ss\data_files\1410_mpc.dirPER/PSVC Zone Dir([path]YYMM_zone.dir)= C:\ss\dirs\1410_zone.dirPER/STD Del Stats([path]YYMM_dsf.dir) = C:\ss\dirs\1410_dsf.dirMailDirect.([path]YYMM_facility.dir). = C:\ss\data_files\1410_facility.dirMailDirect.([path]YYMM_maildirect.dir)= C:\ss\data_files\1410_maildirect.dir

Valid directory files must exist in the location you specify; Presort will not search for directory files inany other location. If Presort cannot find the directories it is looking for, Presort will error.

If one directory file parameter is filled in, all remaining directory file parameters must also be filledin, except for the PER/STD Del Stats ([path]YYMM_dsf.dir) and PER/PSVC Zone Dir ([path]YYMM_zone.dir) parameters, which are optional for mailings that do not use these directories. Otherwise,you will receive an error.

To specify directory files using Views

In Views, if you browse to select directories, the Specify <directory name> Directory windowappears with the File name field populated with the filename of the directory that Presort wouldselect. For example:

User Guide | 28

l If the job is set up with estimated drop dates ranging from September 20 to October 20,1409_zcf.dir (for September 2014) will appear in the file name field when browsing forthe ZCF directory.

l If there are multiple valid directories, Presort will show the name of the one it would use if itwere going to choose (which will generally be the newest directory that would be valid). Forexample, if the estimated drop dates range from October 8 to October 25, 1410_zcf.dir(for October 2014) will appear in the file name field when browsing for the ZCF directory.

Presort will not verify whether the directories are in the specified location(s); it will just suggest thename of the file to be used. If the file cannot be found, you will receive an error.

For ease in finding the correct directory files, we suggest that you sort them in descending numer-ical order, so that the filenames with the largest numbers appear at the top of the list, which are thenewest directory files. For example, 1410_zcf.dir will appear above 1409_zcf.dir. Fromhere, you can easily find the directory files you are looking for.

Optionally, once you have entered information into the ZCF Directory field, you can quickly fill inthe remaining directory fields by using the Use ZCF File Path for all Directories button. See Copy-ing file paths in Views for more information.

Copying file paths in Views

In Views, once you have entered information into the ZCF Directory field, you can quickly fill in theremaining directory fields by using the Use ZCF File Path for all Directories button:

1. Open the Auxiliary window.

2. Enter the ZCF directory path and/or filename ([path]YYMM_zcf.dir or YYMM_zcf.dir).

3. Click Use ZCF File Path for all Directories.

The information from the ZCF Directory field, whether it is a full path and filename or just a filename,will be duplicated in the remaining directory fields. The filenames will be changed to reflect therespective directories and will be for the same month and year as the ZCF Directory file.

User Guide | 29

For example, if the ZCF Directory field contains C:\ss\dir\1501_zcf.dir, the remainingfields will be populated as shown:

If you enter just the filename in this parameter, only the filenames will be populated in the individualdirectory fields. When there are only filenames specified in the directory parameters, the path to thefolder where the directory files are located must be specified in the USPS Presort Data Folder field.

If the ZCF Directory field is blank, clicking Use ZCF File Path for all Directories will clear any inform-ation in the remaining directory fields. If these fields are already blank, nothing will be copied intothem and they will remain blank.

This will not configure Presort to pick the directories automatically. It just duplicates the informationin the ZCF Directory field. If you want Presort to automatically select the directories, see Presort canselect the directories automatically.

This feature also does not verify whether the directories specified are valid, have the correct file-name, or exist in the specified location. Presort will not search for directories if the exact files spe-cified cannot be found in the specified location. You will receive an error if Presort cannot locate thefiles.

See Also

You can select the directories yourself

Which directories are valid for my mailing?

Directories have a three-month lifecycle, however they are valid for mailings with estimated dropdates that fall in the second two months of the lifecycle. Your mailings can use a given directory setonly if the estimated drop date falls within the Active or Outgoing phases for that directory release.

User Guide | 30

For information about the three phases of a directory release and when a given directory set is validto use, see Directory lifecycle.

Presort selects the directories based on the estimated drop date of your mailing and will generallyuse the Active directories by default. If the Active directories are not available, Presort will attemptto use the directories from the previous month (Outgoing) if they are valid for your mailing. Forexample, if the estimated drop dates are in September and no September directories are available,but August directories are, Presort will use the August directories automatically. (If neither directoryset is available, Presort will return an error.) In the cases of multiple estimated drop dates, or estim-ated drop dates falling near the beginning of the month, the Active directories may not necessarilybe the preferred directories to use.

Here are some guidelines for determining which directories should be used:

l In each calendar month, there are two sets of files that can be used for mailings with estim-ated drop dates that fall within that month: Active directories from the current month'srelease and Outgoing directories from the previous month's release.

l If there are two directories that are valid for your estimated drop date, we recommend usingthe newer valid (Active) directories, but you can also use the previous month's directories (inOutgoing status).

If Presort is selecting the directories automatically, the newer valid (Active) directories will beused. If those directories are not available, Presort will use the previous month's (Outgoing)directories.

l If your job contains multiple estimated drop dates that span over two consecutive months,the directories for the earlier month (in Outgoing status) are the only directories that are validfor your mailing.

l If you are preparing a mailing with an estimated drop date that falls in the upcoming month(in the Notification phase), both the upcoming month's directories (in Notification status) orthe current month's directories (in Active status) are valid.

If Presort is selecting the directories automatically, the upcoming month's directories (in Noti-fication status) will be used. If those directories are not available, Presort will use the currentmonth's directories (In Active status).

l If at least one estimated drop date is near the beginning of the month, using the previousmonth's (Outgoing) directories provides flexibility in the actual date that you submit your mail-ing. You may submit your mailing either in the month prior to or in the month of your

User Guide | 31

estimated drop date, because the previous month's (Outgoing) directories are valid for boththe previous month and the current month.

If Presort is selecting the directories automatically, the previous month’s (Outgoing) dir-ectories will be used by default. If those directories are not available, Presort will use the cur-rent (Active) month's directories, but you will not be able to submit your mailing before thefirst of the month. If you prefer, you can use the current (Active) directories by specifyingthem yourself.

NOTE If Presort is selecting directories automatically and cannot find any that are valid foryour mailing, or if you specify directories yourself and those directories cannot be found, youwill receive an error.

The following example shows that for mailing dates in October, either Release 5 ("September dir-ectories") in Outgoing status or Release 6 ("October directories") in Active status can be used. Formailing dates in November, either Release 6 ("October directories") in Outgoing status or Release 7("November directories") in Active status can be used.

A message with the range of dates during which you can submit your mailing (based on the dir-ectories used) will be printed on the job summary report under the Auxiliary Files section.

See Also

Presort can select the directories automatically

You can select the directories yourself

User Guide | 32

About estimated drop dates

In Presort, the mail induction date is referred to as the estimated drop date, which determines the dir-ectories that should be used.

l For mailers who drop ship, the estimated drop date is the day the mailing is unloaded fromthe truck at the USPS entry facility. The mail verification date is the date that the USPS veri-fies and accepts the mailing.

l For mailers who do not drop ship, the mail verification date and estimated drop date are thesame.

Every entry point must have an estimated drop date. The Estimated Drop Date parameter is locatedin the Entry Point Default and Entry Point Description blocks.

When Presort selects the directories automatically, generally the newest valid directories will beselected. In the cases of multiple estimated drop dates or estimated drop dates that fall at the begin-ning of the month, Presort may not use the newest directories by default. However, you can specifywhichever directories you would like to use. See Which directories are valid for my mailing? forinformation on how the correct directories to use are determined.

If at any time Presort cannot find the directories it's looking for, Presort will error.

For every job, a message will be generated on the job summary report that indicates the valid datesfor entering the mail, based on the directories used.

Multiple estimated drop dates

If all estimated drop dates are in one month (and at least one of the dates occurs after the seventhday of the month), Presort will use that month’s (Active) directories. If that month's directories arenot available, Presort will use the previous month’s (Outgoing) directories.

For example, if the estimated drop dates range from October 9 to October 15, Presort will use theOctober directories. If the October directories cannot be found, Presort will use the September dir-ectories. If Presort cannot find either set of directories, Presort will error.

If the estimated drop dates are in two consecutive months, the only directories that are valid for allestimated drop dates are for the earlier month (the Outgoing directories).

For example, if the estimated drop dates range from October 3 to November 13, the October dir-ectories are the only ones valid. If the October directories cannot be found, Presort will error. Youcan either change the estimated drop dates or verify that the valid directories are located in thefolder entered in the USPS Presort Data Folder parameter.

User Guide | 33

If the range of estimated drop dates spans more than two consecutive months, Presort will error.There is no single set of directories that is valid because directories are valid for only two months.Either reduce the range of dates to two consecutive months at most, or divide the job into smallerjobs with ranges of entry dates that span two consecutive months at most.

Estimated drop dates at the beginning of themonth

If there are any estimated drop dates that fall within the first seven days of the month, Presort willuse the directories for the previous (Outgoing) month. This is done in case you may want to submityour mailing before the first of the month. The directories are valid for both the previous month (Out-going) and the month that the estimated drop dates fall in (Active). You will still have the remainderof the month to submit your mailing before the directories used expire.

For example, if all of the estimated drop dates fall between October 1 and October 7, Presort will usethe September (Outgoing) directories automatically, even if the October (Active) directories are avail-able. If the directories from September (Outgoing) cannot be found, then Presort will use the Octo-ber (Active) directories, and a warning will be generated during verification about not entering themail too early. If no valid directories can be found, Presort will error. You may specify the directoriesfor that month (the Active directories) yourself if you would like. See You can select the directoriesyourself for more information. Presort will allow the Active directories to be used. However, a warn-ing will be generated during verification about not entering the mail too early, because the dir-ectories used will not be valid until the first day of that month.

If the estimated drop dates are all within the same month and they fall both before and after the sev-enth day of the month, Presort will use that month’s (Active) directories and a warning will be gen-erated during verification about not entering the mail too early. If that month's (Active) directoriesare not available, Presort will use the previous month’s (Outgoing) directories. A message will beprinted on the job summary indicating the valid dates for entering the mail based on the directoriesused; if the entry dates are late in the month, Presort may generate a warning during verificationabout making sure the mail gets entered before those earlier directories used expire. If no valid dir-ectories can be found, Presort will error.

For example, if the estimated drop dates range from August 3 to August 13, Presort will use theAugust (Active) directories. A warning will be generated during verification about not entering themail too early (before August 1). If the August (Active) directories cannot be found, Presort will usethe July (Outgoing) directories. If neither the current or previous months' directories can be found,Presort will error. If you would prefer that Presort use the previous (Outgoing) month's directories incase there is a chance you may want to enter your mail before August 1, you can specify these dir-ectories yourself. See You can select the directories yourself for more information.

User Guide | 34

Estimated drop dates that fall near the end of the directories' effective period

If there are estimated drop dates that fall within the last 14 days of a given month and the directoriesused will expire at the end of that month, a warning will be generated during verification remindingyou to enter your mail before the directories used expire.

For example, if the estimated drop dates range from August 10 to Sept 30, Presort will use theAugust (Active) directories, a warning will be generated during verification reminding you to enteryour mail before October 1. If the August (Active) directories cannot be found, Presort will error.

See Also

Setting up multiple entry points in Views

Removing expired directories

As you install monthly directories, the folder you are storing them in may get cluttered after severalmonths. There can be up to six files per monthly directory release for Presort. Directory files areuniquely named for each month, so they are not overwritten when you store new directories.

Presort will not delete any expired directories, but you can manually delete them if you would like.We suggest deleting expired directories on a regular basis, such as when you install a new servicepack or at the beginning of the year. As long as you always have at least the three most recent setsof directories (Notification, Active, and Outgoing), you should not have any issues. There is no harmin keeping previous directories on your system. They are not very large and do not take up muchroom.

See Also

Storing directories

Directory lifecycle

Which directories are valid for my mailing?

How to verify that your job is ready

Before you can run your job, you must verify that it is ready. To do this, select File > Verify Job.

The job verifier has several purposes:

User Guide | 35

l It verifies that your job meets the software's own rules. An example of an error in this cat-egory is shown on the next page.

l It verifies that your job is consistent within itself. An example of an error in this categorywould be a First-Class job that included a Standard Mail report.

l It verifies that your job meets USPS regulations.

Successful verification does not mean that your job is guaranteed to run, nor that your mailing isguaranteed to be accepted. There are two reasons for this disclaimer:

l If we were to make the verifier too cautious and overprotective, it would prevent peoplefrom preparing legitimate, if unusual, mailings. Obviously, we cannot foresee every pos-sibility. So the verifier is designed to do what is reasonable.

l For sophisticated mailers, who often negotiate special terms and procedures with the USPS,the software offers some latitude to customize mailings. The verifier is designed to allow forsuch exceptional mailings.

Verification messages

The verifier gives these types of messages:

Message Why it happens

Fatal Error The software finds a problem that is certain to cause a rejected mailing, or certainto prevent the job from running at all, it gives you a Fatal Error message.

Error The software finds a serious problem—for example, one that is certain to cause arejected mailing, or certain to prevent the job from running at all.

Warning The software finds a less serious problem. This means that there is a possibility thatthe job will produce unexpected results, or that the mailing will cause an accept-ance dispute.

Views offers a handy way to verify jobs. Views can find and present more than one error at a time.And you can use the convenient Go To button to jump directly to the trouble spot.

User Guide | 36

Batch verifier

Some customers cannot use Views, especially those who run on a nongraphical system such asUnix. These customers use the nongraphical version of the software, called Job.

When you start Presort Job, you do so by typing a command line at your operating system's prompt.Below is an example; you'll find complete details in the Presort Job-File Reference.

$ presort /user/pwjobs/my_job.pst > my_job.log &

The software automatically starts verifying that the job is ready for processing. It will stop on the firstserious error. When you've corrected the error, you start the verification process all over again.

Tips for running your job

While you're getting to know the software, we urge you to run your jobs in stages. This will give youa chance to learn faster. It will also help you to find and correct any errors faster.

Every job includes an Execution Options block. By carefully selecting each of the options in thisblock, you can run one step at a time. We recommend a three-step approach.

To run your job in three stages

1. Presort. On the first pass, in the Execution Options block set the job to run the presort pro-cess itself, and create reports. See the Job-File Reference Guide or online help for para-meter descriptions.

NOTE Make sure to select the Save Work Files option. During the presort process, thesoftware stores its results in work files. These files are unreadable and of no direct use toyou, but the software needs them when it creates reports and output files.

2. Generate output files. Set up the software so that it generates a Job Summary report. Thisreport provides a concise, overall statement of job results. If this report looks good, review allof your other reports to make sure that your presort results are acceptable. If not, return tothe job and consider how your job setup affected results.

If report results look good, then on the second pass, go into the Execution Option block andset the options needed to generate your output files.

3. Clean up. When you are certain that you have finished this job, you may delete the workfiles. This keeps your computer from becoming cluttered. Work files can be large, and keep-ing them when you don't need them can waste a lot of disk space.

User Guide | 37

To delete work files, deselect all of the options in the Execution Option block and then pro-cess your job one last time.

From the USPS®: Ten common mistakes and how to avoid them

According to the USPS, there are the ten mistakes mailers make most often:

1. Unpaid fees. Be careful to pay the annual presort or mailing fee. (A postage permit is a one-time fee.)

2. Low account balance. If there isn't enough money in your deposit account to cover a mailing,that entire mailing will be held until more money is deposited. Call ahead to verify youraccount balance, especially if other groups or departments use the same account.

3. Inaccurate mailing statement. Mailings may be delayed or rejected for inaccurate piececounts or postage calculation on the Postage Statement.

4. Incorrect container labels. Mailers who make sack labels by hand sometimes use the wrongdestination table or format.

5. Incorrect presort. A mailing is rejected when there is an error rate of 5 percent or more in themake-up or labeling of packages or containers.

6. Incorrect imprint. Mailings by permit imprint may be rejected if the imprint's format or con-tent is inadequate.

7. No signature. Especially when you're paying postage by deposit account, make sure yourPostage Statement bears an authorized signature.

8. Inadequate documentation. Carrier-route and automation-rate mailings must include reportsshowing that rate requirements are met. Presort and PrintForm produce these reports.

9. Stale meter date. Be careful to set your postage meter to the date you will actually enteryour mailing. If the meter date is "stale," you may have to re-meter every piece (at 0¢, just toget the correct date). When you know you're going to be too late to make the last box col-lection, use the next day's date.

10. Late arrival. Each office sets its own hours for acceptance of mail. These are often shorterthan lobby hours because of the time it takes to verify a presort and mailing statement.

User Guide | 38

Presort and PrintForm prevent many of these hassles by helping you to comply with USPS rules auto-matically. Users say that the software can streamline mail acceptance because it produces PAVE-cer-tified reports.

User Guide | 39

Schemes and sort levelsA presort scheme is a set of USPS rules for sorting mail. A scheme involves a particular way of sort-ing and assembling mail and assigning postage rates.

Introduction to schemes

Within each scheme, you can set options, which fall into a few basic groups:

Option group Description

Optional sort levels In many schemes, there are optional sortation levels that you canturn on or off.

Package, container, andpallet size

For schemes involving packages, you can set a minimum packagesize. Likewise, you can set minimum and maximum sizes for formingtrays, sacks, and pallets.

Unqualified action Tells the software what to do if there isn't enough mail to meet theUSPS minimum for the scheme. For example, you can tell it to skipthe scheme or stop processing the job.

The software offers a variety of schemes for each class and type of piece. Each scheme involves aparticular way of sorting and assembling the mail, and a plan for assigning postage rates.

User Guide | 40

Class Scheme

First-Class™ Automation Letters

Regular letters

Flats

Single Piece

Package Service Parcel

Package Service Parcel Single Piece

Letter Trays on Pallets

Flat Trays on Pallets

Periodicals Automation Letters

Carrier Route Letters

Nonautomation Letters

Packages on Pallets

Sacks on Pallets

Letter Trays on Pallets

Flats

Flats in Trays

Flats in Trays on Pallets

DDU 5-Digit Carrier Route Loose Bundles

User Guide | 41

Class Scheme

Standard Mail Automation Letters

Regular Letters

Flats

Irregular and Marketing Parcels

Irregular and Marketing Parcels Pallets

Irregular and Marketing Parcels Sacks on Pallets

Machinable and Marketing Parcels

Machinable and Marketing Parcels Pallets

Enhanced Carrier Route Letters

Letter Trays on Pallets

Flats Letter Trays on Pallets

Packages on Pallets

Sacks on Pallets

Single Piece First Class

Customized Market Mail (CMM)

User Guide | 42

Class Scheme

Package Services BPM Carrier Route Irregular Parcels

BPM Flats

BPM Irregular Parcels

BPM/Media and Library, Machinable Parcels

BPM Packages on Pallets

BPM/Media and Library, Machinable Parcels Pallet

Media and Library

Single Piece

Media and Library, Packages on Pallets

Parcel Select

Parcel Select Pallet

PSVC, PSLW Irregular Parcels Pallets

PSVC, PSLW Irregular Parcels

PSVC, PSLW Irregular Parcels Sacks on Pallets

PSVC, PSLW Machinable Parcels Pallets

PSVC, PSLW Machinable Parcels

Mixed-Class Co-Mail COMAIL PER/STD/BPM, Packages on Pallets

How presort schemes work

Before you read the specifics regarding working with schemes, it might be helpful for you to get anoverall picture of how a scheme works.

As you go through the presort process, you see a pattern. At the higher sort levels, you are dealingwith more destinations, each serving a relatively small area. Later in the presort process, at the lower

User Guide | 43

sort levels, you are dealing with a smaller number of central USPS facilities, each of which serves alarge area.

Example

Let's assume you are using a Standard Mail scheme for automated letters. To keep this exampleshort and simple, we'll overlook the exceptions and fine points for now.

The software does the following:

1. Sort by ZIP. First, the software sorts all pieces by ZIP Code. Technically, of course, the soft-ware does not sort physical mail pieces, but it does sort postal codes that it reads from yourinput file. When you print address labels, each database record results in a mail piece.

2. Form 5-digit trays. When there are at least 150 pieces destined for the same 5-digit ZIPCode, the USPS gives mailers the option to place these pieces in a "5-digit tray," which is atray is destined and labeled for a local post office. At the 5-digit level, the USPS also givesmailers the option to form "scheme" trays. A scheme tray combines mail for two or more ZIPs.See 5-digit scheme containers for more details.

In this presort scheme, postage on each piece is based on the sort level of the tray. Pieces in5-digit scheme trays are mailed at the 5-digit rate, which is the least expensive rate in thisscheme.

3. Form 3-digit trays. The software takes the mail pieces that don't "fit" into the first sort leveland drops them to the next level.

When there are at least 150 pieces destined for the same 3-digit ZIP Code, that is, pieceswhose ZIP Codes begin with the same three digits, the software places these pieces in a "3-digit tray." This tray is labeled for a Sectional Center Facility (SCF), which usually means a lar-ger city post office that serves surrounding towns.

In larger cities, the main post office often serves two or more 3-digit ZIPs. the software com-bines mail for those 3-digit ZIPs to form a "3-digit scheme" tray.

Pieces in 3-digit trays or 3-digit scheme trays are mailed at the 3-digit rate; a little moreexpensive than the 5-digit rate, but better than the automated ADC (AADC) or mixed auto-mated ADC (MAADC) rate.

4. Form AADC trays. If there are at least 150 leftover pieces that are eligible for the sameAADC (Automated Area Distribution Center), the software prepares an AADC tray. AADCtrays may contain mail for more than one 3-digit ZIP Code. The USPS publishes a table thatlists sets of 3-digit ZIP Codes and their corresponding AADCs (L801).

User Guide | 44

NOTE While it seems that an AADC tray and a 3-digit scheme tray are alike, it is thetray makeup that makes them different. The 3-digit scheme trays contain pieces mailedto multiple 3-digit ZIP Codes that the USPS processes on the same sorting machines.AADC trays also contain mail for more than one ZIP Code, however, these pieces are notprocessed on the same sorting machine. Pieces in AADC trays are mailed at the AADCrate.

5. Form Mixed-AADC trays. All remaining pieces are grouped by AADC area and placed intomixed-AADC trays. At the office where you enter your mail, USPS staff remove pieces fromthese trays and combine them with pieces from other mailings destined for the sameAADCs.

Pieces in Mixed AADC trays are mailed at the MAADC rate.

See Also

Assembling pieces, packages, containers, pallets, and air freight boxes

The software can help you select and arrange schemes

Jobs often involve two or more schemes. After processing one scheme, the software processes anyleftover pieces in the next scheme. In a sense, presorting is a sifting process. For example, youmight follow the Automation Letters scheme with Regular Letters. Often, the Regular Lettersscheme will "catch" two kinds of pieces:

l If there are not enough pieces to meet the minimum piece requirement, the Automation Let-ters scheme will not qualify and all pieces will drop to the Regular Letters scheme.

l If pieces have flawed addresses, that is, they are missing the postal automation codes (ZIP+4and DPBC), they aren't eligible for the Automation Letters scheme and fall to the Regular Let-ters scheme.

The software can help you pick the right schemes and place them in the right order. This is import-ant for your postage and mail-room efficiency.

Set up schemes

If you use Views, use the Wizard! The Wizard asks you a few questions about your job and how youwant to prepare it. Based on your answers, the Wizard sets up your job with the right combination ofschemes and reports. It's very easy!

User Guide | 45

To manually set up a scheme in an existing job

1. Expand the Presort Scheme Setup group. If you are creating a new scheme, expand the NewSchemes group.

2. Double-click the name of the scheme you want to set up.

3. For a new scheme, the software suggests typical settings. You can keep these settings oradjust them for your job.

4. To adjust sortation levels or size limits for packages, containers, or pallets, click the appro-priate button and make your settings.

We also offer template jobs. These are half-completed job files, preset with schemes and reports.They're located in your Template directory. The templates are not quite as helpful as the Wizard, butthey are useful if you don't use Views.

Scheme priorities

When you use our Wizard or template jobs, you get reasonable starting values for those options. Weassume these priorities:

l Minimize postage by sorting all mail at the highest (or finest) possible sort level.

l Minimize the number of packages and containers to handle, minimizing the labor cost.

l Minimize delivery time by sorting all mail at the highest (or finest) possible sort level.

We put delivery last because investing more postage or labor doesn't guarantee faster delivery. Youcertainly are free to adjust the initial settings to suit your own priorities.

User Guide | 46

Scheme options and settings

In almost every scheme, you'll have optional as well as required settings. Most of the options in ourpresort schemes fit into the following basic groups:

Group Description

Unqualifiedaction

What do you want the software to do if there isn't enough mail to meet theminimum set by the USPS? You can:

l Skip to the next scheme (the most common choice).

l Cancel the whole job.

l Cancel the presort process itself, but produce reports and output files.

Optionalsortationlevels

Every scheme requires sorting pieces to at least one level; usually three ormore. In the required levels, you must make a package or container wheneveryou have enough mail to do so.

For the optional sort levels, you can choose to turn the level on or off. If youturn it on, you can set a minimum amount of mail needed to form a container.You might set this a little higher than the USPS minimum. That way, you'll formoptional packages or containers only when you're sure that there's enoughmail to make it worthwhile.

TIP Any parameter that starts with the word Create or Prepare controlsan optional sort level.

Package andcontainer limits

In schemes that involve making packages, you can set a maximum packagesize. You can also set minimum and maximum amounts of mail for formingtrays, sacks, and pallets. In other pallet schemes, you can set a maximum tray,sack, and pallet mail weight.

See Also

Optional sort levels

Leveling

User Guide | 47

Optional sort levels

For all sort levels that the USPS considers optional, the software lets you control whether to turn thatlevel on or off, gives you an option to set a minimum amount of mail, or both.

In some cases, turning on an optional sort level might reduce your postage. It may also reduce deliv-ery time by sorting more mail more directly to its destination. However, optional sort levels can res-ult in more packages and containers to strap, label, and handle, so they may increase your costs formaterial, labor, and transportation.

Carrier-route trays and sacks

Let's look at some optional sort levels. A carrier-route package contains mail for one route. Carrierpackages may be placed in trays or sacks or on pallets at two or three levels.

Container level Description

Direct CART An entire container, all packages for the same route. Forming direct CART con-tainers is required for most mail classes (except CMM). If you have enough mailto fill a direct-CART container, you must form it. For some mail classes, you canset the minimum number of pieces required to form a direct CART container.

5-digit CART Packages for one or more routes, delivered from the same post office. If youhave enough mail, you must form the 5-digit CART container for most mailclasses (except CMM), so the software does not offer an on/off control.However, you do have the option to set a minimum amount of mail.

You can set the minimum at a fixed number of pieces. Or you can set the min-imum at a "full" tray, and leave it to the software to determine how many piecesare the minimum for a full tray.

5-digit-schemeCART

Packages for two or more 5-digit ZIP Codes served by the same facility. Formingscheme sacks is required. You can set a minimum amount of mail per container.

3-digit CART Packages for two or more routes, delivered from two or more post offices in thesame 3-digit ZIP Codes. In the tray letter schemes, 3-digit CART trays areoptional. You can turn them on or off, but you cannot set a minimum amount ofmail.

The 3-digit CART level does not apply to sacks.

User Guide | 48

5-digit scheme containers

Preparing 5-digit-scheme containers is another optional sort level. Some post offices serve as deliv-ery offices for two or more ZIP Codes. This is becoming more common as the USPS increases auto-mation and consolidates delivery offices.

With such offices in mind, the USPS has created an incentive for automated mailers. The USPS per-mits you to form some 5-digit trays, sacks, and pallets that actually contain mail for more than oneZIP Code. These are called 5-digit scheme containers, because the USPS publishes a scheme, or list,of offices where combined containers are permitted. In the software, we incorporate this informationinto the Mail Processing Center (MPC) directory.

The USPS has strict rules about using current scheme information when preparing scheme trays.That's why you receive an updated MPC directory every month. It's important that you install theseupdates promptly.

Scheme containers should help you save postage and reduce the number of containers you handle.That's because pieces from more than one ZIP Code can be used to meet the minimum containervolume.

Automation-compatible letters without barcodes

Another optional sort level is machinable preparation. This option may apply to you if you're mailinga First-Class or Standard letter that does not bear a barcode, but is in all other respects automation-compatible. If your letters fit these criteria, the USPS calls your letters "machinable." The lettersmust:

l Have a machine-printed address (non-script font)

l Have an address in the MLOCR read zone

l Have a barcode clear zone

This means that the USPS has a reasonably good chance of barcoding your letters by running themthrough an MLOCR machine (multiline optical character-recognition).

Schemes sift out some records

Sometimes, users are surprised to discover that not all of their input records "make it" into the mail-ing.

The normal output mail stream consists of three portions. The software produces presorted pieces,then qualified nonpresort pieces, and finally unqualified pieces.

User Guide | 49

Is the record eligible?

The first step in sifting out records depends on choices you make when you set up your job; it hasnothing to do with USPS rules. As the software reads a record from your input file, it evaluateswhether the record is eligible for processing. A record is ineligible in the following situations:

l The record is marked as deleted, either by database marking or the field PW.Delete. See theDatabase Prep manual for details about how the software handles deleted records.

l The record is sifted out by the Input Filter feature. See the Database Prep manual for detailsabout filtering.

l A record may be sifted out if the job involves multiple versions, and the record's PW.Ver-sion_ID value cannot be matched to any of your Version Descriptions, and your choice forundetermined records is to ignore them.

l A record may be sifted out if the job involves multiple segments and the software cannotmatch the record's PW.Segment_ID field with any of your Segment Descriptions.

l A record can be sifted out if the job involves multiple entry points and the software cannotmatch the record's PW.Entry_ID field or its ZIP Code with the ZIP Code range for any entrypoint.

If the record is eligible, it goes on to the next step. If not, it is excluded from the job entirely. Youcan choose to include or exclude ineligible records from output files.

Does the record qualify under USPS rules?

The USPS says that every piece in a presorted mailing must bear a valid ZIP Code. So the softwarechecks the ZIP Code of every input record against the USPS ZIP Code directory. If the record con-tains an acceptable ZIP, it goes into the presort. If the software finds no ZIP Code, or the ZIP is bad,the record is tagged as unqualified, and falls to the end of the mail stream. However, an unqualifiedrecord still is included in the job, and would normally appear in output files.

Likewise, the software can detect foreign addresses. Foreign records are automatically shifted intothe unqualified portion of the mail stream.

Unqualified pieces for the U.S. may be mailed at the single-piece rate when its available. The num-ber of unqualified pieces is mentioned on the Job Summary report. Other than that, unqualifiedpieces do not show up on reports, and they are not included in postage calculations or USPS forms.You can control whether or not they will be included in your output files or labels by using the Out-put Selection feature.

User Guide | 50

Two more points to note about unqualified pieces:

l If your job involves segmenting, note that your unqualified pieces will have an undeterminedsegment.

l If your job involves multiple entry points, the unqualified pieces will have an undeterminedentry point. Usually, this means that they will be entered at the default entry point (whichusually means the local post office).

Does the piece fit into a package and container?

A piece may be excluded from a presort scheme for either of two reasons:

l Each presort scheme requires certain postal codes. If a piece is missing any of these codes, itwill be excluded from the scheme. For example, any automated-letter scheme will reject apiece that is missing ZIP+4 or DPBC. (Automated flats require only ZIP+4.) Carrier-routeschemes will exclude any piece with an empty or undefined CART field. Carrier-sequencepresorts may reject any piece that is lacking line-of-travel or walk-sequence fields.

l Presorting is a sifting process. Because of the way packages and containers are formed,some pieces may not be included in any package or container. Usually, these pieces aregathered in a final container at the end of the mail stream. This "catch-all" container (or con-tainers) is entered at the local post office at the single-piece rate.

If any pieces should happen to be left over after the last scheme in the job, they are tagged as qual-ified, nonpresort (or NPS) pieces.

Qualified, nonpresort pieces may be mailed at the single-piece rate. The number of NPS pieces ismentioned on the Job Summary report and ZIP Code Listing. Other than that, NPS pieces are notincluded in postage calculations or USPS forms. You can control whether or not they will beincluded in your output files or labels by using the Output Selection feature.

l If your job involves Segmenting, your NPS pieces will be assigned to a segment the sameway as presorted pieces.

l If your job involves multiple entry points, note that NPS pieces will have an undeterminedentry point. Usually, this means that they will be entered at the default entry point (whichusually means the local post office).

See Also

User Guide | 51

Link each description to a field value

Mailing leftover pieces at single-piece rate (or preventing it)

Segmenting

Mailing leftover pieces at single-piece rate (or preventing it)

A single-piece presort scheme might sound like a contradiction, but it is useful in Package Services,and First-Class jobs of postcards, letters, or flats.

Add the PSVC, Single Piece scheme block to your job in order to mail nonmachinable parcels at theParcel Select rate. This scheme sorts first by zone and then by 5-digit within each zone.

A single-piece scheme could serve two purposes:

l You might prevent any pieces from mailing at the single-piece rate.

l If pieces do fall to the single-piece rate, you can include them in your mailing documentationand prepare them in containers.

Prevent single-piece-rate pieces

As you may recall, any pieces left over after the last presort scheme become the qualified non-presort (NPS) portion of the mail stream. If you mail these pieces, you must pay postage at thesingle-piece rate. You might be able to prevent pieces from falling to the single-piece rate. Let's gothrough an example where the scheme sequence is as follows:

1. Automation

2. Regular

3. Single piece

Suppose that we are mailing 1,250 1-ounce letters. We have 800 pieces that qualify for the auto-mation mailing at the 3-digit level and 450 pieces left over. We need at least 500 pieces for a First-Class mailing, so our 450 leftover pieces won't qualify for the regular scheme. Therefore, thosepieces become qualified nonpresort, and mail at the single-piece rate.

To prevent this, we would like to force 50 pieces to drop from the automation to the regularscheme. Then the regular scheme would qualify. We'll pay a little more postage on 50 pieces, and a

User Guide | 52

lot less postage on 450 pieces. To control how much mail is dropped from the automation scheme,use the Max to Drop, ATM to REG parameter in the Single Piece scheme.

Here are the options for the Max to Drop, ATM to REG parameter:

Option Description

Off Turns off the dropping feature by setting the maximum number of pieces to zero.Use this option if you never want to drop any pieces, even if it would save postage.You will probably have some single-piece-rate mail.

Max Sets the limit at its maximum. Use this option if you want to minimize the chancesof any pieces mailing at the single-piece rate.

Postage To minimize postage, you need to set a reasonable limit, somewhere between zeroand the maximum. The right figure depends on your mailing list and piece design.

Prepare single-piece-rate pieces

You might choose not to use the Max to Drop parameter. Or even if you do use it, it is still possiblethat some mail will fall to qualified nonpresort. That's when the second purpose of the 1C, SinglePiece scheme comes into effect.

Should any pieces fall into the qualified nonpresort category, the Single Piece scheme enables youto prepare them along with the presorted mail.

l The software forms trays with periodic break marks.

l The software prepares documentation (including a Postage Statement) for the Single Piecemailing, just as it does for presorted mail.

l Pieces are produced in ZIP Code sequence (00000 to 99999).

Standard Mail regular-rate pieces

The USPS does not provide for a Single Piece scheme in Standard Mail, but instead, allows you tofold up to 199 regular-rate pieces into the final qualifying scheme in your Standard Mail job. The reg-ular-rate mail will appear in the documentation for your carrier-route or automation mailing.

User Guide | 53

Single-piece price for Standard Mail and First-Class

This feature is only for First-Class Mail and Standard Mail letters and flats. Be aware that the USPSdoes not offer a Standard Mail single-piece rate.

Standard Mail unqualified pieces

Presort automatically prepares unqualified mail at the single-piece price for both Standard Mail andFirst Class when you use the Include Unqualified Pieces parameter in the 1C, Single Piece schemeblock and the new STD, Single Piece First Class scheme block.

NOTE Unqualified (UNQ) ZIP Codes can also be failed numeric ZIP Codes. The software doesnot support any alpha-numeric ZIP Codes, foreign ZIP Codes, blanks, or ZIP Codes that haveless than 5 digits.

Standard Mail and First Class letters and flats

There are times when you might want to force Standard Mail and First Class records into thesingle-piece price. Usually this is done because you want to use the original address on the pieceand not the corrected address from NCOALink/CASS/LACS.

Use the PW.FORCE_SP input field to mark records that you want to force to the single-pieceprice. The PW.FORCE_SP field would override the job-file parameter setting. For example, if youhave the PW.FORCE_SP field set to Yes, the software will force qualified record to the single-piece rate even if the Include Unqualified Pieces parameter is set to No.

The software marks pieces as UNQ in the Address Output File when they are truly unqualified (forexample, ZIP Codes that are blank, alpha-numeric, foreign, or less than 5-digits). Unqualifiedpieces that merely fall within the single-piece STD, Single Piece First Class scheme are marked asREG.

NOTE The software creates single-piece trays with records containing invalid ZIP Codes ifyou are using Optional Procedure and have the ZIP Verify parameter set to Valid 5, or yourjob contains the 1C, Single Piece or the STD, Single Piece First Class scheme block.

Protecting pallets

In some Packages on Pallets schemes, you also can shift pieces from one pallet to another for yourbenefit. This method is called protecting pallets. You can shift packages onto these pallet levels:

Mail class Pallet level

Periodicals SCF

User Guide | 54

Mail class Pallet level

Standard Mail SCF and NDC

Protecting pallets means the software tries to keep mail at that pallet level, even if it means takingpieces from other pallets or sacks.

The motivation behind protecting pallets is different for SCF pallets than for NDC pallets.

l For SCF pallets, the goal is to keep mail from falling to the NDC or ADC level so that moremail is entered closer to its destination.

l For NDC pallets, the goal is to keep mail from falling to the mixed-NDC level, so the softwarepalletizes more mail and forms fewer sacks, which means less labor for you and the USPS.

Pallet protection is just one way that the USPS encourages mailers to prepare fewer containers.There are other ways that you can (or must) prepare your mailing so that more containers are full,and fewer total containers result overall.

Having fewer containers that each contain more mail requires less labor for USPS staff, and moreroom in USPS facilities and trucks. It also can translate into less labor for you and, in some cases, bet-ter postage and delivery.

SCF protection

The software begins forming an SCF pallet by taking mail from NDC or ADC pallets or sacks. Thesoftware takes the mail that would have been on an SCF pallet originally if only there had beenenough pieces to form one.

The software then shifts mail from finer sort levels (3-digit or, in some cases, 5-digit pallets) until theminimum SCF pallet weight is met. Because of the weights of moved pieces, the final SCF palletweight may be larger than the minimum you specified.

NOTE Shifting pieces from the NDC or ADC pallet level may cause those pallets to fall belowthe minimum pallet weight, resulting in more sacked mail (results could vary, depending on yourinput data).

For example, if you set your minimum NDC pallet weight to 500 pounds, and you turn on SCFpallet protection, the software might shift so much mail from the NDC pallet that its weight fallsbelow 500 pounds. The mail destined to the NDC would then be prepared in sacks.

So, if your priority is to keep as much mail on pallets as possible, then you may not want to activ-ate SCF Pallet Protection.

User Guide | 55

Because postage is based on the package level (not the pallet), postage is not affected by shiftingpieces among pallet levels.

Two methods

There are two methods of protecting SCF pallets. Although both methods strive to keep mail at theSCF pallet level, they each allocate packages differently and they each follow different USPSguidelines.

Method When applied Results and guidelines

Presort (orPRSRT)

After the software forms 3-digit pack-ages, but before it forms 3-digit pal-lets, it reserves enough 3-digitpackages to later form an SCF pallet.The software pulls the packages inthis order:

l 3DG pkgs from a single 3-digitarea.

l 3DG pkgs from multiple 3-digitareas.

More SCF pallets and possibly more sackedmail at NDC and ADC levels. The softwarecan borrow pieces from several 3-digit pal-lets as long as the 3-digit pallets do not dipbelow the minimum pallet weight.

USPS After the software forms 3- and 5-digit packages and pallets, it formsSCF pallets, borrowing pieces asneeded. The software pulls the pack-ages in this order:

l 3- or 5-digit pkgs from a single3DG pallet.

l An entire 3DG pallet.

l 5-digit pkgs from a 5-digit pal-let.

More SCF pallets, possibly fewer 3-digit pal-lets, and more sacked mail at NDC andADC levels. The software begins by tryingto borrow pieces from a single 3-digit pal-let. If no 3-digit pallet has enough excesspieces to save the SCF pallet, the softwarecan eliminate an entire 3-digit pallet infavor of the SCF pallet. The software real-locates the minimum number of packagesnecessary to save the SCF pallet, but can-not eliminate a 5-digit pallet to preserve anSCF pallet.

User Guide | 56

NDC protection

In NDC pallet protection, the software begins forming a NDC pallet by taking mail from sacks. Thesoftware takes the mail that would have been on a NDC pallet originally if only there had beenenough pieces to form one. The software then shifts mail from a single ASF pallet until the minimumNDC pallet weight is met.

CAUTION The software borrows pieces only from an ASF pallet that is bound for an ASF facil-ity whose ZIP range is defined in the same entry point description as the NDC. That is, you canapply NDC pallet protection only for those entry points in which a NDC is associated with anASF. In addition, pieces that the software shifts to the NDC pallet are not eligible for the DNDCdiscount. You benefit from the labor savings of preparing a mailing with more pallets and fewersacks, but there is no postage incentive.

To activate this feature, enable the NDC Pallet Protection parameter in the Optional SortationLevels window of the software.

How schemes affect reports and output files

Each presort scheme in your job results in a separate legal mailing, with separate reports. Forexample, if you have two schemes, the software automatically creates one set of reports for eachscheme, even though you set up each type of report only once.

Options for output files

Normally when you create output files, the software outputs all schemes in the order in which theyappeared in the job setup.

To control output file behavior

l If you would like to output only a selected scheme (or schemes), use the Output Selectionfeature. The particular option to look for is Select Presort Schemes To Output.

l To output each scheme to a separate output file, use the Split Output feature. The particularoption to look for is Create Files per Presort Scheme.

l If you output all schemes together, in one file, you might want to control their sequence.You could use the Mailflow feature. In the Mailflow window, the particular option to look foris Alternate Presort Scheme Sequence.

l If you want to change the mail-stream hierarchy from the normal order of entry point, seg-ment, and scheme, to make scheme more dominant, use Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy.

User Guide | 57

Output field

You can include AP.Scheme_No in your output file to identify the scheme. Mailing crews andacceptance clerks might appreciate this.

This field can contain a value from 1 to 99, which indicates the Scheme Number, according to thesequence of schemes in the job file. The sequence of numbering is not affected by any use of theMailflow feature.

The Foreign designation is supported only in Periodicals jobs.

See Also

Output selection

Split output

Using Mailflow to change the sequence of mailings

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Schemes sift out some records

User Guide | 58

Assembling pieces, packages, containers, pallets, and airfreight boxesThe USPS sets many rules about the minimum and maximum amounts of mail that you may place inpackages, containers, pallets, and AFBs. The software gives you the flexibility to adjust within andoutside these limits.

In the template jobs, options are set in ways that make sense for most mailers. It's up to you todecide whether any adjustments will make your mail-room or bindery operations more efficient.

Packages

In most types of mailings, you will have to band or strap your pieces into packages. Schemes thatdon't require packaging include:

l Machinable parcels

l Automated or machinable letters

l Irregular parcels (greater than 1/2 inch)

Package size limits

The following table shows USPS limits on package size (see the DMM for the most up-to-date inform-ation).

Within these limits, the software offers you as much flexibility as USPS rules permit. The larger yourmaximum package size, the fewer packages you will have to make. However, larger packages maybe more difficult to handle and, therefore, more time-consuming.

Mailers who band packages manually often find that a maximum thickness of four inches makes aworkable handful. If you use automatic binding or strapping machines, consider their limitations.

User Guide | 59

Size limits Packages in trays or sacks Packages on pallets

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

Periodicals 6 pieces Letters: 6 in. 6 pieces 24 in. thick or20 lbs.(whichevercomes first)

Standard Mail(excludes 5-digitand 5-digitscheme pkgs)

10 pieces Letters: 6 in. 10 pieces 24 in. thick or20 lbs.(whichevercomes first)

Package ServicesBound Printedmatter

10 pieces or 10pounds(whichevercomes first)

20 pounds

Carrier-route:40 pounds

10 pieces or 10pounds(whichevercomes first)

20 pounds

NOTE The USPS requires that irregular parcel packages directly placed onto pallets must be ofuniform thickness and more than 15 inches long or more than 12 inches high (see DMM705.8.10.2).

The software will verify your job to make sure the dimension of mail pieces complies with thisrequirement. However, the software is not be able to verify the uniform thickness.

Periodicals and Standard Mail flats package size

The following table lists the package thickness requirements for Standard and Periodicals in sacks.The requirements are based on the type of paper coating and type of binding, and are designed toreduce package breakage.

If you strap your packages, the USPS requires one strap around packages that are up to 1-inch thick(residual packages only) and two straps around packages greater than 1-inch thick.

User Guide | 60

Type of bindingand/or wrapping

Maximum package thickness(Standard and Periodicals)

Coated paper Uncoated paper

Two straps; one along width andone along length

6 in. 8 in. (6 in. recommended)

Shrink-wrapped 3 in. 8 in. (6 in. recommended)

Shrink-wrapped plus one or twostraps

6 in. 8 in. (6 in. recommended)

Options for weekly and daily periodicals

Periodicals packages of at least six pieces are eligible for presort discounts, so we call them"reduced-rate" packages. However, in some sort levels, you have the option to create packages assmall as one or two pieces. Undersize packages are mailed at the basic rate. To create them, look inthe Periodicals flats schemes for options that begin with the words "Min Basic."

NOTE Undersize packages usually increase postage and require more labor, because thereare more packages to band. However, they tend to push more mail up to finer sort levels, sothey may improve delivery time. For this reason, we see the undersize-package options beingused most often by publishers of daily and weekly periodicals.

Packages that exceed the maximum height

The USPS accepts packages that exceed the maximum height, but only if they exceed the height byless than the thickness of a single piece. For example, suppose your mail piece is printed on coatedpaper and is 0.625 (5/8) of an inch thick. If you form a package with five pieces, the total thickness is3.125 inches, which is more than the 3 inch maximum. That's acceptable because the total thicknessis less than the three inch maximum plus the thickness of a single piece (3 + 0.625 = 3.625).

Spanned (split) packages

If you are mailing thicker pieces, it is possible that a package meeting the USPS minimum number ofpieces will exceed the maximum package thickness. For example, consider a package of depart-ment-store catalogs; 10 pieces might make a package almost a foot thick. That's acceptable on pal-lets, but not in sacks.

When the software forms such an oversize package, it breaks it into two or perhaps three smallerpackages. These are called spanned packages.

User Guide | 61

Spanning is approved by the USPS. Spanned packages qualify for package rates the same as a nor-mal package, even though an individual package might contain less than the minimum number ofpieces.

Spanning is automatic; you cannot turn it off. The software automatically creates spanned packageswhen applicable, and when the following conditions are met:

l The total number of pieces in the package to that destination meets the minimum packagerequirement.

l The total number of physical packages created is not more than the number that would havebeen created if we had not balanced the pieces in the packages.

The software treats spanned packages the same as other packages, generating break marks and list-ing them on reports.

Stacking uneven pieces

If your pieces are unevenly proportioned (for example, a magazine that is saddle stitched andthicker on the bound edge), you must counter stack the pieces to form an even-sized package.

Split the package into no more than four groups of pieces, with each group measuring at least 1 inch(that is, if your piece thickness is less than 1 inch, don't alternate one piece after another, but groupthem and then alternate the groups).

Each of these packages meets USPS requirements. Each group of pieces is at least 1-inch thick, andthere are no more than four groups counterstacked in the package.

User Guide | 62

When you measure a package that is uneven in thickness, the USPS allows you to measure at thethinnest point.

Minimum STD flats 5DG/5DG scheme package size

The minimum package size for Standard Mail flats 5-digit and 5-digit scheme packages is differentthan other Standard Mail flats packages. For 5-digit and 5-digit scheme packages, the piece weightand thickness determines the minimum number of pieces.

For all applicable Standard Mail flats jobs, the software automatically sets the Min 5DG/SchemePackage parameter to 10 or 15 pieces, regardless of what you have entered in the software, basedon the piece weight and thickness:

Piece weight and thickness Minimum piecesper package

less than or equal to 5 ounces andless than or equal to .75 inches thick

15 pieces

greater than 5 ounces orgreater than.75 inches thick

10 pieces

Multiple segment jobs

When you have a job with multiple segments, the software treats each segment as a separate mail-ing. When your segments have more than one version, the software sets the minimum number ofpieces per package based on the heaviest (or thickest) piece in that segment. For example, eachsegment below has two versions. Segment 1 and 3 both have Version 1.

Segment Version Version Minimum

1 Version 16 ounces, 1 inch

Version 24 ounces, .5 inch

10

User Guide | 63

Segment Version Version Minimum

2 Version 33 ounces, .75 inch

Version 42 ounces, .25 inch

15

3 Version 16 ounces, 1 inch

Version 56.25 ounces, 1.25 inches

10

If you save work files

The software warns you when you have saved your work files and gone back into your job andchanged the piece dimensions making the minimum package setting incorrect in your saved workfiles

The warning indicates that the minimum package size listed in the reports generated from the savedwork files may violate USPS rules.

Co-Packaging: Automation and regular flats

Co-packaging is an option to combine automated and regular (non-automated) pieces into pack-ages. In most cases, your postage is reduced using this preparation.

This preparation also saves the post office time and labor, and speeds up delivery. Co-Packaging isan optional sortation level available in these schemes:

l Periodicals Flats

l Periodicals Sacks on Pallets

l Periodicals Packages on Pallets

l Standard Flats

l Standard Sacks on Pallets

l Standard Packages on Pallets

l Package Services BPM flats

l Package Services BPM Packages on Pallets

User Guide | 64

Setting up co-packages

There are three different ways to set up co-packaging. The method you choose is based on the mailclass that you are processing.

For Package Services BPM, see the Co-Package Barcoded and Reg Pcs parameter description inthe Presort Job-File Reference.

For Periodicals and Standard Mail flats, enable the Co-Package Auto and Reg Pieces parameter, thePrepare Automation Rate parameter, and the Prepare Regular Rate parameter.

One package per destination

Co-packaging is limited to one package per destination.

If you have 50 automated pieces and 30 regular (non-automated) pieces going to the same des-tination, and you set your maximum pieces per package to 20, (and you have selected the co-pack-age option), the software makes four packages with 20 pieces each. Here's how the packages aremade:

l Package 1: Automated, 20 pieces

l Package 2: Automated, 20 pieces

l Package 3: Co-package automated and regular (non-automated), 20 pieces

l Package 4: Regular (non-automated), 20 pieces

Notice in the example that the co-package is made before the regular (non-automated) package ismade. The co-package will always fall towards the middle of the sortation unless there are notenough regular (non-automated) pieces to make a package. Then it will be formed last.

Co-packaging rates

For co-packaged automated and regular pieces, rates are based on the following:

For packages in sacks and trays:

l Automated piece rates are based on the package level.

l Regular (nonautomated) piece rates are based on the container level.

For packages on pallets, the rate is based on the package level. For automated pieces in Periodicalspackages with fewer than 6 pieces, the rate is the Automated basic rate.

User Guide | 65

Create 5-digit scheme (L007) packages

You can create 5-digit scheme (L007) co-packages in the two BPM schemes that have the option toco-package. When you select both the co-package and the create 5-digit scheme (L007) packagesoptions, the software makes 5-digit scheme co-packages that contain presorted and regular ratepieces.

When both the Co-Package and the Create 5DG Scheme parameters are enabled (set to Y), thesoftware places the packages in containers and pallets this way:

Scheme name Packages Containers

BPM Flats The software creates 5-digitscheme co-packages.

The co-packages go in 5-digitscheme and merged 5-digit schemecontainers.

BPM Packageson Pallets

The software creates 5-digitscheme co-packages.

The co-packages go on 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF pallets when applic-able.

Co-sacking BPM flats

Co-sacks may contain:

l Presorted rate pieces that claim the barcode discount (must have a ZIP+4 or a delivery pointbarcode).

l Presorted rate pieces that don't claim the barcode discount (must have a readable 5-digit bar-code).

l Co-packages of BPM flats that meet the previous two presorted rate characteristics.

Other rules include the following:

l The pieces in the co-sacks must all be from the same mailing job.

l Each rate level (carrier route, automated, and regular) that is included in your job must sep-arately meet the minimum requirement of 300 pieces.

NOTE Bound Printed Matter cannot be merged under DMM 705.11.4, 705.12.1.1, and 705.13.

User Guide | 66

Letter trays

The USPS furnishes mailers with three types of trays for letter mail:

l one-foot ordinary (MM) trays

l two-foot ordinary (MM) trays

l two-foot extended (EMM) trays

Ordinary trays are designed to hold #10 envelopes. If your mail piece is larger than 45/8 inches tallor 10½ inches long, you are required to use extended trays if they are available.

Trays slope at each end, so you cannot load a 24-inch stack of mail into a "two-foot" tray. Two-foottrays actually are 21.75 inches long as measured along the bottom of the tray. One-foot trays actuallyare 10.25 inches long.

The USPS requires you to use a mixture of one-foot and two-foot trays in the same mailing forpieces that meet MM tray-size limitations. If you don't have enough of one size tray or the other, askthe USPS for authorization to prepare letters in all one-foot or all two-foot trays. When you use a mix-ture of sizes, you might find it helpful to print an output field (AP.Ctn_Size) on your tray labels, as aconvenient signal for the mail-room crew.

Tray preparation

The USPS accepts presorted letters only in trays, not sacks. There are three ways of preparing lettertrays: loose, separator cards, and packages. The method you must follow will depend on the presortscheme you chose.

On your Mail Sort Listing, the software indicates which type of preparation is required for each tray.You can also print an output field (AP.Tray_Prep) on your tray labels, as a convenient signal for themail-room crew. The USPS requires that you place a sleeve around the tray. Then you have to wrapa strap around it from end to end.

Size limits

In tray schemes, you can set a minimum and maximum amount of mail as a percentage of full. Lookfor the Minimum and Maximum Tray Volume options.

We preset these to 85 and 100 percent, respectively. These settings will serve most mailers verywell. Any change to these settings might result in refused mailing.

User Guide | 67

There is one situation in which you might need to reduce these settings. When you mail large (tall)letters, you're supposed to use extended (EMM) trays. However, you might get permission to use reg-ular trays if your postmaster can't supply enough EMM trays.

In this event you'll have to slant the pieces, or you won't be able to get the sleeves on. When youslant pieces steeply, trays don't hold as much mail, so you would have to reduce both the minimumand maximum limits.

Overflow and reduced overflow trays

In some schemes, you can control whether the software makes overflow or reduced overflow trays.

Overflow trays

The software includes the option to create overflow trays in certain automation letter schemes. Inother schemes, there is no overflow option; the software automatically creates the overflow traywhen applicable. As a general rule, overflow trays are allowed if the next sortation level has a higherrate. Refer to the DMM for mail types that cannot have overflow trays.

If you choose not to create overflow trays, but the software determines that because of piece thick-ness, it has to make overflow trays, the software overrides your setting and creates the overflow trayanyway. A warning appears on the Job Summary report.

Some schemes don't include the option to create overflow trays. You can control the creation ofoverflow trays for carrier route mail through your minimum tray settings for 5-digit trays, or by choos-ing to create 3-digit trays.

Reduced overflow trays

The reduced overflow trays option is available for First-Class automation and Standard Mail auto-mation and machinable letters. Reduced overflow trays may reduce the number of trays required fora mailing without impacting postage.

DMM 245.7.5 states: Instead of preparing overflow trays with fewer than 150 pieces, mailers mayinclude these pieces in an existing qualified tray of at least 150 or more pieces at the next tray level.(For example, if a mailer has 30 overflow 5-digit pieces for ZIP Code 20260, these pieces may beadded to an existing qualified 3-digit tray for the correct destination (ZIP Code prefix 202) and theoverflow 5-digit pieces will still qualify for the 5-digit price.) Mailers must note these trays on stand-ardized documentation (see DMM 203.3.2).

When you choose to use reduced overflow trays, you must group the mail that is going into the nexttray level by destination and place it at the front or back of that tray. You will keep the highest level,lowest postage rate, no matter what levels the mail falls to.

User Guide | 68

The reduced overflow tray option does not apply to origin, entry 3-digit, or scheme trays. This meansthat you have to make additional overflow origin/entry 3-digit scheme trays because you can't dropthe remaining mail to the next level. Also note that trays can't be reduced if your mail is in a 5-digitscheme tray in which the scheme contains ZIP Codes from multiple 3-digit areas.

Parameters

Use the following parameters to control the creation of overflow and reduced overflow trays:

l Overflow Trays Option

l STD Overflow Trays Option

l Min Carrier 5DG Tray

l Create 3DG Carrier Route Trays

See the Presort Job-file Reference for more information about these parameters.

STD flats in letter trays

If your Standard Mail flat pieces meet specific USPS criteria, you can place them in letter traysinstead of sacks. The flats must be packaged under most situations, and then the trays must be pal-letized.

Your pieces are less likely to be damaged when they are placed in trays. Bundles are also less likelyto break open when they are in trays. For example, if your flats include a sample of laundry deter-gent, there is a good chance that some may break open when they are handled in sacks. However,placed in trays, the packets of detergent are more protected and fewer pieces are broken.

You can learn the rules about flats in letter trays by reading the applicable DMM sections. Here is anoverview:

Requirement Description

Ninety-percentrequirement

To be eligible for this sortation option, at least 90 percent of your entiremailing must be automated or enhanced carrier route (ECR) rate flats. Theremaining 10 percent (or less) can be presorted rate flats. You cannot basethe 10 percent on individual plant-verified drop shipment (PVDS) des-tinations. You must consider the entire mailing. The software does notcheck for this requirement, but it does issue a warning when you validateyour job.

User Guide | 69

Requirement Description

Minimum piecerequirement

Your mailing must meet all minimum piece requirements (DMM 243) forautomation and ECR flats.

l Automation flats have a minimum of 200 pieces (and remember,they must consist of at least 90 percent of the job.)

l ECR flats have a minimum of 200 pieces.

l Presorted flats have no minimum requirement (and must consist of10 percent or less of the job).

Size and weightrequirements

Automated, presorted, and ECR rate flats must meet the specific dimen-sion stated in DMM 201. In addition, the pieces must fit correctly in thetrays. That means that the pieces cannot stick out of the tray or be jammedin the tray. Find tray dimensions in the DMM 203.4.8.

If the dimensions of the flat piece permits, you can position the pieces inthe trays in double rows. To set this up, enter twice the length of the trayin the USPS Optional Procedures block.

Preparation require-ments

All flats must be packaged, except for flats in full 5-digit trays and full indi-vidual carrier route trays. Sacks are not allowed when you prepare flats inletter trays except when there aren't enough pieces to fill a tray or enoughtrays to complete a pallet.

l Roll up leftover pieces: If ECR pieces don't meet the minimumpieces requirement, the remaining pieces must mail at First-Classrates.

l Co-trays: Presorted and automation rate pieces must be co-trayedwhere applicable. You cannot co-package this type of mailing

Periodicals letter trays on pallets

Presort supports the palletization of Periodicals letter trays (see DMM 705.8.10.2). Use the PresortScheme: PER, Letter Trays on Pallets to process carrier route, automation, and nonautomation pricedmail. This feature does not include flats in letter trays on pallets.

User Guide | 70

NOTE Periodicals mail does not have a minimum volume requirement for each price category.

Destination entry eligibility

The pallet level of the mail piece affects the destination entry eligibility. The following is a break-down of what you might see at each level:

Pallet level Description

DDU (DestinationDelivery Unit)

Available for in-county and carrier route pieces when deposited at thefacility where the delivery address on the mail is located. The palletlevels affect what is eligible for DDU.

DSCF (DestinationSectional Facility)

Available for mail placed on an SCF or more finely presorted pallet. Youmust also deposit the mail at an SCF and address it for delivery to one ofthe 3-digit ZIP Codes served by the facility where you deposited it

DADC (DestinationArea DistributionCenter)

Available for mail placed on an ADC or more finely presorted pallet. Youmust also deposit the mail at an ADC and address it for delivery to oneof the 3-digit ZIP Codes served by the facility where you deposited it.

Tray sequence

Within a pallet, trays are sequenced in the following order (unless you are using mail flow to changethe tray sequence): direct carrier route, 5-digit carrier route, 3-digit carrier route, 5-digit barcode, 5-digit (non-barcode or regular), 3-digit barcode, 3-digit (non-barcode or regular), ADC, and mixedADC.

Pallet levels

The following is a list of optional and required pallet levels for the PER, Letter Trays on Palletsscheme. See DMM 705.8.10.2e for more information.

Pallet level Optional/required

Description

5-digit carrier route Optional The pallet contains only carrier route mail for the same 5-digit ZIP Code.

5-digit Optional The pallet contains automation and/or presorted pricedmail for the same 5-digit ZIP Code. No carrier route ratemail. Only 5-digit scheme and 5-digit trays allowed.

User Guide | 71

Pallet level Optional/required

Description

3-digit Optional Carrier route, automation, and/or presorted priced mailallowed. Carrier route, 5-digit, 5-digit scheme, and 3-digittrays allowed.

SCF Required Carrier route, automation, and/or presorted priced mail for3-digit ZIP Code groups in L005. Carrier Route, 5-digit, 5-digit scheme, and 3-digit trays allowed.

ADC Required Carrier route, automation, and/or presorted priced mail for3-digit ZIP Code groups in L004. Carrier Route, 5-digit, 5-digit scheme, and 3-digit, AADC, and ADC trays allowed.

Mixed ADC Optional Carrier route, automation, and/or presorted priced mailallowed. Labeled with city, state and ZIP Code informationfor ADC serving 3-digit ZIP Code prefix of entry PostOffice as shown in L004.

Template

The p_ltrplt.pst template file contains the PER, Letter Trays on Pallets scheme, in addition toschemes that are in p_letter.pst.

The sequence in the template is as follows:

1. PER, Letter Trays on Pallets

2. PER, Carrier Route Letters

3. PER, Automation Letters

4. PER, Nonautomation Letters

Flat trays

Use flat trays for First-Class flats and CMM pieces; if you prepare Periodicals or Standard Mail flats,place them in sacks, not trays.

Flat trays are much taller than letter trays; they are 11¼ inches high. Some people call them flat tubs.

User Guide | 72

Filling trays

The USPS requires that you package First-Class Flats if you use the following preparation types (seethe Presort Job-File Reference for details of each):

l Automation

l Regular

l Combined

However, the USPS doesn't require packaging if you use Tray Automation preparation; you must pre-pare those flats loose in trays.

Regardless of whether pieces are packaged or loose, the USPS wants you to use the space in traysefficiently. The USPS considers a flat tray to be full when:

l It contains at least one stack of pieces or packages lying flat.

l The stack reaches at least to the bottom of the handholds (8 inches tall in a flat tray).

You can control tray filling by setting four options in the First-Class Flats scheme:

l Maximum Package Thickness (except Tray Automation)

l Number of Stacks in Tray

l Minimum Tray Height

l Maximum Tray Height

Stacks

Don't confuse a stack with a package. A stack is a column of pieces between 8 and 11¼ inches tall.

The size of most flats will allow you to place two stacks in the tub, one at each end. You may placeup to four stacks in a tub (when mailing a digest-size piece, for example).

A stack cannot extend beyond the top of the tray. You'll need to place a lid on the tray and secure itwith two straps around the width (the shorter dimension).

User Guide | 73

Packages

A stack typically contains two or more packages. So if you package First-Class flats, you'll want toset your maximum package thickness so that you can fit multiple packages in a stack. You could alsostand a single package on end and place it next to a stack.

If you set maximum package thickness at 6 inches, you'll have some 12-inch stacks, too tall for thetray. So we recommend that you set the maximum package thickness to no greater than 5 or 5½inches.

Obviously, tray filling is something you can plan more precisely if you can get some sample mailpieces.

Periodicals flats in trays

Presort allows you to place machinable barcoded flat-sized pieces into trays instead of sacks. TheUSPS requires you to prepare mail pieces in flat trays with green lids. This can be done for the pre-paration levels listed in DMM 207.22.7 and 207.25.5:

l 5-digit scheme

l 5-digit

l 3-digit

l SCF

l Origin SCF

l ADC

l Origin mixed ADC

l Mixed ADC

Trays are subject to container charges. All pieces receive a piece price based on the tray level, andthe container charge is based on the tray.

NOTE Periodicals flats in trays are not eligible for exceptional dispatch.

Carrier route preparation

Carrier route preparation is not allowed when using trays instead of sacks. If your mailing containscarrier route pieces, you'll need to set up multiple schemes. For example, one scheme would tell

User Guide | 74

Presort to prepare only carrier route mail pieces in sacks and the other scheme would tell Presort toprepare automation and regular mail pieces in trays.

The templates listed below have carrier route preparation turned on. If you do not want to use thispreparation, please comment out the block.

Overflow trays

According to DMM 203.4.6, overflow trays are not allowed when placing Periodicals flats in trays.

In most cases, the post office requires you to fill one flat tray before starting a new tray. This meansthat if there is room in the tray for more than one stack of mail, then you must tell Presort upfront togenerate two or more stacks of mail in the tray.

Schemes and templates

To create Periodicals flats on trays, set the Processing Category parameter to Automated Flat andpopulate the following schemes:

l PER, Flats in Trays on Pallets

l PER, Flats in Trays

NOTE When populating the Max Pallet Volume parameter in the PER, Flats in Trays on Palletsscheme, keep in mind that the volume of a flat tray (also called a tub) is 1784 cubic inches,regardless of the amount of mail contained within the tray. Eight trays (tubs) make up one tier ona pallet.

You can also use the following templates:

l p_flttry.pst

l p_flttryplt.pst

Selvage

The USPS includes selvage when determining the maximum size of flats in all mail classes.

Selvage is the extra polywrap material around a mail piece. For example, let's say you are mailing apolywrapped magazine. You would need to shake the magazine so that it settles into the bottom,left-hand corner of the wrapping.

To determine the selvage height, measure the distance between the "top" of the magazine and theedge of the polywrap. Do the same on the other side of the mail piece to obtain the selvage width.

User Guide | 75

The software uses only the dimensions that you enter for the actual mail piece — not the selvage,which is used to verify the piece dimensions — to determine the amount of mail that can go into asack, tray, and so on.

If you want the software to verify the selvage amounts, enter a value for each parameter.

DMM 201.4.5.3 says "For purposes of the polywrap standards for overhang (selvage) only, the topedge of the mailpiece is one of the two longer edges of the piece. Any polywrap selvage must meetthese standards:

a. When the mailpiece contents are totally positioned at the bottom of the polywrap, the over-hang must not be more than 0.5 inch at the top of the mailpiece.

b. When the mailpiece contents are totally positioned to the left or to the right side of the poly-wrap, the overhang must not be more than 1.5 inches on the opposite side.

c. The polywrap covering must not be so tight that it bends the mailpiece."

NOTE If you are processing an auto-dimension job, do not include the selvage dimensions inyour width and height amounts. It is up to you to make sure that mail pieces that include theselvage measurements do not exceed the maximum height and width of an automated or mach-inable flat. The software does not check this for you.

To set selvage measurements, use the following parameters in the Version Description and VersionDefaults blocks:

l Additional Selvage Height

l Additional Selvage Width

Flats dimensions

The length of a flat-sized mail piece is the longest dimension. Width is the dimension perpendicularto the length.

User Guide | 76

Testing the flexibility and droop of your flat-sized mail piece

For a piece to be considered a flat, it must meet the flexibility requirements as stated in DMM201.4.3:

a. All flats:

1. Place the piece with the length parallel to the edge of a flat surface and extend the piecehalfway off the surface.

2. Press down on the piece at a point 1 inch from the outer edge, in the center of the piece'slength, exerting steady pressure.

3. The piece is not flexible if it cannot bend at least 1 inch vertically without being damaged.

4. The piece is flexible if it can bend at least 1 inch vertically without being damaged and itdoes not contain a rigid insert. No further testing is necessary.

5. Test the piece according to 1.4b or 1.4c below if it can bend at least 1 inch vertically withoutbeing damaged and it contains a rigid insert.

b. Flats 10 inches or longer that pass the test in 1.4a and contain a rigid insert:

1. Place the piece with the length perpendicular to the edge of a flat surface and extend thepiece 5 inches off the surface.

2. Press down on the piece at a point 1 inch from the outer edge, in the center of the piece'swidth, exerting steady pressure.

3. Turn the piece around and repeat steps 1 and 2. The piece is flexible if both ends can bendat least 2 inches vertically without being damaged.

c. Flats less than 10 inches long that pass the test in 1.4a and contain a rigid insert:

1. Place the piece with the length perpendicular to the edge of a flat surface and extend thepiece one-half of its length off the surface.

2. Press down on the piece at a point 1 inch from the outer edge, in the center of the piece'swidth, exerting steady pressure.

User Guide | 77

3. Turn the piece around and repeat steps 1 and 2. The piece is flexible if both ends can bendat least 1 inch vertically without being damaged.

Automation flat

Furthermore, for a flat to qualify as an automation flat, it must pass the USPS deflection test (seeDMM 201.4.6), which tests how much the piece droops when held over the edge of a hard surface.The USPS rules state that a mail piece is automation-compatible if it meets the other automationrequirements and passes the following deflection test:

a. For pieces 10 inches or longer:

1. Place the piece with the length perpendicular to the edge of a flat surface and extend thepiece 5 inches off the surface. Turn the piece around and repeat the process.

2. The piece is automation-compatible if it does not droop more than 4 inches vertically.

b. For pieces less than 10 inches:

1. Place the piece with the length perpendicular to the edge of a flat surface and extend thepiece one-half of its length off the surface. Turn the piece around and repeat the process.

2. The piece is automation-compatible if it does not droop more than 1 inch less than the exten-ded length. For example, a piece 8 inches long would extend 4 inches off a flat surface. Itmust not droop more than 3 inches vertically.

c. For pieces with bound or folded edges perform the test in 3.2.4a or 3.2.4b above by placing thebound or final folded edge perpendicular to the edge of the flat surface.

Standard Mail Marketing parcels

According to the USPS, "Marketing parcels are defined as containing information and/or productsamples whose purposes are to encourage recipients to purchase a product or service, make a con-tribution, support a cause, form a belief or opinion, take an action, or provide information to recip-ients."

The software uses the following processing categories for Marketing parcels:

User Guide | 78

Processingcategory

Description

Irregular marketing par-cels

Marketing parcels that weigh less than 6 ounces.

You can use the following schemes with this processing category:

l STD, Irregular and Marketing Parcels

l STD, Irregular and Marketing Parcels Pallets

l STD, Irregular and Marketing Parcels Sacks on Pallets

Machinable marketingparcels

Marketing parcels that weigh 6 ounces or more.

You can use the following schemes with this processing category:

l STD, Machinable and Marketing Parcels

l STD, Machinable and Marketing Parcels Pallets

The following template files are available:

l a_irrmkt.pst (marketing parcels less than 6 ounces)

l a_irrmktplt.pst (marketing parcels pallets less than 6 ounces)

l a_machmkt.pst (marketing parcels 6 ounces or more)

l a_machmktplt.pst (marketing parcels pallets 6 ounces or more)

Physical standards

The physical standards for Marketing parcels are described in DMM 201.8.4.2.

Dimension Limits

Height The height cannot be more than 9 inches. If the parcel is ¼ inches thick orless, the height must be at least 3.5 inches.

User Guide | 79

Dimension Limits

Length/width The length cannot be more than 12 inches. If the parcel is ¼ inches thick orless, the length must be at least 5 inches.

Thickness The thickness must be at least 0.009 inches, but not more than 2 inches.

Preparation

Marketing parcels that weigh 6 ounces or more follow the same preparation rules as machinable par-cels, while Marketing parcels that weigh less than 6 ounces follow the same preparation rules asirregular parcels.

Per DMM 243.3.2.2, Marketing parcels must bear an alternative addressing format according to DMM602.3.0 and cannot be used for “fulfillment purposes” (i.e. the sending of items specifically pur-chased or requested by the customer of a mailer). Alternative addressing formats include occupantor exceptional addressing or simplified addressing when allowed for saturation mail.

Pricing

The following pricing information applies to Marketing parcels:

l Marketing parcels are eligible for the same 5-digit, SCF, NDC, and Mixed NDC prices as irreg-ular parcels (see DMM 243.5.8).

l Marketing parcels can be paid at either regular or non-profit prices.

Mail.dat

PostalOne! requires that the Standard Parcel Type field is populated in the Mail Piece Unit (.mpu)and Component (.cpt) records.

Priority Mail parcels

This feature requires a license key to use. Contact your BCC Software Sales Representative formore information.

Priority Mail (PM) is a mail class that offers expedited service (1-3 business day domestic delivery, notguaranteed). Presort currently supports Priority Mail parcel jobs.

User Guide | 80

Priority Mail Preparation

Priority Mail pieces must have the basic price marking of “Priority Mail” printed in a prominent loc-ation on the address side. If shipping address labels are used, it is recommended that they containthe Priority Mail service indicator composed of the service icon and service banner, as described inDMM 202.3.3.2.

Priority Mail packaging is available from the USPS. Priority Mail packaging provided by the USPSmust be used only for Priority Mail. Regardless of how the packaging is reconfigured or how mark-ings may be obliterated, any matter mailed in USPS-provided Priority Mail packaging is charged theappropriate Priority Mail price.

You can also use your own packaging prepared according to DMM 202.3.3 and DMM 202.3.4. Con-tainer flaps must be able to close within the normal folds. Tape may be applied to the flaps andseams to reinforce the container; provided the design of the container is not enlarged by openingthe sides and the container is not reconstructed in any way.

The sender's domestic return address must appear legibly on Priority Mail pieces. Populating the PMReturn Address parameters in the Version blocks will populate the necessary fields in the ShippingServices File and will generate the correct output in the following AP fields in the Address OutputFile for label creation:

l AP.RET_ADDR

l AP.RET_CITY

l AP.RET_STATE

l AP.RET_ZIP5

Presort will also generate and populate the correct indicia and banner text strings in the AP.IMPB_INDIC and AP.IMPB_BANNR fields.

See the Quick Reference for Views and Job File Products for information about these AP fields.

NOTE If you own Label Studio, note that Label Toolbox design files for Priority Mail are avail-able from your product download page in the BCC SoftwareCommunity. These files are notavailable for use with Postalsoft Label Studio.

Shipping Services File

All Priority Mail parcels are required to have an IMpb prepared under 204.2.2, which requires the cre-ation of Shipping Services File Type 1 (eVS). Permit imprint is the only supported payment methodPresort supports for eVS. See Shipping Services File for more information.

User Guide | 81

Mail.dat

PostalOne! requires that the Priority Mail Parcel Type field is populated in the Mail Piece Unit (.mpu)and Component (.cpt) records.

Mail.dat requires the container type to be populated in the CSM. Even though containerization is notrequired for Priority Mail, PostalOne! will not accept a blank entry in this field. Presort will populatethis field with "B" for bedload by default.

If the destination delivery address is used in place of a ZIP+4 Code in the Shipping Services File, youmust also create a .UPA file.

Reports

The following reports are supported for Priority Mail parcels preparation:

l Job Summary (multiple entry points and multiple segments are not supported, so SUM EP,SUM SEG and SUM EP & SEG report types are not available.)

l Postage Qualification Report

l Postage Statement 3600-PM

l Summary Listing

l Shipping Services File Type 1 (eVS)

l Mail.dat

Output files

Presort generates an Address Output File for Priority Mail. A container output file is also generated,but only with one record. Since Priority Mail is not required to be containerized, this file should notbe used.

Priority Mail Sortation

Presort sorts Priority Mail pieces by zone and then by ZIP, except when the price is the same for allpieces. Presenting pieces by zone is required if pricing is based on zone.

Priority Mail does not require any containerization; you may submit Priority Mail mailings inwhichever way you would like. The Priority Mail scheme block contains no parameters for thisreason.

User Guide | 82

The minimum requirement of 200 pieces/50 pounds required by the permit payment methodapplies to Priority Mail. Presort will not enforce this limit in your jobs, but you will receive a warningif your mailing does not meet the minimum requirement.

Multiple entry points and multiple segments are not supported.

Auto-dimensioning is not supported.

Priority Mail Parcel Commercial Base and Commercial Plus Pricing

Priority Mail parcels can receive one of these two pricing schemes:

l Commercial Base

l Commercial Plus

Commercial Base

Commercial Base is a Priority Mail pricing scheme based on piece weight and zone. Weight is cal-culated by rounding up to the next whole-pound increment, up to a 70 pound maximum. The min-imum postage amount per addressed piece is the 1-pound price.

Flat-Rate packaging is also available, and offers several sizes of USPS-provided packaging materialsthat can be mailed for a flat rate to any zone, at any weight up to 70 pounds.

Commercial Plus

Commercial Plus offers the same options as Commercial Base, but offers lower prices for highervolumes, and includes the additional cubic pricing option not available for Commercial Base. Theminimum postage amount per addressed piece is the 0.5 pound price. Items over 0.5 pound arerounded up to the next whole pound. For example, if a Commercial Plus piece weighs 0.10 pound,the weight (postage) increment is 0.5 pound; if a piece weighs 0.75 pound, the weight (postage)increment is 1 pound. Commercial Plus requires mailers to fulfill certain volume and commitmentrequirements.

A combination of Commercial Base and Commercial Plus is not allowed.

Commercial Plus-Cubic

Commercial Plus Cubic pricing is based on package size and zone. Packages must weigh no morethan 20 pounds, have a length no greater than 18 inches, and can be no more than 0.5 cubic feet involume. Presort calculates the cubic size as prescribed in the DMM by rounding each of the threedimensions (height, width, and depth) down to the nearest quarter-inch and then multiplying themtogether. You may also round the dimensions yourself.

User Guide | 83

Prices are broken into 5 tiers in 0.1 cubic foot increments, up to 0.5 cubic foot. Further, this raterequires manifesting and payment via eVS or other electronic means. Commercial Plus-Cubic alsorequires mailers to fulfill certain volume and commitment requirements.

For more information about pricing and eligibility, see http://pe.usps.gov/text/dmm300/223.htm.

Rate categories

To use these categories, do the following:

1. Set the Processing Category parameter in the Version block to PM Parcel.

2. Set the Rate Category parameter in the Version block.

The rate categories offered for the two schemes are the same, except there is also cubic pricing forCommercial Plus.

The rate category options for Commercial Base are:

l PMBASEBYWEIGHT = Priority Mail Commercial Base by Weight

l PMBASESMLBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Base Flat-Rate Small Box

l PMBASEMEDBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Base Flat-Rate Medium Box

l PMBASELRGBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Base Flat-Rate Large Box

The rate category options for Commercial Plus are:

l PMPLUSBYWEIGHT = Priority Mail Commercial Plus by Weight

l PMPLUSSMLBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Plus Flat-Rate Small Box

l PMPLUSMEDBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Plus Flat-Rate Medium Box

l PMPLUSLRGBOX = Priority Mail Commercial Plus Flat-Rate Large Box

l PMPLUSCUBIC = Priority Mail Commercial Plus – Cubic

NOTE Any or all of the supported rate categories from one scheme can appear in a single job(with permission from the USPS). Rate categories from both Commercial Base and CommercialPlus are not allowed in the same job.

User Guide | 84

Setting up a Priority Mail job

1. To create a Priority Mail parcel mailing, set up your job file as described:

2. In the General block, set the Mail Class parameter to Priority. Set all other parameters asappropriate.

3. Add the Priority Mail scheme block to your job file if you have not done so. (Edjob will notadd the new Priority Mail Scheme Block. You will have to copy and paste it from the mas-ter.pst file or add it using Views.) Since containers are not required for Priority Mail, the Pri-ority Mail Scheme Block has no parameters in it:

* DMM 225 Presort:BEGIN Presort Scheme: Priority Mail========================END

4. In the Execution block, set the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter to IMpb. Set all otherparameters as appropriate.

5. In the Version blocks:

l Set the Height andWidth parameters (even if you are using flat rate packing).

l Set the Processing Category parameter to PM Parcel.

l Set the Rate Category parameter to the appropriate Priority Mail rate category.

l Populate the PM Return Address parameters

l Set all other parameters as appropriate.

6. In the Intelligent Mail block:

l Set the parameters to assign (and track, if applicable) serial numbers as appropriate toensure unique IMpbs. See Assigning and tracking unique serial numbers for moreinformation.

l Although containerization is not applicable to Priority Mail, the Tray/Sack Mailer IDand Tray/Sack Serial Num Start parameters must be populated for all IM jobs.

User Guide | 85

Presort will ignore these values for Priority Mail jobs.

l Set the AUTO DIMEN Fields Selection parameter to None.

l Set all other parameters as appropriate.

7. In the Shipping Services File block:

l Set the parameters to generate a unique Electronic File Number.

l Set the Elec. File Type parameter to 1 (for eVS).

8. In the Entry Point Description block, set the Min Pieces andMin Pounds parameters to 0.(There are no minimum requirements for Priority Mail.)

9. The template file pm_parcel.pst is available in your templates folder. Required fields aremarked with "**".

Define PW fields

You must also define the following input fields in your DEF file and map them to the appropriatefields:

l Both PW.ZIP (ZIP Code field) AND PW.ZIP4 (ZIP+4 field); OR just PW.ZIP10 (field for both ZIPand ZIP+4, including the hyphen)

l PW.DPBC (Destination Delivery Point field)

See Including the Destination Delivery Address or Delivery Point Validated (DPV) 11-digit ZIP Codefor ALL Parcel mailings for more information.

First-Class™ Package Service Commercial Parcels

First-Class Package Service commercial parcels are a single-piece product with prices starting at 1ounce up to less than 16 ounces, according to DMM 283.1.0. Mail must be prepared according toDMM 285.1.0. There is no minimum quantity. Payment for this mailing must be made by permit only.

To prepare First-Class Package Service commercial parcels

User Guide | 86

l Use the 1C, Package Service Parcel Single Piece scheme block.

l In the Version blocks, set the Processing Category parameter to 1C Parcel and the RateCategory parameter to Reg.

l The basic required marking ‘‘First-Class Package’’ or ‘‘First-Class PKG’’ must be printed aspart of, directly below, or to the left of the postage on all parcels according to DMM 202.3.6.To mark pieces with ''First-Class Package" or "First-Class PKG," use the AP.Pc_Rt_Cat field.

Reports

The following reports are supported for the First-Class Parcels single piece preparation:

l Job Summary

l Qualification Report

l Mail Sort Listing

l Postage Statement 3600

l Posting for Address or Container output file

l Summary Listing

l Manifest Listing (presorted and single piece)

l Shipping Services File

NOTE The sort level for single piece sacks is "SGL".

First-Class Commercial Residual Single-Piece mail

Commercial Residual mail is the mail leftover after the completion of a presort sequence. Com-mercial Residual prices are applied to residual pieces from any mailing that is claiming commercialpresorted rates.

To prepare First-Class Commercial Residual Single-Piece mail

User Guide | 87

There are two options:

1. You can choose to combine pieces up to and including 1 oz. with pieces greater than 1 oz. upto 3.5 oz. and sort them into the same tray to receive the First Class Residual Single-Piecerate.

2. You can sort all pieces into separate trays by weight (in single ounce increments) to receivethe First Class Metered rate.

Set the Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 oz parameter in the Presort Scheme 1C, Single Piece block toYes to claim First Class Residual Single-Piece rate for combined pieces weighing up to and includ-ing 1 oz. and pieces weighing over 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz. Set this parameter to No to claim the First ClassMetered rate by ounce for mixed weight up to and including 1 oz. and over 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz. resid-ual pieces.

Residual mail pieces are recorded on the same postage statement as automation and presorted mailpieces, on Lines B4 through B7 of PS Form 3600-FCM.

For more information, see DMM 244.5.

Presort prepares Commercial Residual mail as follows:

Piece typeand weight

PS-3600line

Rate Preparation

ResidualNonpresorted

B4 Metered Tray(s) contains pieces up to and including 1 oz.

ResidualSingle-piece

B5 ResidualSingle-Piece

Tray(s) contains combined pieces up to andincluding 1 oz. and pieces greater than 1 oz. upto and including 3.5 oz.

ResidualNonpresorted

B6 Metered Tray(s) contains pieces greater than 1 oz. up toand including 3.5 oz.

User Guide | 88

Piece typeand weight

PS-3600line

Rate Preparation

NonpresortedSingle-piece

B7 Metered Tray(s) contains only pieces up to and including 1oz., OR

Tray(s) contains only pieces greater than 1 oz. upto and including 2 oz., OR

Tray(s) contains only pieces greater than 2 oz.up to and including 3 oz., OR

Tray(s) contains only pieces greater than 3 oz.up to and including 3.5 oz.

First Class Residual Single-Piece rate for combined residual pieces

The First Class Residual Single Piece rate applies when you combine pieces up to and including 1oz. and pieces greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz. First Class Residual pieces are sorted into one tray (orset of trays) in a qualified mailing. This is referred to as "blending."

To claim this rate, set the Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 oz parameter in the Presort Scheme 1C,Single Piece block to YES, or check the box next to Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 oz in the SinglePiece dialog in Views. Presort will combine all residual pieces in the same tray (or set of trays).These pieces are reported on line B5.

To receive this rate, you must have two versions set up in the 1C, Single Piece scheme: one for thepieces up to and including 1 oz. and one for the pieces greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz.

l If there is only one version in the job, and you have set the Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 ozparameter to YES, you will receive a message stating that there must be a version for piecesup to and including 1 oz. and a version for pieces greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz. to qualify forthe First Class Residual Single-Piece rate. You will have to either set this parameter to NO, oradd another version with a different weight (either for pieces up to and including 1 oz. or forpieces greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz.).

l If this parameter is set to YES and there are two versions in the job, but only one version con-tains pieces that qualify for the First Class Residual Single-Piece rate (such as all residualpieces weighing only up to and including 1 oz. or only greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz., but nota combination of both weights), a warning message will appear on the Job Summary reportstating that all of the residual pieces are of the same weight. If you continue, these pieces

User Guide | 89

will still receive the Residual Single-Piece rate for all pieces. The resulting preparation is onetray (or set of trays) with pieces of only one weight.

l If the job does not contain any First Class residual pieces (that is, any leftover pieces that fallout of a qualified mailing, such as presorted automation pieces of up to and including 1 oz. orpieces greater than 1 oz. up to 3.5 oz.), Presort does not allow blending of any pieces.

First Class Metered rate by ounce for mixed weight residual pieces

The First Class Metered rate applies when you sort mixed weight First Class residual pieces into sep-arate trays by ounce. Trays must contain pieces only within a certain ounce increment and cannotbe bundled within a single tray. The resulting preparation is a tray (or set of trays) for each ounceincrement.

To claim this rate, set the Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 oz parameter in the Presort Scheme 1C,Single Piece block to NO, or uncheck the box next to Combine Residual Ltrs to 3.5 oz in the SinglePiece dialog in Views. Presort will sort pieces into separate trays by ounce. These pieces are repor-ted on lines B4 and B6.

Verifying the application of Commercial Residual Rates

The following reports, postage statements, and files reflect the application of Commercial Residualrates:

l On PS Form 3600-FCM, the sum of the values in the No. of Pieces columns for lines B4through B7 is the total number of First Class Commercial Residual pieces. The CommercialResidual rate that was claimed for each line is also shown.

l

In the Mail.dat files:

The FCM Letter Residual Preparation Indicator field in the .seg file will be set toM if thecombined option is selected (and the job qualifies); otherwise, this field will be left blank.The Rate Category field in the .cqt file will be set to S (for Single Piece).

The Rate Schedule field in the .mpu file will be left blank (for Commercial).

l In the Address Output file:

The AP.Postage and AP.Manfst_Key output fields show rate information.

AP.Ctn_Level will contain SGL for all First Class Single Piece Residual mailings.

User Guide | 90

AP.Ctn_Rate will contain SGL when First Class Metered pricing is applied.

AP.Piece_Rate will contain FC when First Class Metered price is applied, and will contain SRwhen the First Class Residual Single Piece price is applied.

l The Summary Listing displays the postage that is applied to single pieces.

l The Manifest Listing report displays the applied prices and the assigned traying, and the sum-mary section of the Manifest Listing displays single pieces by line.

Sacks

Sacks are used in the following mail classes:

l Periodicals

l Standard Mail flats and parcels

l Package Services

The USPS furnishes mailers with the following sacks:

Size Capacity(Cubic ft.)

Capacity(Cubic in.)

Max weight(lbs.)

#1 4.5 7776 70

#2 3.0 5184 70

#3 1.5 2592 70

#1 Clear Sack 3.75 6500 70

#3 Clear Sack 2.5 4000 70

Size limits for sacks

The USPS sets the minimum amount of mail that you can place in a sack and qualify for a presort dis-count. See the DMM for specific amounts.

User Guide | 91

When you set up your presort schemes, you can control sack filling by setting the maximum weightand volume. The volume limit is a percentage of the total capacity listed above.

If you raise the limits too high, you might end up with some heavy, full sacks. If you set them toolow, the software forms more sacks, and you might waste time by handling more sacks than neces-sary.

The software uses whichever limit best fits the mailing. To determine which limit to apply, the soft-ware divides the weight of one piece into the maximum weight, and the volume of one piece intothe maximum volume, and uses the limit that results in the smaller number of pieces.

If you mingle multiple versions, the software applies both the weight and volume limits. Thisensures that sacks will be properly filled no matter what mix of versions they happen to contain.

Periodicals origin split

The software uses a mixed package/sack level. The mixed sack level, MADC L201, is in addition toanother mixed sack level called MADC L009.

The content of a sack at the mixed origin level— as well as the content of mixed packages from mailleft over after the 3-digit, 5-digit and ADC bundles have been prepared— is determined from thetable, L201.

This L201 table is based upon the 3-digit ZIP Code of both the entry point and the destination. Mailleft over after this level is prepared in mixed packages and sacks according to the L009 table.

In Views, select Mixed Origin ADC (L201) in the Optional Sortation Levels window for the PER, Flatsscheme. In Job-file, use the parameter named Create MXD Origin (L201) Pkg/Sack in PresortScheme: PER, Flats.

The following diagrams show where the L201 Mixed ADC level fits in.

User Guide | 92

Rules

The following list gives an overview of the USPS rules for the Periodicals origin split processing. Formore detailed information, see DMM 207.

l After preparing all bundles at finer sort levels (for example, any carrier route and automationpieces first and then any presorted levels prior to mixed), prepare origin mixed packagesbased on the L201 table (using entry point and piece destinations) before making "normal"L009 MADC bundles.

l Before making Mixed ADC sacks, make L201 Origin Mixed ADC sacks (based on entry pointand bundle destinations). These may contain L201 Origin Mixed ADC packages and bundlesfrom finer sortation levels.

Periodicals Exception to Sacking

The USPS permits mailers to enter periodicals at DDU entry points in carrier route bundles, free ofsacks or trays, under DMM, section 207.23.4.2 Exception to Sacking ⇨.

To prepare carrier-route bundles of periodicals for entry at a DDU under the exception to sacking

1. l In Job File, copy the PER, DDU 5D CART Loose Bundles scheme from the mas-ter.pst file and paste it into your job file. Set the parameter values as desired.

l In Views, select the scheme PER, DDU 5D CART Loose Bundles in the Designer.Adjust the settings as desired.

2. Make sure the job is set up so as to avoid the potential pitfalls discussed below.

CAUTION The PER, DDU 5D CART Loose Bundles scheme was designed for maximum flex-ibility. Presort does not verify that the mail is eligible for the periodicals exception to sacking;the user is responsible for doing so. Do not use this scheme unless you are well versed in theUSPS rules regarding the exception to sacking. Check your settings and output carefully, andsee "Pitfalls to Avoid" on the next page.

NOTE

l The PER, DDU 5D CART Loose Bundles scheme can be used only with periodicals, andcannot be used in comail jobs.

User Guide | 93

l There is a limit to the number of loose bundles allowed per carrier route, and there is amaximum weight per bundle. Presort will automatically adhere to these limits.

Pitfalls to Avoid

With this scheme, Presort enables you to take advantage of the periodicals exception to sacking, butit does not verify that the mail is eligible for this exception.

l Under the PER, DDU 5D CART Loose Bundles scheme, Presort may sort FSS pieces to theDDU entry point. Be sure FSS pieces are filtered out before mail is run through this scheme.

l Ensure that only DDU ZIPs are included in the ZIP range for the entry point. Including non-DDU ZIPs can cause problems, including the following.

l If non-DDU ZIPs are included in the ZIP range for an entry point, mail addressed tothose ZIP codes will be sorted to the entry point, even though it is not actually eli-gible for the exception to sacking.

l Presort places the loose bundles for a given entry point onto a virtual "pallet" (forwhich there is no container charge). That pallet will be characterized according to thefirst mail placed on it. If mail addressed to a non-DDU ZIP is the first bundle placed onthe virtual pallet, not only will that bundle not receive the DDU discount, but none ofthe subsequent bundles placed on that virtual pallet will either.

Palletization

Palletizing means preparing packages, letter trays, or sacks on shipping pallets that are destined andlabeled for a USPS facility. The USPS supports palletizing in the following mail classes:

l Periodicals

l Standard Mail

l Package Services

l First-Class

Palletizing is the only practical way to handle large mailings. However, they can be practical andattractive even for medium-sized mailings. With some exceptions, pallets may weigh from 250 to2200 pounds.

User Guide | 94

Palletizing makes it easier to transport mail within your plant, and into and out of trucks. If you pre-pared these packages in a sack scheme, postage would be based on sack level. Postage for thesame mail prepared with a Packages on Pallets scheme would be based on package level, resultingin potentially overall lower postage

To palletize your mail, you will need the software's Palletization module. The USPS does not requireany special permit for palletizing. However, you must be careful to follow all USPS rules regardingpallet preparation, materials, and stacking. If the USPS decides that you prepare unsafe pallets, theycould withdraw your palletization privilege. You may need additional equipment to shrink-wrap andmove pallets.

Pallet size limits

The USPS limits pallets both by weight and height.

Dimension Limits

Weight With some exceptions, pallets should contain at least 250 pounds of mail,unless you make special arrangements with the USPS. No single pallet,nor stack of pallets, may weigh more than 2200 pounds. This figureincludes the weight of the pallet itself, so if you put 2200 pounds of mailon a pallet, it's overweight.

Height Single pallets are limited to 77 inches tall, and stacked pallets to 84inches. This is measured from the floor, so it does include the height ofthe pallet itself, not just the mail. Pallets of letter trays must contain atleast 36 linear feet of trays.

Within these USPS limits, you can set your own pallet limits, through options in the palletizingschemes.

Limit Description

Minimum weight 250 to 500 pounds

You have the option either to:

l set the same minimum at all sort levels, or

l set different minimums at each sort level.

User Guide | 95

Limit Description

Maximum weight 1000 to 2200 pounds

We recommend 2100 pounds because you must count the weight of thepallet, wrapping, boxes, straps, top cap, and so on. The same maximumweight is applied at all sort levels.

NOTE For Standard Mail pallet schemes, you have the option to setthe max pallet weight for each pallet level.

Maximum volume 85 to 100 percent, based on the USPS maximum volume of 85½ cubicfeet.

Our figure for maximum volume assumes a stack of mail 40 inches wide,48 inches long (which are normal pallet dimensions), and 77 inches tall.You may find that your stacks of mail do not cover the entire pallet area;for example, there may be a few inches of open space around each edge.You might want to allow for this by reducing the maximum pallet volume.Otherwise, the software might form a pallet taller than 77 inches.

How the software applies your pallet limits

Generally, the software applies either the maximum weight or volume limit, not both. To determinewhich limit to apply, the software divides the weight of one piece into the maximum weight, and thevolume of one piece into the maximum volume. Whichever method yields the smaller number ofpieces, the software uses as the limit.

When you mingle multiple versions or editions, the software applies both the weight and volume lim-its to each pallet. This ensures that pallets will be properly filled no matter what mix of versions theyhappen to contain.

Adjust your pallet limits

You can set different minimum weights at each sort level. You might do this to reduce the numberof small pallets, and thus, reduce handling.

For example, when preparing a Packages on Pallets scheme, you might set the pallet weight for 5-digit and 3-digit pallets at 500 pounds, and set the pallet weight for SCF pallets at 250 pounds (theminimum allowed by the USPS). Fewer, fuller pallets would be formed using this strategy, becausemore mail would fall to the SCF pallets. You'll benefit from less mail handling and no increase inpostage, because postage applies to the package level, not the pallet level.

User Guide | 96

If you have USPS authorization, you may set the minimum pallet weight at less than 250 pounds.The software will warn you that your setting is below USPS regulations, but you can ignore the warn-ing and continue processing the job.

Packages and containers on pallets

For convenience, the USPS allows mailers to place packages or containers of mail directly on palletsin certain classes. The software supports preparation of the following packages or containers on pal-lets:

Class Packages Trays Sacks

Periodicals X X X

Standard Mail X X X

First Class X X

Package Services X

To prepare packages or containers on pallets, use one of the following schemes:

l PER, Packages on Pallets

l STD, Packages on Pallets

l PSVC, Packages on Pallets

l STD, Trays on Pallets

l STD, Flats Letter Trays on Pallets

l 1C, Letter Trays on Pallets

l 1C, Flat Trays on Pallets

l PER, Sacks on Pallets

l STD, Sacks on Pallets

l COMAIL PER/STD/BPM, Packages on Pallets

User Guide | 97

Prepare packages and containers on pallets

In each of these schemes, the software combines ordinary container schemes to form the palletizedscheme. For example, in the Standard Mail, Trays on Pallets scheme, the software offers theseon/off controls, one for each of the three tray schemes:

l Enhanced Carrier Route

l Automation

l Regular

We recommend that you turn on all of the individual scheme controls within the pallet scheme. Thesoftware then combines the package or container schemes into one palletized mailing. In yourreports, forms, and output files, the pallets scheme behaves as one scheme and not three.

Standard Mail

In Standard Mail jobs, be sure to turn on Auto Qualification. Otherwise, with this option turned off,the software would cancel the whole Letter Trays on Pallets scheme if any of the three tray schemesfailed to meet minimum mail volume (50 pounds or 200 pieces).

First-Class

According to DMM 705.8.10.1, pallets that contain First-Class mail letters or flat trays must have thefollowing:

Mail Type Minimum Height Maximum Height

Letter trays 72 linear feet(six full layers)

77 inches of letter trays or 12 tiers(whichever is less)

Flat trays 24 linear feet(three full layers)

77 inches

The following sort levels are eligible for palletization if the ZIP Code on the mail piece falls withinthe L201 labeling list area for the origin entry point:

l 5-digit pallet (optional)

l Origin SCF pallet (required)

User Guide | 98

l SCF pallet (required)

l AADC/ADC (depending on shape - required)

l Origin mixed ADC surface

ZIP Codes that are outside of the L201 labeling list area for the origin entry point fall to the mixedADC air sort level. This is a required level with no minimums.

Packages on pallets

Packages are formed within limits. Pallets are formed within your limits of weight and volume.

If you do not use the Packages on Pallets scheme, the alternative is sacks. Postage for sacked pack-ages is usually based on sack level. When you're mailing Periodical and Standard Mail automatedflats and carrier-route sacks, or Standard Mail carrier-route sacks, postage is based on each pack-age's sort level.

Postage for palletized packages is based on the package sort level, so you may save on postage ifyou choose to place packages directly on pallets rather than in trays or sacks, and then on pallets.You could save on labor, too.

See Also

Packages

Palletization

Trays on pallets

Each layer of trays is called a tier. Each tier may contain up to 6 two-foot trays, 12 one-foot trays, oran equivalent mix.

You set pallet limits in terms of weight and volume and in terms of numbers of linear feet. The soft-ware applies whichever limit is the more restrictive. If you use linear feet as your criteria, you mustform a pallet when there are at least 72 linear feet (six tiers).

Usually, you cannot stack pallets of trays. The top tier may be partial, so you may not have a flat sur-face on which to stack another pallet. Also, stacking tends to crush letter trays, especially under-filled trays.

The software does not specifically assign a tray to a particular tier. It is up to you to stack trays in asafe, stable manner. USPS rules require that you stack the heaviest (fullest) trays on the bottom and

User Guide | 99

lightest trays on top. The software can sort trays by weight, but that isn't the default sequence of out-put. The Mailflow feature offers an option to sort trays by weight.

See Also

Using Mailflow to change sequence within each mailing

NDC Protection

Adjust your pallet limits

AADC and ADC trays on SCF pallets

Turning on the Create ADC Tray on SCF Plt parameter in the STD, Letter Trays on Pallets schemeplaces AADC and ADC letter trays on SCF pallets when the 3-digit ZIP Code on the tray label iswithin the SCF's service area. AADC and ADC letter trays on SCF pallets are eligible for the DNDCdestination price.

NOTE If the No Sorting After parameter is set to SCF, the software still creates and placesAADC trays on SCF pallets.

Creating separate pallets of ADC and MADC trays

You can prepare pallets containing only ADC and/or MADC trays. For example, you can place mixedADC trays on their own ASF, NDC or mixed NDC pallets.

You may want to create separate pallets of AADC and mixed-AADC trays so you can send the mailto a consolidator. Any carrier route, 3-digit, and 5-digit trays would then be drop-shipped or handledby you, the mailer.

To separate trays

Use the STD NDC Plt Tray Sep parameter in the USPS Optional Procedures block to separate trays.This parameter applies only to ASF, NDC, and mixed-NDC pallet levels in all the STD, Letter Trays onPallets scheme blocks in your job. It does not affect carrier route, 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF palletmakeup.

User Guide | 100

The value you enter into the STD NDC Plt Tray Sep parameter tells the software how to separatepallets.

Sacks on pallets

You can set pallet limits both in terms of weight and volume. The software applies whichever limit isthe more restrictive.

You may stack more than one tier of sacks on a pallet; many mailers stack them in a pyramid shape,as long as the pallet plus the height of the sacks does not exceed 77 inches. You'll also need toband or shrinkwrap each pallet.

You may stack one pallet on top of another, but you must apply a top cap to the pallet so that thereis a flat, stable surface on which to place the next pallet.

Most sack mailers do not stack pallets. In fact, some mailers purposefully stack sacks in a pyramidshape for two reasons:

l To discourage the USPS from stacking pallets and crushing the mail pieces.

l So the pallets cannot be stored efficiently. The hope is that the USPS will process these

User Guide | 101

pallets quickly in order to free up floor space for pallets that can be stacked.

See Also

Palletization

Mixed container support for First-ClassCustomer/Supplier Agreements (CSA)

A CSA is a unique agreement between you, the mailer, and the USPS. It is applicable to only First-Class Mail and is based on your mail volume and operational procedures.

Even though Presort does not support CSAs, some of you have been able to approximate the CSAseparations in Presort by setting up a single entry point in your jobfile for each separation.

Each entry point is assigned one of the following separation types:

Separation type Description Preparation notes

L (Local) Mail worked for delivery at the Ori-gin USPS facility.

Trays placed on 5DG, 3DG, SCF, or(A)ADC pallets.

MXDS (MixedSurface)

Containers with handling units(trays, sacks, tubs) for multiple sur-face routes.

Contains 5DG, 3DG, AADC trayson a Mixed (A)ADC pallet.

MXDA (Mixed Air) Containers with trays for multipleair carriers.

-

WKG (Working Mail) Mixed ADC or Mixed AADC mail. Contains MAADC trays, on a work-ing (mixed level) pallet.

Working pallet level support

NOTE The term "working pallet" is a Presort term and is not described in the DMM.

Presort does not directly support CSA preparation. It does, however, allow you to divert Mixed ADCor Mixed AADC trays onto a working pallet level for First-Class mail. The working pallet level ismarked as WKG, and not MADC.

To create working pallets, use the 1C Create CSA Working Pallets parameter in the USPS OptionalProcedures block.

User Guide | 102

The working pallet level is available for the following schemes:

l 1C, Letter Trays on Pallets

l 1C, Flat Trays on Pallets

Working pallet labels must contain the following information (similar to a Mixed ADC Air pallet):

l Line 1: "WKG" followed by city, state, and ZIP Code information for ADC serving 3-digit ZIPCode prefix of entry post office, as shown in L004.

l Line2: "FCM LTRS" or "FCM FLTS", followed by "WKG."

You must manually update the following information:

l The container level, destination line, and content line in the Mail.dat CSM record.

l The destination line and content line in your container output file.

Air freight boxes for Periodical Flat Mailings

This feature requires a license key to use. Contact your BCC Software Sales Representative formore information.

Air freight boxes (AFBs) are used for expedited delivery of time-sensitive materials. You can shipmail by air and then submit by surface entry at USPS induction plants that are closer to the mail des-tination. AFBs are used only for mailing Periodicals flats.

Using AFBs allows for faster delivery time and lower postage paid, but costs more overall due to thecost of shipping by air.

l Delivery time is faster because it is shipped by air part of the way. (Delivery time would belonger if the mail were shipped entirely by ground from an entry point closer to you.)

l Postage is based on the distance from the entry point to the destination. The postage formail submitted at an entry point closer to the destination is lower than it would be if the mailwere submitted at an entry point closer to you (farther from the destination).

l The cost for shipping the mail by air freight to an entry point closer to the destination can behigh and will likely cause the overall cost of shipping the mail by air and ground (cost of

User Guide | 103

shipping to an entry point closer to the destination plus postage from that entry point) to behigher than shipping the mail entirely by ground from an entry point closer to you.

AFBs must be submitted with an 8125 unless you are using eInduction or surface-visible containersto submit the mail.

AFBs are prepared much in the same way as pallets, but with some important differences. For moreinformation, see AFB preparation.

AFBs receive either a sack container charge or pallet container charge based on weight. For moreinformation, see AFB pricing.

AFBs are reported as a container type of "Air Box" in the Mail.dat CSM record.

Sibling AFBs are not supported by Presort.

NOTE Preparing AFBs requires you to copy and paste the Presort Scheme: PER, Packages inAir Freight Boxes block from the Master Job File (master.pst) into your job file.

See Also

Packages

Air freight box preparation

AFBs must be prepared according to DMM 705.8, Preparing Pallets. Packages must be preparedaccording to DMM 705.8.10.2, Periodicals-Bundles, Sacks, or Trays.

AFBs are prepared much like pallets. Some similarities include:

l Two adjacent sides of the AFB must be labeled with a placard just like pallets. You use thesame placards as you do for pallets.

l You can use IM container barcodes to assign and track unique serial numbers.

l You can set the bundle size.

l You can use Mailflow to change the output sequence.

User Guide | 104

There are some differences, however:

l AFBs are smaller than pallets and generally do not weigh more than 200 pounds.

l SCF container protection is not supported.

l Leveling is not allowed. AFBs must be filled before starting the next one so that there are asfew AFBs created as possible. This is done to optimize space in the cargo area. Only MADCand Origin MADC AFBs can be less than full and can contain as few as one bundle. (Thesepartially full AFBs are cut down and stacked to optimize cargo space.)

l Bundles are placed directly into the AFB. There are no containers used inside AFBs; no traysor sacks are used. (However, an AFB is charged either a pallet or sack container chargedepending on the weight, rather than a specific "AFB" rate. For more information, seeAFB Pricing.)

l The minimum weight for an FSS Scheme AFB is based on the weight of the AFB, not 250pounds as it is for pallets. If you have enough mail to fill an AFB destined to a single FSSScheme, an FSS Scheme AFB will be made. If you choose to make FSS Facility AFBs, theyare made in the same way as all other non-mixed levels (when there is enough mail to fill theAFB).

l All required documentation must be placed into the AFB. (An 8125 is also required unlessyou are submitting the AFB using eInduction.)

AFBs are set up in the PER, Packages in Air Freight Boxes scheme block, which has many of thesame parameters as the PER, Packages on Pallets block. Parameters specific to AFB are: 

l Max internal AFB Height

l Max internal AFB Width

l Max internal AFB Depth

l Max AFB Package Wt

l Max AFB Mail Wt

l Max AFB Volume

User Guide | 105

In addition, the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version Defaults or Version Descriptionblocks must be set to FULL , BASIC, FROM_SRVC_TYPE, or left blank.

When an AFB is considered "full"

Presort uses the size and weight information of the AFB and the packages to determine the max-imum number of packages that can fit into the AFB. Presort first calculates the internal volume ofthe AFB based on its internal height, width, and depth. Then, the maximum amount of mail that canfit into the AFB is determined based on the internal volume, maximum package weight (MaxAFB Package Wt) and maximum thickness of a package (Max Package Thickness), the maximumweight of the AFB (Max AFB Mail Wt), and the maximum amount of the internal volume of the boxto fill.

Presort will fill the box to within 95% of the specified maximum weight or calculated maximumvolume, whichever is reached first. For example, if the maximum weight of the AFB is set to 200pounds, Presort will make the AFB when the weight reaches at least 190 pounds (95% of 200pounds). There must be enough mail (at least 95% of the maximum weight or maximum volume) in alevel for the AFB to be made; otherwise the mail will fall to the next level.

In some cases, Presort may make an AFB that is less than 95% of the maximum weight or volume.For example, if the maximum weight is 200 pounds, and there is a total of 101% of a full container'sworth of mail (202 pounds) for a level, and the last package that won't fit weighs more than 5% ofthe maximum weight (for example, 20 pounds, which is 10% of the maximum weight), that last pack-age won't be placed into the AFB. Instead, a 182-pound AFB would be made and the last 20 poundpackage would fall to the next level. Smaller packages will lessen the likelihood of this scenario hap-pening.

What is considered a "full" AFB can also vary per mailing due to size limitations imposed by entrypoints, destinations, and airlines. Be sure to take these limits into account when setting up yourscheme block and when manually mapping schemes to entry points. When selecting a carrier air-line, you will need to work with them to determine their weight and volume limits to ensure yourAFBs do not exceed the limits.

The maximum AFB internal volume in cubic inches and maximum number of pieces (not packages)that will fit into the AFB are reported on the Presort Job Summary report. The maximum number ofpieces reported is not the actual count of the number of pieces that will be placed into the AFB; it isonly a calculation of how many pieces could potentially fit. The actual count can vary, especially ifyou have multiple versions. The maximum number of pieces is calculated based on the smallest ver-sion in the mailing.

Air freight box sortation

AFB sortation rules are somewhat different from rules for pallets:

User Guide | 106

l At each sort level within the mailing, there must be enough mail to fill at least one AFB(determined by maximum weight or maximum volume, whichever is reached first). Otherwisethe mail will drop to the next sortation level.

l Each AFB must be filled before the next AFB can be created. Only the last AFB in a mailingmay be less than full, and that mail will sort to the MADC or Origin MADC level. If there is notenough mail in the job to fill one AFB, a partially full AFB will be made and will sort to theMADC or Origin MADC level.

l Any "overflow" mail from a level (mail remaining after the last AFB reaches the maximum boxweight, but not enough to fill another AFB) to that destination will fall to the next level. Ifthere is not enough mail at that level to fill an AFB, the mail will continue sorting to lowerlevels until a full AFB can be made. If there is not enough mail in all of the remaining lowerlevels combined, a partial AFB will be made, which will sort to the MADC or Origin MADClevel. There are no "overflow AFBs" created.

l Each AFB will be sorted to the finest extent, whether it is reported as a sack (weighing 70pounds or less) or a pallet (weighing more than 70 pounds).

AFBs must be prepared in the sort level sequence listed in DMM 705.8.10.2, Periodicals-Bundles,Sacks, or Trays.

For details about what "full" AFBs are, see the "When an AFB is considered 'full'" section inAFB Preparation.

Air freight box pricing

AFBs are charged either a pallet or sack container charge, depending on the weight, and per entrylevel. There is no specific "AFB" container charge.

l AFBsmore than 70 pounds receive pallet container charges.

l AFBs less than or equal to 70 pounds receive sack container charges.

AFBs are listed as pallets or sacks on the postage statement based on their weight and in the Con-tainer Charge Summary of the Qualification Report. They are reported as a container type of "AirBox" in the CSM record.

Bundle charges are applied to packages inside AFBs just as they are with packages on pallets.These charges are all reflected on PS-3541 and in the Container Charge Summary on the Qual-ification Report.

User Guide | 107

"Fletters"

Between the USPS height and width limits on regular letters, and the limits on automated flats, thereis an area of overlap. They are often called digest-size pieces, because they are about the samepage size as a Reader's Digest or TV Guide. You won't find a specific term for these pieces in theUSPS Domestic Mail Manual, but we call them "fletters."

A fletter is a mail piece whose dimensions qualify it as an automated flat or a regular letter. Theheight of the piece is between 6 and 6.125 inches, and the width is not more than 11.5 inches.

When you presort fletters, you can save on postage by processing the pieces with a 9-digit ZIP Codeas automated flats and the remaining pieces as regular letters. (The automated flats get a better post-age rate.) Or — for Periodicals and Standard Mail only — you can choose to process all pieces as flatsto save on production costs.

If you choose to process the entire mailing as flats, the non-automation pieces are charged flatsrates, resulting in higher postage rates but reducing production time and labor costs. You decidewhere you can benefit the most.

When you presort Standard Mail or Periodicals fletters, you're given the choice to prepare the non-automation pieces as letters or flats.

Combination of rates on pallets

The Packages on Pallets and Sacks on Pallets schemes can, if you want, place three package rateson the same pallet: carrier-route, automation, and regular. (The scheme contains on/off controls foreach rate.) So it can be an extremely efficient way to prepare your mail.

Process Standard Mail fletters jobs as flats

You can speed up your mail preparation time when you prepare fletters on pallets.

When you prepare fletters on pallets, you can speed up your processing time because the USPS hasrecently eliminated the ten-percent rule. Now you can sort all of the pieces in a Standard Mail flet-ters on pallets job as flats, and you can put the non-palletized non-automated flats portion in sacksinstead of in trays.

Because the USPS removed the ten-percent rule and now allows you to process non-automatedpieces as flats in sacks, we can offer you two options for setting up your Standard Mail automatedflats on pallets jobs.

l Set up your job as a fletters job (current fletters jobs are still valid).

l Set up your job using all flats schemes.

User Guide | 108

Set up your job as fletters

When you set up your job as a traditional fletters job, the software prepares all non-automatedpieces as regular letters mailing at the regular letter rate. The regular letter rate is cheaper than theflats and non-letter rates.

To set up your job as a traditional fletters job

1. Use the software's template for fletters named a_ftrplt.pst.

2. Set your processing category in the Version Description block to Automated Flat.

Set up your job using all flats schemes

When you set up your job as all flats you can save time and labor costs. You can bypass all of thespecial letter preparations that you have in a traditional fletters scheme, and put all of your pieceson pallets (or in sacks). Postage is higher, however, because all pieces mail at the non-letter flatsrate.

Here is a sample scheme sequence for an all flats setup:

1. STD, Packages on Pallets (auto, cart, reg turned on)

2. STD, Flats (auto, cart, reg turned on)

To set up your fletters job using all flats schemes

Type Yes (turn on) the following option in the two scheme blocks:

l Prepare CART Rate Packages

l Prepare Automation Rate Packages

l Prepare Regular Rate Packages

NOTE If you don't have carrier route addresses in your job, you don't need to choosethe Carrier Route option.

When you set up your job correctly, you will see a message. Click Yes to continue.

If you set up your job with just the STD, Flats scheme, you must also select the Co-pkg Auto & Regoption. Refer to the Presort Job-File Reference or Views online help for details on setting up co-packaging.

User Guide | 109

Process Periodicals fletter-sized mail as flats

The software now allows you to prepare your Periodical fletter-sized mailings entirely as flats. This isan optional feature that you may want to use to reduce production costs.

For more information, see DMM 207.25.1.7.

To prepare your Periodical fletter-sized mailings as flats, set either the Prepare Regular Rate Pack-ages parameter or the Prepare CART Rate Packages parameter to Yes in the following schemes:

l PER, Flats

l PER, Sacks on Pallets

l PER, Packages on Pallets

CAUTION The USPS requires that you co-bundle fletters when they are not palletized.Youmust enter Yes into the Co-Package Auto and Reg Pieces parameter in the PER, Flats scheme.The software does not warn you if you do not have this set up correctly.

Reaching beyond USPS regulations: Optional Procedures

The software normally does everything according to USPS regulations, as described in the USPSDomestic Mail Manual (DMM).

However, many larger mailers are able to negotiate with the USPS for authorization to follow specialprocedures. When handling large volumes, it makes sense for the USPS and mailers to agree onexceptions or variations that may help them both.

To support exceptional mailings, the software offers the Optional Procedures feature. In theOptional Procedures block, you can adjust many parameters that are crucial to container and palletformation and other aspects of job handling. For details, refer to the online help or Presort Job-FileReference manual.

CAUTION The Optional Procedures section is provided for the convenience and efficiency ofmailers who have a special agreement with the USPS. It is not provided as a general-purposetool for unauthorized tweaking with USPS rules.

Customizing package and container limits takes the mailing outside of DMM compliance. If youinclude the Optional Procedures section in your job file, you do so at your own responsibility and atyour own risk.

User Guide | 110

We will not accept any responsibility or liability for any use or misuse of the Optional Procedures sec-tion in any fashion or for any purpose.

To use Optional Procedures, you must complete the Optional Procedures block. You also mustenable the Optional Procedures parameter in the Execution block.

Optional procedures example

Suppose you are mailing postcards that are 5.25 inches wide. You might choose to arrange them intrays in two rows. This would reduce the number of trays you have to handle.

However, the software will not automatically figure out that this is possible. It will assume that eachtray can hold only one row.

To get the software to double the number of cards per tray, you could use Optional Procedures.Reset the length of a two-foot tray from the normal 21 inches up to 42 inches, and the length of aone-foot tray from 10.25 to 20.5 inches.

NOTE One side effect of this procedure is that some trays might be documented as under-filled, even though they contain enough mail to meet the USPS definition of a full tray.

Leveling

Within the package and container limits that you set, the software automatically shifts mail pieces tooptimize containers and postage rates. For example, suppose we have enough mail to form threefull trays, with some pieces left over. Without leveling, we would have to prepare an overflow trayand band packages.

With leveling, we add a fourth tray, and transfer some mail from the other three, so that each traycontains about the same amount. According to USPS rules, each tray still is considered full.

The same thing can happen with sacks.

User Guide | 111

In sack mailings, leveling may also save you postage (depending on the class of mail and scheme).There is no such thing as an "overflow sack," so without leveling, leftover pieces would fall to alower sort level. By leveling, the software may keep more mail at higher sort levels, thereby redu-cing postage.

The software levels packages and all types of containers all the time. You don't have to turn it onand you can't turn it off (you wouldn't want to).

Package and container limits for leveling

The package and container limits you set determine how much maneuvering room the software hasfor leveling. The software requires that there be at least a 10 percent difference between your min-imum and maximum settings.

To make sure that your packages are split so that all containers meet the minimum pounds setting,the software splits large packages so the heaviest package is created first and listed first in the MailSort Listing.

The software levels packages and all types of containers to optimize space and postage rates. It isan automatic feature in the software.

User Guide | 112

Multiple versions, editions, or rate categoriesIf all of your pieces are exactly the same, you do not have to worry about using multiple versions,editions, or rate categories.

You'll want to use multiple versions, editions, or rate categories if you mail two or more versions oreditions in the same job. This includes:

l Multiple editions of a newspaper, newsletter, or magazine

l Demographic versions of a catalog

l Mailings prepared under the Manifest Mailing System, paid by permit

l First-Class mixed-weight mailings paid by postage meter

CAUTION If you're just getting started with the software, we urge you to run simpler jobsbefore tackling multiple versions. You should have already run jobs that involved identical mailpieces (in other words, single-version jobs). You should already know how to fill out a VersionDescription.

If you came here looking for a way to generate more than one mail piece per database record, youcame to the wrong place. Instead, see information on how to use the copies field.

Multiple versions or editions

When your job involves multiple versions or editions, you have these setup tasks:

1. Set up the dimensions. You have to give the software the physical dimensions and otherinformation about your mail piece—in the Version Description.

2. Create a link. You need some way to create a link between each input database record and aVersion Description—in other words, some way to identify which version each person shouldreceive. For most mailers, this means that each database record must contain some sort of a"version code" field.

3. Name the version or edition. Each version or edition needs some kind of name. Meaningfulversion names help make your job and your reports easier to understand. Depending on thesetup method you choose (see below), you might get to assign names to your versions, orthe software might assign names for you automatically.

User Guide | 113

CAUTION When you set up multiple versions, the software assumes that versions can bemingled within packages and containers. If you can't mix versions (for example, if you do nothave selective equipment for mingling or you don't have USPS permission to mingle versions)you should look into these other features such as bindery sets, segmenting, and print togetherby bindery or version.

See Also

Use bindery sets to prevent mingling

Print pieces together by version

Custom assembly

Some mail pieces are an assembly of smaller parts. For example:

Type Description

Inserter Selective inserting machines often can handle account statements that vary inpage count. And they can drop in comailing or advertising pieces. Usually this iscontrolled through special marks printed on the statement.

Bindery Selective binderies can put a magazine or catalog together from a variety of sig-natures. And they can add special advertising sections, incidental First-Class, andother inserted, extra components.

The software deals only with the whole mail pieces. It does not keep track of, or add up, all the indi-vidual components that go into a mail piece.

You may need additional software to pre-process your database before presenting it to the software.Your pre-processing software will have to figure out all the permutations of your mail piece—all thepossible combinations of components—and the size and weight of each permutation.

Ways to set up multiple versions or editions

The software offers three ways to set up multiple versions or editions. On the next few pages, we'lllook at each of these methods more closely.

l Separately describing each version, allowing the possibility that versions will differ in somedimension(s)—usually thickness and weight or advertising percentage. In Periodicals class,this method is also used to set up separate mailing documentation for each edition.

User Guide | 114

l All versions are the same size, weight, and, in Periodicals, advertising percentage.

l Based on dimension data or, in Periodicals, advertising percentage stored in each record.

See Also

Separately describe each version

Automatic, physically identical versions

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions

Create links between input records and a Version Description

You need some way to create a link between each input record and a Version Description. Thismeans that each record must contain some sort of a "version code" field.

To create a link between each input record and a Version Description

You can take either of two approaches:

l Assign some sort of name or code to each permutation. Then store this name or code ineach database record. In your job, you'll need to separately describe each version.

l Store the dimension data itself—perhaps the piece thickness and weight, at least—in eachrecord. In job, you'll need to set up auto versions based on each record's dimension.

See Also

Separately describe each version

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions

Separately describe each version

This method enables you to handle versions that differ in size, weight, or other details. Your jobsetup includes a separate, complete description for each version.

Many magazine and catalog publishers create versions or editions tailored by demographic data, cus-tomer profile, geographic area, or other variables. In each customer's database record, there is somesort of field that is used to select which version they receive.

User Guide | 115

Often these versions are built on a computer-controlled bindery. Based on the version field, the com-puter may either select pages or add them. Because the mix of pages varies among versions, it ispossible that versions may vary in thickness, weight, and, in Periodicals Class, advertising per-centage. Those variations affect postage and the way that pieces are formed into packages and con-tainers.

To describe different versions

1. Set up a job that contains Version Defaults window and Version Description windows.

2. Use a "version code" field to indicate which version is to be mailed to each customer.

3. Create a link between PW.Version_ID and your database field.

See Also

Automatic, physically identical versions

Use Version Defaults and Version Description blocks

Your job contains a Version Defaults and Version Description block. In the job file, repeat the Ver-sion Description block as many times as necessary.

In Version Defaults, you can enter, once, whatever information is the same for all versions. Then inVersion Description, enter the information that is different for each version. For details, refer to thePresort Job-File Reference manual or online help.

To set up Version blocks

1. In the Designer window of Views, expand the Version Setup group.

2. Double-click the Version Defaults block and enter any settings that are common to all ver-sions. If you select the Auto Dimension or Auto option, you do not need to set up any Ver-sion Description blocks.

3. Return to the Designer window. For each version of the mail piece, set up a Version Descrip-tion block.

NOTE Views users: When you create a new job using the Designer or the Wizard, the defaultvalues saved in Views is transferred to the Version Defaults block, not the Version Descriptionblock. This allows the software to distribute the default values to any Version blocks you add tothe job.

User Guide | 116

Use a "version code" field

In your input database(s), you will need some sort of "version code" field, indicating which version isto be mailed to each customer. For example, if your magazine comes in regional editions, your sub-scriber database might include an "Edition" field. The software does not require any particular valuesin this field. Your field might contain a one-digit code, fully spelled words, numbers, or whatever youlike.

When you present your database for input to the software, the "Edition" field must be mapped(linked) to the input field PW.Version_ID.

Link each description to a field value

Let's say that you've got each version described, and the PW.Version_ID field set up. Where's thelink between them? The link is that each Version Description includes one value for PW.Version_ID.As the software evaluates each input record, it checks the PW.Version_ID value. Then the softwaretries to match this value to one of the Version Descriptions.

It's possible that the software won't find a match. For example, the software might find a record inwhich the PW.Version_ID field is empty, or contains a false value; that is, a value not among thoseyou have defined in the job. We call this an undetermined record.

There are three options for handling undetermined records:

l Have the software exclude them (drop them from all further processing).

l Designate one of your versions as the default, and have the software reassign the undeter-mined records to the default version.

l Have the software stop the whole job at the first undetermined record found.

Set up your DEF file(s)

Version_ID is a PW field. In the DEF file, you create the link between PW.Version_ID and your data-base field. For example, your DEF entry might be: PW.Version_ID = DB.Edition

If you're not sure what PW fields and DEF files are, refer to the Database Prep manual.

Automatic, physically identical versions

This method entails a minimum of setup work. However, it works only if all versions are the samephysical size (and, in Periodicals Class, all editions have the same advertising percentage). If yourversions differ in size, skip this section and look into the other methods (see related topics below).

User Guide | 117

When setting up your job, you create just one physical description (height, length, thickness, andweight). The software automatically applies these dimensions to all versions.

In Periodicals Class, you have to submit separate documentation for each edition. The software doesthis for you automatically. If your editions vary in editorial content or ad mix—but are the same pagecount and ad percentage—then this method might work for you.

To set up automatic physically identical versions

1. Set up a job that contains a Version Defaults block. There, you enter size, weight, and otherinformation about your pieces. For details about the parameters in the Version Defaultsblock, refer to the Presort Job-File Reference manual or to the online help.

2. Link each description to a field value.

See Also

Separately describe each version

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions

Link each description to a field value

Let's say that you've got each version described, and the PW.Version_ID field set up. Where's thelink between them? The link is that each Version Description includes one value for PW.Version_ID.As the software evaluates each input record, it checks the PW.Version_ID value. Then the softwaretries to match this value to one of the Version Descriptions.

It's possible that the software won't find a match. For example, the software might find a record inwhich the PW.Version_ID field is empty, or contains a false value; that is, a value not among thoseyou have defined in the job. We call this an undetermined record.

There are three options for handling undetermined records:

l Have the software exclude them (drop them from all further processing).

l Designate one of your versions as the default, and have the software reassign the undeter-mined records to the default version.

l Have the software stop the whole job at the first undetermined record found.

User Guide | 118

Set up your DEF file(s)

Version_ID is a PW field. In the DEF file, you create the link between PW.Version_ID and your data-base field. For example, your DEF entry might be: PW.Version_ID = DB.Edition

If you're not sure what PW fields and DEF files are, refer to the Database Prep manual.

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions

Auto dimensioning lets you set up jobs that have pieces with varying dimensions (height, length,thickness, or weight) or the jobs that vary by advertising percentage.

NOTE Auto-dimensioning is not supported for Priority Mail.

The software can automatically create a new version whenever it detects a change in the dimensionof a piece or, in Periodicals, a change in the advertising percentage or rate category.

Before setting up a job using the auto dimension feature, remember the following points:

l If you define a particular dimension or advertising percentage in both the input file and inthe Version Defaults block, the software uses the value that it finds in the input file.

l If any dimension field in any record is empty, the software issues an error message unless itfinds a default dimension in the Version Defaults block. If you are using Auto Dimensionbased on advertising percentage, the same results occur if the ad percentage field in anyrecord is empty.

l Each version must meet the requirements for the processing category that you set in the Ver-sion Defaults block. The software issues an error message if it does not.

l If there is a problem with your input dimension fields or the advertising percentage field (forexample, if the dimensions don't match the processing category), the software notifies youof the error during processing, not during the normal verification stage. That's because thesoftware reads those fields when it reads the input file(s), which occurs during processing.

See Also

Set up your job for Auto Dimension

Automatic version by advertising percentage

User Guide | 119

Automatic version by dimension for a First-Class mailing

Version ID field is optional for Auto Dimension

Set up your job for Auto Dimension

To automatically create versions based on the physical dimensions of the mail piece, do the fol-lowing:

1. Set up a job that contains one or more Version Defaults blocks, but no Version Descriptionblocks.

2. In Version Defaults block, enter the information about your pieces, except size and weight.

3. Select the Auto Dimensions option for the Action parameter. See the Presort Job-File Refer-ence manual for more details.

4. Set up your DEF file(s) for Auto Dimension. In a typical situation, height and length are con-stant, so you would enter those dimensions in the job file. In that case your DEF entriesmight include only two or three fields:

PW.Thickness = DB.ThicknessPW.Wt_Oz = DB.Weight

If your pieces vary in all four dimensions, your DEF entries might be as follows:

PW.Height = DB.HeightPW.Length = DB.LengthPW.Thickness = DB.ThicknessPW.Wt_Oz = DB.Weight*

*or PW.Wt_Lbs = DB.Weight

Version ID field is optional for Auto Dimension

If you wish, you can also set up the field PW.Version_ID as another way of identifying versions.Then the software identifies a new version each time it finds a new combination of values inPW.Version_ID as well as in the dimension fields.

User Guide | 120

Actually, you might use PW.Version_ID to identify clients, not piece versions. Then you would beable to generate summary reports by version, and support chargeback. For example, your DEF entrymight be:

PW.Version_ID = DB.Client or PW.Version_ID = "client name"

If you're not sure what PW fields and DEF files are, read the Database Prep manual.

Automatic version by advertising percentage

Suppose you're printing different regional versions of a magazine. Many of the advertisers areregional as well, so each version contains a different percentage of advertising.

To create versions in the job based on advertising percentage using the auto dimension feature

1. Begin by adding an advertising percentage field to the records in your input database. Thefield should reflect the percentage of advertising in the issue destined to each recipient.

2. In the DEF file, set up PW.Ad_Pct. For example, your DEF entry might look like this:

PW.Ad_Pct = DB.Ads

When the value in the field changes, it signals the software to create a new version.

Automatic version by dimension for a First-Class mailing

Imagine a First-Class piece, perhaps an account statement, being assembled on a computerizedinserter. The number of pages per account varies. Perhaps some customers have more than oneaccount, so they get more than one statement in the envelope. As many as two dozen advertisingpieces can "piggyback" on the statement. These inserts are chosen for each customer based on pro-file information in each database record.

With pages and inserts varying, the number of possible combinations may be high. The software byitself does not support figuring out all these combinations. You would need some other program toprocess the database before presorting. That other program would:

l Evaluate each record to estimate statement pages and add up the inserts.

l Calculate the size and weight of the whole mail piece.

l Append that size and weight information to the record.

In your input database(s), you would need one or more fields containing mail-piece dimensions.

User Guide | 121

If all your pieces are the same height and length, then you would need only two database fields forthickness and weight. You could have up to four fields:

l Height, in inches.

l Length, in inches.

l Thickness, in inches.

l Weight, in either pounds or ounces.

If any dimension field is blank, or not set up, the software looks for a default value in the VersionDefaults window of the job. So a blank field is not necessarily a problem. If you define a particulardimension in both the input file and in Version Defaults, the software uses the value it finds in theinput file.

As the software takes in each record, it evaluates the fields Thickness, Weight, and so on. Each timethat the software detects a new combination of dimensions—a new permutation, if you will—it setsup a new version internally.

The software evaluates the Weight field differently in First-Class jobs. It creates versions based onwhole-ounce increments, because that's the way First-Class postage is calculated. So for example,the 2-ounce group might include pieces that weigh 1.01 to 2.00 ounces.

Repositionable Notes (RPNs)

Mailers can design Repositionable Notes and affix them to the outside of the mail piece like a stickynote. These notes call attention to a product or service, a telephone number, a web site, or otherinformation. You must use a machine to apply and affix Repositionable Notes firmly to the mailpiece.

When a version has an RPN attached, you must do the following:

1. In the Version Defaults or Version Description blocks, add a value to the RPN Weight para-meter.

2. For the sample weight, include the weight of the RPN.

User Guide | 122

Rules and procedures for RPNs

Here is a brief overview of some rules and procedures you need to follow when using RPNs. For afull list, see DMM 202.7.

l RPNs are considered an attachment to a version (similar to a First-Class incidental piece on aPeriodicals version).

l The version dimensions in each block should include the RPN attached.

l RPNs may be attached to letters (cards included) or flat-size versions for most First-Class(except for the First-Class Package Service commercial plus category, which is coveredunder the 1C Parcel processing category), Standard, and Periodicals jobs.

l No more than one RPN can be attached to a version.

l RPNs are included as an integral part of the mail piece for weight purposes. Due to therequirements of Mail.dat for representing RPNs, you must set the weight of the RPN weightin the job-file.

Bindery sets: Mingling selected versions

Some printers build editions on a combination of selective and non-selective binderies. They canmingle some versions, but not others. In Periodicals or Standard Mail Packages on Pallets schemes,these printers can use a feature called Bindery Sets to control which versions are mingled orwhether versions are mingled at all (remember that you need USPS permission to mingle versions).

For example, suppose you're printing a magazine with 10 editions. You have three bindery lines; twoselective and the other non-selective. You plan to build versions as shown in the following table.

Bindery A (selective) Bindery B (selective) Bindery C (non-selective)

Versions 1-6 Versions 7-9 Version 10

The software mingles pieces within packages that you have assigned to the same bindery. So,pieces from versions 1 to 6 could be packaged together.

The software copalletizes all binderies; that is, packages from two or more binderies will be placedon the same pallet. So packages from all 10 versions might be palletized together. If there are piecesleft over after palletization that must be mailed in sacks, the USPS requires that the software pre-pare a separate sack mailing for each bindery.

User Guide | 123

To set up bindery sets

1. Assign a name to each bindery.

2. At each Version Description, tell the software on which bindery you plan to print that ver-sion.

3. In the Packages on Pallets Scheme(s), indicate that you want to Separate Packages byBindery. If you plan to process each version on its own bindery, you can leave the BinderyName blank and the software will keep each version separate

When you run the job:

l Bindery names must match exactly. Capitalization, punctuation, and spacing do matter.

l If you don't want a particular version to be mingled, assign a unique bindery name to that ver-sion at the Version Description window. If you turn on bindery sets, but leave the BinderyName blank, the software will not mingle that version with any other. Do not give the samename to a version and a bindery. If you do that, you will get a verifier error.

Important information to consider with bindery sets

Remember these points as you set up bindery sets:

l The mail stream is hierarchical. Bindery sets have the same place in that hierarchy that ver-sions do; in other words, they're on the bottom.

l If you use Split Output in addition to Bindery Sets, you will get one address file per bindery.In our example, the software would separate output into three files (A, B, and C), not ten.

l If you used Segmenting or separate job runs to accomplish bindery organization, you maywant to consider switching to Bindery Sets if you have adequate floor space in your mail-room. Your mailings will likely be more dense and sort to higher levels because bindery lineswill be copalletized. However, because each pallet will contain packages from each binderyline, it is important to note that you will need a lot of space to accommodate pallets as theywait for each bindery line to form packages. If you don't want to copalletize binderies, thensegment by bindery.

l In output files, you may include bindery information by posting AP.Bind_Name andAP.Bind_No.

User Guide | 124

l You may not use bindery sets if you are defining versions by the Auto Version or AutoDimension method.

l In the Version Defaults window, there is an option listed under Additional PeriodicalOptions and called Allow Multi-Version Firm Packages. If you turn on that option and useBindery Sets, the software will mingle versions in firm packages. However, it will mingle onlywithin each bindery.

See Also

Automatic, physically identical versions

Auto versions based on each record's dimensions

Non-selective binderies: How to prevent mingling

If you own only non-selective binderies, the software offers several options to prevent versions frommingling:

l Bindery sets

l Print together by version

l Split output

These options organize your output by version. However, your pieces will not come out in theirproper mailstream sequence. After printing, you will need some mechanical or manual system formerging versions back into correct mailstream sequence.

We'll present an example of each method to show you how they affect your output files. Comparethose examples with the following normal manner of output:

Entry points: Phoenix ASF and Denver NDCSchemes: CART and Auto/RegFlatsVersions: English Edition and Spanish Edition

Normal output sequence, with versions mingledPhoenix ASF, Flats (CART)Phoenix ASF, Flats (Auto/Reg)

User Guide | 125

Denver NDC, Flats (CART)Denver NDC, Flats (Auto/Reg)

The examples are based on a job that involves two versions, two entry points, and two presortschemes.

Use bindery sets to prevent mingling

The first feature, bindery sets, is actually designed to help printers who own a combination of select-ive and non-selective binderies. If you plan to process a single version on each of several binderies,however, you also could use bindery sets to prevent mingling of versions.

To prevent mingling, assign a unique bindery name to each version or leave the bindery nameblank. Example output data is as follows:

Output file #1 for English EditionPhoenix ASF, Flats (CART)Phoenix ASF, Flats (Auto/Reg)Denver NDC, Flats (CART)Denver NDC, Flats (Auto/Reg)default entry point, Qualified Nonpresort

Output file #2 for Spanish EditionPhoenix ASF, Flats (CART)Phoenix ASF, Flats (Auto/Reg)Denver NDC, Flats (CART)Denver NDC, Flats (Auto/Reg)default entry point, Qualified Nonpresort

See Also

Bindery sets: Mingling selected versions

Split output by version

When you create output files, you have the option of dividing output records by version. This fea-ture is called split output or create files per bindery or version.

If you do not a use the bindery sets feature, your output will be separated by version (if you use bind-ery sets, you will get one address output file per bindery, but versions will be mingled).

Split output keeps all records for each version together. However, it breaks entry points and presortschemes apart. So you will need some way of merging these outputs later.

User Guide | 126

Print pieces together by version

Print together by bindery or version is an option within the Mailflow feature. You can use it to organ-ize your mailstream by version.

Print together changes your mailstream drastically. It makes version the primary output sort key, thedominant factor in determining output sequence. All other factors, including entry points, segments,and presort schemes, are subordinate to version. However, print together does not cause each ver-sion to become a separate mailing. (if you can mingle versions, you can use print together and bind-ery sets. The software prints pieces together by bindery).

Normal output sequence, versions mingled:

1. Entry points2. Segments3. Presort schemes

Using Print Together by Version_ID:

Piece #11. Entry points2. Segments3. Presort schemesPiece #21. Entry points2. Segments3. Presort schemes

The software outputs versions according to the sequence of Version Descriptions in your job. Thefollowing shows output sequence when print together is used. Notice that the software keeps ver-sions together, at the expense of entry points and schemes.

Using Print Together by Version_ID:

English Edition, Phoenix ASF, Flats (CART)English Edition, Phoenix ASF, Flats (Auto/Reg)English Edition, Denver NDC, Flats (CART)English Edition, Denver NDC, Flats (Auto/Reg)English Edition, default entry point, Qualified NonpresortSpanish Edition, Phoenix ASF, Flats (CART)Spanish Edition, Phoenix ASF, Flats (Auto/Reg)

User Guide | 127

Spanish Edition, Denver NDC, Flats (CART)Spanish Edition, Denver NDC, Flats (Auto/Reg)Spanish Edition, default entry point, Qualified Nonpresort

Segmenting is not shown in this example.

Ride-along enclosures

The USPS allows mailers to include Standard Mail ride-along enclosures with Periodicals mailingsand offers a special discount rate on the enclosure piece.

There are hundreds of ways that mailers have used this USPS rule to enclose additional informationor promotional material with Periodicals mailings. For example:

l A golf magazine publisher rewards new subscribers by enclosing a golf glove with the firstissue.

l An electronics retailer encloses a mini-catalog with an electronics magazine.

l With a nationally distributed magazine, an internet provider encloses a free CD offering lim-ited usage.

The USPS grants a special rate per piece for Standard Mail enclosures with Periodicals.

Eligibility for ride-along enclosures

To be eligible for the special rate, the enclosures must qualify as a Standard Mail piece and mustnot:

l Exceed 3.30 ounces or the weight of the host piece

l Affect the overall uniform thickness of the host piece

l Obscure the title of the publication or the address label, if the enclosure rides outside of thehost piece.

In addition, the host piece must bear an endorsement line that reads "Ride-Along Enclosed." Thesoftware does not provide for printing this endorsement.

User Guide | 128

Ride-along enclosure dimensions can exceed host piece

RAEs height and width can exceed the host piece as long as the host piece and RAE are completelyenclosed in a wrapper such as a polybag or envelope. The software doesn't display an error whenyour RAE thickness exceeds that of the host piece.

Remember that the size of your enclosure cannot change the processing category of the host piece.For example, you can't include a flat piece with a letter because the software will process the pieceas a letter, and the enclosure makes it a flat.

Auto dimension and ride-along enclosures

You can set up your Periodicals job using the auto dimension feature when your job includes ride-along enclosures.

To do this:

1. Select Auto Dimension in the Version Defaults window.

2. In the definition file, use the PW.RAE_ID field to associate a version code or ride-along codewith the ride-along ID.

Sample definition file entries:

PW.RAE_ID = DB.RAE_Code

PW.Version_ID = DB.Edition+DB.RAE_Code

With this definition file setup, the ride-along ID is a part of the version name.

These settings make the software automatically create a new version for each different ride-alonggoing with the Periodicals piece. The software uses information from the Version Defaults block forthe version specifics and assigns the value in the Version_ID as the name of the version.

See the Quick Reference for Views and Job-File Products guide for information about the PW.RAE_ID and PW.Version_ID input fields.

CAUTION You should only use the PW.RAE_ID field when you turn on auto dimension. It isnot needed for Auto-Version jobs.

Multi-version ride-along enclosures

You can include multiple versions of a ride-along enclosure in one mailing. We consider multiple ver-sions to be either:

User Guide | 129

l The same ride-along enclosure mailing with two or more editions of a Periodicals piece. Forexample, suppose you are preparing two editions of your Periodicals and you plan on placingthe same ride-along enclosure in each. To set up, you would enter the ride-along enclosureID in each of the two version description blocks.

l Two or more different ride-along enclosures mailing with one or more editions of a Peri-odicals piece. Here's an example:

Edition Ride-along enclosure

West region Enclosure A

East region Enclosure B

East region No enclosure

North region Enclosure A

South region Enclosure A

Total versions 5

Notice that the East region edition is split into two versions; some mailing with Enclosure Aand some mailing without any enclosure. Even though it is the same edition, it counts as twoversions.

Mailing with or without ride-along enclosure

You may want to send a Periodicals mailing that includes pieces with and without a ride-alongenclosure.

For example, a pharmaceutical company wants to promote the benefits of one of its products bysending a letter to doctors. The company plans to add the letter as an enclosure to a medical journalin the hope that the letter will receive more attention from the doctors than it would if sent sep-arately.

Only those doctors who have already received training on the pharmaceutical product shouldreceive the letter, so the letter will be enclosed with some of the medical journals and not others.

To set up this type of job you separately describe each version:

User Guide | 130

l one version that includes an enclosure

l one that does not include an enclosure

Set up a multi-version ride-along job

To set up a job that includes multi-versions of a ride-along enclosure you must define all of the dif-ferent ride-along scenarios.

To set up a multi-version ride-along job

For example, let's assume we are creating a job for a pharmaceutical company. Set up the job bydoing the following:

1. Set up a Ride-Along ID field in the database. Set the field to Y if the letter should beenclosed or an N if it should not.

2. Complete the PER Ride-Along Enclosure Description window in the job. For example, enterPhysician letter in the Ride-Along Name field, Y in the Ride-Along ID field, and soon.

3. Complete two Version Description windows in the job. Type N for one Version_ID FieldValue in the first Version Description window, and Y for the second Version_ID Field Valuein the second Version Description window.

4. Complete the Version Description window only for the version that mails with the ride-alongenclosure. Enter a Y for the Version_ID Field Value.

5. Click Periodicals and set the Ride-Along Enclosure ID to Y.

Reporting ride-alongs

A separate USPS Postage Statement 3541 must accompany each version of a ride-along whenpresented to the USPS for mailing.

Each statement contains the ride-along information that you entered in the Version Descriptionblock and the Ride-Along Enclosure Description blocks.

User Guide | 131

How versions affect reports and output files

Versions can affect reports and output files in several ways.

Separate mailings and reports

In Periodicals, each edition must be documented as a separate mailing. (Even though editions mightbe physically mingled, you still need separate documentation for each edition.) So in Periodicalsjobs, the software automatically prepares reports for each version.

NOTE The software automatically prepares a USPS Postage Statement for each version only ifyou choose one of the following Report Information options: Job Summary, Entry Point Sum-mary, Segment Summary, or Entry Point and Segment Summary.

Output files

If you can't mix versions—if you do not have selective equipment for mingling—then you will needto use some additional features when you prepare output files. These features are explained on thenext few pages.

IMPORTANT When you set up multiple versions, the software assumes that versions can bemingled within packages and containers.

Output fields

You might like to include a field in your output file to identify the version. Mailing crews and accept-ance clerks might appreciate this. You have three options:

Field Contents

Version_ID The version code, passed through from your input file

Ver_No A version number assigned by the software (1 to 32,500). If you used the Manualmethod, the software will number versions in the order that your Version Descrip-tions appeared in the job file. If you used either of the Automatic methods, thesoftware will number versions in the order that it found values in your Version_IDfield.

Ver_Name A descriptive name up to 31 characters long. If you used the Manual method, thisfield will contain the version names you entered in the job file. If you used eitherof the Automatic methods, the software will use each Version_ID value as theversion name. If one of the Version_ID values is blank or null, the software willname the version "blank".

User Guide | 132

Multiple rate categories

Combining mail pieces with different rate categories into one mailing can save you money. You cancombine rate categories within the Periodicals and Standard Mail classes.

Periodicals

For the Periodicals class, the software allows regular, non-profit, classroom, and Science of Agri-culture in the same job. By combining mail pieces with different rate categories into the same pack-ages, sacks/trays, and pallets, you have a better chance for pallet and destination discounts.

Use the following parameters, which are located in the Version Default and Version Descriptionblocks, for Periodicals multiple rate categories:

l PER Subscriber Option

l CAPS Customer Reference ID

See the Presort Job-File Reference for parameter descriptions.

Standard Mail

For the Standard Mail class, the software allows regular and nonprofit in the same job. By combiningmail pieces you can increase saturation levels and reduce transportation costs and postage (forexample, better chance to create pallets, receive greater destinations discounts, and drive mail to afiner sortation).

NOTE You must obtain special permission from the USPS in order to combine regular and non-profit in one mailing job. According to the DMM, regular mailings can not be in the same jobwith nonprofit mailings unless permitted by USPS standards.

You can combine regular and nonprofit for all processing categories.

Mailing minimums

The software checks the mailing minimum (200 pieces/50 pounds) separately for each category (reg-ular and nonprofit). If a mailing for one rate category does not meet the minimum, the software failsonly the rate category to which that mailing belongs.

For example, let's assume you have 250 regular automation pieces and 150 nonprofit automationpieces to STD, Automation Letters. The software prepares 250 regular pieces into trays, but drops150 nonprofit pieces. The software reports these dropped pieces on the Job Summary report as Qual-ified Non-Presort (No qualifying schemes).

Use the following parameters to set up Standard Mail multiple rate categories:

User Guide | 133

l Permit Holder Nonprof Auth No

l Mail Owner Nonprof Auth No

l Permit No.

l Federal Agency Cost Code, Permit Holder Name, Permit Holder Telephone No., PermitHolder DUNS No., and Permit Holder Address Line 1, 2, and 3

l Permit Holder City, Permit Holder State, and Permit Holder ZIP+4

User Guide | 134

Multiple entry pointsThe software supports up to 32,500 entry points per job. Entry points allow you to set up jobs toearn postage discounts for drop-shipping. We assume you already understand the USPS rules aboutthis. If you need background information, please refer to USPS publications, your USPS account rep-resentative, or your postmaster.

The documentation focuses on Standard Mail, Periodicals, and Package Services mailers, who havea postage incentive for drop-shipping. Although they have no postage incentive, some First-Classmailers also drop-ship to reduce delivery time.

CAUTION Learn the basics first. If you're just getting started with the software, we urge you torun simpler jobs before tackling multiple entry points. When working with entry points, weassume that you have previously run jobs that involved only one post office (in other words,single-entry-point jobs). You should already know how to fill in the Entry Point Description win-dow.

Introduction to multiple entry points

Every entry point is a USPS mail-processing facility. An entry point might be one of the following:

l Local post office

l Sectional center facility (SCF)

l Network distribution center (NDC)

l Auxiliary service facility (ASF)

l Area distribution center (ADC)

l DDU

The software does not select entry points for you. If you don't own a product that can do this for you,you have to choose your entry points yourself and tell the software how to divide your mail amongthem.

You have to provide a full Entry Point Description for each entry point.

Usually, some information is the same for all your entry points. You can enter that information justonce, in a block called Entry Point Defaults.

User Guide | 135

Your job file contains one Entry Point Defaults section, and two or more Entry Point Descriptions.Repeat the Entry Point Description section as many times as necessary. For details, refer to the Pre-sort Job-File Reference manual or online help.

NOTE Every entry point must have an estimated drop date set either in the Entry PointDefaults block or the Entry Point Description block. The estimated drop date determines whichdirectories are valid to use for your mailing.

See Also

Setting up SCF, ADC, NDC, and DDU entry points

About estimated drop dates

Every USPS facility serves a territory

Every USPS facility serves a certain territory, which is an area defined by a range of ZIP Codes. Thesoftware assigns each input record to an entry point by comparing the ZIP Code with the ZIP rangeof the entry point.

Drop-shipping means trucking the mail yourself to USPS offices that are closer to the ultimate des-tination of that mail instead of entering all of the mail at your local office. Since the USPS saves truck-ing costs, it offers mailers destination entry discounts for drop-shipping. Some mailers drop-ship togain faster delivery.

In accordance with USPS regulations, the software divides a drop-ship job into separate mailings.For each entry point, the software automatically prepares separate documentation.

Our ZIP ranges are conservative

Every USPS facility serves a particular territory. The USPS defines these areas by ZIP Codes or arange of ZIP Codes. We use these same ZIP Code ranges in our ready-to-use SCF, ADC, and NDCsetups. This means that you enter only the mail that is destined within the service area of that facil-ity. However, you might want to "stretch" the territory of an entry point. Some mailers do this toshorten or simplify truck routes.

For example, imagine that you are a mailer in Dallas, sending a truck to the ASF in Albuquerque.You don't have enough mail destined for Arizona to justify sending the truck to the Phoenix ASF. Soyou want to include the Arizona mail in your Albuquerque entry. To do this, you simply edit the ZIPranges in your Entry Point Description for Albuquerque (for example, 85000 to 95099 and so on forthe Phoenix ASF). This practice of "stretching" an entry point is perfectly legal. However, for Stand-ard Mail, there is a limit on how much extra mail you may include.

User Guide | 136

For Periodicals Class and Package Services BPM, there is no specific limit on how much extra mailyou may include. Your incentive for drop-shipping is not based on USPS facilities but on zones. Yousave merely by trucking the mail closer to its destination, not necessarily to a particular facility.

See Also

The 24/50 rule for Standard Mail

Entry point sequence is critical

The sequence of Entry Point Descriptions in your job is critical. You will have to follow certain rulesabout this sequence. However, you do not have to accept the same sequence in your output files orreports. Later on we'll show you techniques for altering the sequence of reports and output files.

See Also

How the software assigns mail pieces to entry points

The 24/50 rule for Standard Mail

In Standard Mail jobs, when you claim destination-entry discounts, you must comply with the 24/50rule. In any 24-hour period, at least 50 percent of the total mail (by weight or pieces, whichever isgreater) you enter must be destined within the service area of the entry facility. Looked at anotherway, the extra pieces that you squeeze into an entry point may not amount to more than half themail entered there.

CAUTION If you "stretch" the ZIP range of an entry point, it is your responsibility to verify thatyou comply with the 24/50 rule. The software does not enforce the 24/50 rule or verify yourcompliance.

Manual drop-ship planning

To plan your entry points, you need some information about your mailing list(s)— the geographicarea covered, and the areas where addresses are dense or sparse.

You need a road map—a local, state, or North American atlas—to plan your entry points and routes.We recommend the USPS Drop Ship Files, which include listings of all facilities, telephone numbersfor arranging appointments, and facility restrictions, such as dock limitations.

Also helpful are the National Five-Digit ZIP Code and Post Office Directory, available from the USPSNational Customer Service Center in Memphis (1-800-238-3150) or through your local postmaster.The maps of SCF areas alone are worth the price.

User Guide | 137

If you are processing an unfamiliar list, you may need a tool to help you get to know that list beforeyou can select entry points. BCC Software offers two tools for this purpose:

l Processing Center Listing report

l ZIPCount utility

If you're not sure if you have enough mail to justify an entry point, go ahead and put the entry pointinto your job, but specify a minimum amount of mail. If there isn't enough mail to meet your require-ment, the software "cancels" the entry point.

See Also

Determine if an entry point is worthwhile

Processing Center Listing Report

Use the report called the Processing Center Listing for drop-ship planning.

Run your job once, setting up three separate Processing Center Listing blocks. Each block shouldhave a different Report format setting. For example:

l Block #1 - Set the Report Format parameter to NDC.

l Block #2 - Set the Report Format parameter to SCF.

l Block #3 - Set the Report Format parameter to ADC.

Don't bother to set up a lot of entry points or other reports. The Processing Center Listing reportshows you how many pieces are destined for each facility. After you review the report, you can setup your entry points based on the information in the Processing Center Listing report, and run thejob for real.

See Also

Processing Center Listing

User Guide | 138

ZIPCount utility

Our ZIPCount utility counts records and reports tallies by 3-digit ZIP, 5-digit ZIP, SCF, ADC, or NDC.It runs faster and is simpler to set up than the Processing Center Listing. However:

l ZIPCount reports numbers of records, not copies. If you generate more than one copy perrecord, then you may need the Processing Center Listing instead.

l ZIPCount reports numbers of records, not pounds of mail. However in Periodicals class,zone-skipping savings are based on pounds. To make the ZipCount report useful for Peri-odicals, you may need to use your calculator to convert numbers of records to numbers ofpounds.

See Also

ZipCount

Setting up SCF, ADC, NDC, and DDU entry points

To simplify job setup, the software provides a setup for SCF, ADC, NDC, and DDU entry points thatare filled out and ready to use.

CAUTION It is your responsibility to check and see if an entry point is new, has been deleted,or has been split. The software issues warnings, but it does not change this information for you.If you continue processing a job after receiving a warning, you will not receive discounts for anyranges that are no longer valid.

To see whether an entry point is valid, you can:

l Run the Entry Point Description block creation utility (maildirshow.exe) and compare the out-put between the old and new directories.

l Go to https://fast.usps.com/fast/fastApp/facility/facilityProfile.action to perform a search thattells you whether an entry point is valid.

If you plan to drop-ship mail to multiple entry points, you must describe each entry point in your job.In addition, note that you need to add a valid 10-digit Post Office Zip Code in your Entry Pointblocks.

User Guide | 139

To select an entry point, do the following:

1. Set up the Entry Point Defaults block in the Entry Point Setup group.

2. For each entry point, set up one Entry Point Description block.

l You can select SCFs, ADCs, NDCs, and DDUs from separate lists. SCFs, NDCs, andADCs are listed in ZIP Code order (roughly east to west).

l To set up entry points for multiple NDCs or SCFs at one time, click the NDC or SCFbutton and select the facilities to use as entry points.

l To set up a DDU entry point, click the DDU button and then type the first 3 digits of azip code in the ZIP Prefix box. Presort will display a list of the DDUs serving that 3-digit area. Select a DDU from the list.

l Views lists entry points that do and do not accept palletized mail. The first column inthe Facilities window shows you if an entry point accepts palletized mail or not. Thecolumn can display the following values:

Value Description

Both Indicates that the entry point accepts both palletized and non-palletizedmail.

Pallet Indicates that the entry point accept only palletized mail.

No pallet Indicates that the entry point takes only non-palletized mail

3. When you finish setting up the Entry Point Description window, Presort automatically createsan individual Entry Point Description block for each NDC or SCF that you selected.

If you work directly on job files in a text editor, you can save time and reduce error by copyingalready-completed Entry Point blocks directly from a template file.

See Also

The Maildirshow utility

Create drop-ship discount entry points

User Guide | 140

Setting up multiple entry points in Presort Views

The advantage of using Presort Views to set up entry point descriptions is that Presort will generatea list valid entry points for you when you are creating entry point descriptions. If you set up the entrypoint descriptions in the job file, you need to know which entry points are valid and which ones youwant to use.

After you have created all of your entry point descriptions, you will need to verify that the entrypoint description blocks are in the right order in the job file to maximize your entry discounts. SeeHow the software assigns mail pieces to entry points for more information.

How Presort Views generates valid entry points

When you are creating entry point descriptions in Views, Presort uses the estimated drop date youentered for that entry point description, plus all other estimated drop dates in the job, to determinethe directories to use to generate the entry points valid for the entry point description you are cur-rently creating.

NOTE If you enter an estimated drop date in the Entry Point Defaults window and leave thisparameter blank for all entry point descriptions, Presort will determine the directories to usebased on the default estimated drop date and use those directories to generate the entry pointsvalid for all entry point descriptions in the job.

When setting up multiple entry points in Views and you are letting Presort choose the directoriesautomatically, and you enter an estimated drop date in each entry point description rather than onein the entry point defaults, the order in which you create the entry point descriptions is important.

NOTE If you specified the directories yourself, the order in which you create entry pointdescriptions is not important. Presort will use the directories you have specified to generate thevalid entry points for all entry point descriptions in the job.

The directories Presort has used for previous entry point descriptions in the job might not be the cor-rect ones to use for additional entry point descriptions that are added. As you add more entry pointdescriptions to the job, there may be more estimated drop dates in the job for Presort to consider todetermine the correct directories to use. (See Which directories are valid for my mailing? for moreinformation.) Presort does not "remember" which directories it used for previous entry point descrip-tions.

Entry point details can change from month to month, which can affect whether they are valid for cer-tain estimated drop dates. Using consistent data for setting up all of your entry point descriptions inyour mailing reduces the chances of missing out on discounts you are entitled to and the possibilityof the USPS rejecting your mailing.

User Guide | 141

We recommend creating entry point descriptions in chronological order, starting with the earliestestimated drop date. This will reduce the chances that Presort will use different directories to gen-erate the entry points in the job. You can also "force" Presort to use the same directories for all entrypoint descriptions.

IMPORTANT In all cases, if Presort cannot find the directories it's looking for and there are noalternate valid directories available, Presort will error.

Creating entry point descriptions in chronological order

In most cases, creating entry point descriptions in chronological order by estimated drop date willresult in the correct directories being used to generate valid entry points for all entry point descrip-tions. (See What may happen if you do not enter entry point descriptions in chronological orderwhen the wrong directories can be used.)

When you are creating the first entry point description and you enter the estimated drop date, thereis a total of one estimated drop date in your job so far. Presort considers all estimated drop dates todetermine the correct directories to use. Since there is just one date in the job, Presort will use thedirectories for the month of the estimated drop date (the Active directories).

When you are creating a second entry point description, there are two estimated drop dates that Pre-sort considers to determine the correct directories to use. Whichever directory set is valid for bothdates is the one Presort will use to determine the entry points that are valid for the second entrypoint description.

You continue this process until you finish creating all entry point descriptions.

Depending on the order in which you created the entry point descriptions, it is possible that Presortdid not use the same directory set to generate the entry points for every entry point description. Asmore entry point descriptions are added to the job, there are more estimated drop dates to considerwhen determining the directories to use.

For example, say your first entry point description has an estimated drop date of August 10. Becausethere is only one estimated drop date so far, Presort will use the Active directory for that estimateddrop date, which is August in this example.

Say the second entry point description has an estimated drop date in the same month, such asAugust 25. Presort considers August 10 and August 25 to determine the directories to use for thesecond entry point description, which is August, because they are the Active directories for bothdates.

Say the third entry point description has an estimated drop date of September 15. Presort considersAugust 10, August 25, and September 15, and determines the directories for the third entry point

User Guide | 142

description. In this case, the August directories are the only ones that can be used for this mailingbecause there are estimated drop dates in both August and September.

At this point, you can continue to create entry point descriptions that have estimated drop dates thatwould use the August directory set. They don't necessarily have to be added in chronological orderanymore because the only directories that can be used for all dates in the job are the August dir-ectories. For example, you can create another entry point description with an estimated drop date inSeptember. Presort will use the August directories for that entry point description, because all of theestimated drop dates in the job can only use August directories.

If you create an entry point description with an estimated drop date of August 3, because theAugust directories were used for the previous two entry point descriptions and the August dir-ectories are the current (Active) directories for estimated drop dates in August. (In Entering entrypoint descriptions chronologically that can still cause the wrong directory to be used, we demon-strate what would happen if the first estimated drop date entered had been August 3.)

What may happen if you do not enter entry point descriptions in chronological order

If the first entry point description has an estimated drop date of September 10, Presort will use theSeptember directories by default, because there is just the one date in the job at this point, and thedirectory used will be the Active directories for that one date. If the next entry point description hasan estimated drop date of August 20, Presort considers August 20 and September 10 and determ-ines that the August directories are the only ones valid for the second entry point description.

In this case, Presort has used both August and September directories to set up entry points in thesame job. If the directories used to generate all entry points in the job are not the same, you couldmiss out on discounts you are entitled to and the USPS could reject your mailing.

But Presort cannot "go back" and regenerate valid entry points using the correct directories for you.You would have to manually regenerate all of your entry points that were generated with theSeptember directories to be generated with the August directories. However, Presort does not keeptrack of which directories it used to determine the valid entry points for each entry point description,so unless you know which entry points were generated with the September directories, you wouldhave to regenerate all of your entry points to be sure they were all generated using the August dir-ectories.

When creating entry point descriptions chronologically can still cause the wrong directory to beused

If the first entry point description that you create has an estimated drop date that falls within the first7 days of the month (for example, August 3), Presort will use the previous month's (Outgoing) dir-ectories by default (in this case, July). (See About estimated drop dates for information about estim-ated drop dates that fall at the beginning of the month.) If the second entry point description has anestimated drop date that falls anytime during the same month that is not within the first 7 days (for

User Guide | 143

example, August, 31), Presort considers August 3 and August 31, and will use the August (Active) dir-ectories to generate the entry points for the second entry point description.

Even though the July directories used for the first entry point description are valid for the secondentry point description, Presort does not keep track of directories it used for previous entry pointdescriptions. You would have to manually regenerate all of your entry points that were generatedwith the July directories to be generated with the August directories, because the entry pointranges may not match the data in the directory anymore that will be used for the job, so some entrypoint discounts may be lost or available discounts may not be claimed.

However, Presort does not keep track of which directories it used to determine the valid entry pointsfor each entry point description, so unless you know which entry points were generated with theJuly directories, you would have to regenerate all of your entry points using the August directories.

If the range of dates is too wide

If you attempt to create additional entry point descriptions with estimated drop dates that are out-side the effective date range of a directory that can satisfy all of the existing estimated drop dates inthe job, you will receive a message stating that the estimated drop dates cannot be satisfied by anyone data set.

For example, you can't create an entry point description with an estimated drop date of October 8when the earliest date in the job is August 3. Directories are not valid for dates that span acrossmore than two consecutive months. You will have to either change the estimated drop date of Octo-ber 8 to a date sometime in August or September, or create that entry point description in a job thatuses directories valid for October 8.

"Forcing" Presort Views to select the same directories

It's possible to "force" Presort Views to use the same directories to generate all of the entry points inthe job, regardless of the order you create the entry point descriptions in.

Enter an estimated drop date in the Entry Point Defaults window that would cause Presort to selectdirectories that are valid for all estimated drop dates in your job, and leave the individual estimateddrop dates blank in all of the Entry Point Descriptions windows. Presort will use the same directoriesto generate the valid entry points for each entry point description.

l If all mail will be entered within a single month (for example, August), the preferred dir-ectories are the directories for that month. Set the Entry Point Defaults value to an estimateddrop date that falls in the middle of that month (e.g. August 15). Presort will use that month's(August) directories to generate all of the entry points.

l If all mail will be entered EARLY in that month (for example, August 1 - 7), the preferred

User Guide | 144

directories are the July directories. Enter a date between the 1st and the 7th of the month (forexample, August 3). Presort will use the previous month’s (July) directories to generate all ofthe entry points.

l If all mail will be entered over a period of two consecutive months (for example, August andSeptember), the only directories valid are the August directories. Set the Entry Point Defaultsvalue to an estimated drop date that falls in the middle of the first month (for example,August 15). Presort will choose the directories from that month (August) because that is theonly valid set to use for such a mailing.

You can also specify the directories for Presort to use yourself in the Auxiliary Files block. If you donot know what the valid entry points are for that month, you can run the Maildirshow utility and com-pare the output between the old and new directories, or go to https://-fast.usps.com/fast/fastApp/facility/facilityProfile.action to perform a query on an individual entrypoint to determine whether the entry point is valid.

Essential points of setting up entry points

Your job file contains one Entry Point Defaults section, and two or more Entry Point Descriptions.Repeat the Entry Point Description section as many times as necessary. For details, refer to the Pre-sort Job-File Reference or online help.

As the software evaluates each input record, it tries to match the record to one of the Entry PointDescriptions.

It's possible that the software won't find a match. We call this an undetermined record. To tell thesoftware how you want it to handle these records, set the Action parameter as follows:

l Have the software ignore undetermined records (drop them from all further processing).

l Set up one of your entry points (usually your local post office) as the default, then have thesoftware reassign the undetermined records to the default entry point.

l Have the software abort the whole job at the first undetermined record found.

See Also

How the software assigns mail pieces to entry points

User Guide | 145

The Maildirshow utility

To run the utility:

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the folder where the maildirshow utility is located(c: ...\ss\pst).

2. Type maildirshow and then type the discount type, mail class, mail shape, estimated dropdate, the path and file name of the directories (YYMM_maildirect.dir or YYMM_facil-ity.dir), and the output file name.

3. Press Enter.

Maildirshow values

The values for <Disc Type> are:

Value Description

SCF Sectional Center Facility

NDC Network Distribution Center

ADC Area Distribution Center

DDU:XXX Destination Delivery Unit. XXX represents the 3-digit ZIP code area from whichyou would like to select a DDU as an entry point. For example, to select a DDU inthe Seattle area, you might enter DDU:981.

DDU:ALL Destination Delivery Unit. Select your entry point from a list of all DDUs in theUnited States.

The values for <Mail Class> are:

Value Description

NEWS News

PER Periodicals

PSVC Package Services

User Guide | 146

Value Description

PSVCS Package Services - Parcel Select

PSVCBLM Package Services - BPM/Library/Media

STD Standard

DEFLT Default Drop Point

The values for <Mail Shape> are:

Value Description

FLATS Flats

IRREG Irregular and Marketing Parcels

LTRS Letters

MACH Machinable and Marketing Parcels

NMACH Non-Machinable Parcels

DEFLT Default Drop Point

The value for <Estimated Drop Date> is MMDDYYYY.

The values for <Pallet setting> are:

Value Description

PLT This option generates a list with the following information:

l Facilities that accept pallets.

l Redirection facilities for pallets.

User Guide | 147

Value Description

NO_PLT This option generates a list with the following information:

l Facilities that accept non-palletized mail.

l Redirection facilities for non-palletized mail.

The values for <End date> are:

Value Description

EFF Use the effective end date to stop sending mail to the redirection facility andstart sending it back to the Default facility.

ACT Use the actual end date for validation and discount purposes.

Create drop-ship discount entry points

If you are not using Views, use the Maildirshow utility to create entry points for pallets that containZIP Code ranges that are eligible for drop ship discounts.

The Pallet setting parameter tells Maildirshow to output a list of facilities that accept pallets or sack-s/trays.

Best practice is to set up a pallet and a non-pallet version of an entry point (if they are different) andthen map the appropriate schemes to each entry point. This prevents you from sending mail that isnot accepted at a redirection facility.

To avoid sacking an excessive amount of mail, you should process any pallet schemes for a certainZIP Code range before running any sack schemes against that same range.

NOTE If you set the Override USPS Mail Direct Disc parameter in the Entry Point block toYes, all the ZIP Code ranges for that entry point receive the discount appropriate for the entrypoint, regardless of what the mail direction data directory says should be eligible.

See Also

The Maildirshow utility

User Guide | 148

Determine if an entry point is worthwhile

Sometimes, you may have to process an unfamiliar mailing list. You may not be sure whether youhave enough mail for an entry point to make it worthwhile. Will the money you save in postage off-set the cost of trucking the mail yourself?

If you are determining whether an entry point is worthwhile manually, put the entry point into yourjob. In the Entry Point Description, you can specify a minimum amount of mail. The software cancelsthe entry point if the actual amount of mail is below your threshold.

You can set the threshold in terms of either pieces or pounds.

Standard Mail

Let's suppose that you are preparing a Standard Mail job. You calculate that entering your mail at theDenver NDC will cost you $950 (trucking costs, printing extra reports, extra bookkeeping). TheDestination NDC discount is 1.9¢ per piece (at the time this was written). To make the Denver tripworth taking, you need the DNDC discount on at least 50,000 pieces. So that's the values youwould use for the Minimum Pieces option.

Periodicals

For a Periodicals job, you might make a similar calculation as with a Standard Mail job. But youwould be more interested in setting the Minimum Pounds value, because your drop-ship savings arebased on weight, not the number of pieces.

The software keeps an entry point if there is enough mail to meet either Minimum Pieces or Min-imum Pounds. After you've chosen to use either Minimum Pieces or Minimum Pounds, set the otherone to some impossibly high number. For example:

Minimum Pieces = 50000

Minimum Pounds = 9999999

Improve delivery time

Some mailers drop-ship to improve delivery time. The discounts are an added bonus or, sometimes,not available at all.

For example, if you mail to Alaska, Hawaii, or Puerto Rico, the USPS allows you to drop-ship Stand-ard or Package Services Palletized BPM mail to specific NDCs rather than entering it locally, asdetailed in the table below:

User Guide | 149

Destination USPS facility

Alaska Seattle NDC

Hawaii San Francisco NDC

Puerto Rico Jacksonville NDC

The benefit to you is faster delivery time, but this "offshore" mail receives no DNDC discount, perDMM 246.3.1, and 266.4.1. You would want to do this only if you had enough mail destined toAlaska, for example, or at least to the Seattle NDC service area, to make it worthwhile sending atruck to Seattle.

Multiple mailings

The software often forms more than one mailing per entry point if the job involves segmenting ormultiple presort schemes. To determine whether Minimum Pounds or Minimum Pieces is met, thesoftware combines the quantity and weight of all mailings at the entry point.

How the software assigns mail pieces to entry points

In your job file, the sequence of Entry Point Descriptions is critical. You must follow the basicsequence because of the way that the software assigns mail pieces to entry points. It's a sifting pro-cess.

As the software reads each record from your input file, it compares the ZIP Code with the ZIP rangesof your entry points. It starts at the first entry point and works its way down. It stops the first time thatit finds an entry point where the input ZIP falls into the ZIP range for that entry point. The record isthen assigned to that entry point. Then the software starts over again with the next input record.

To maximize entry discounts, the sequence must be:

1. Local delivery offices (except the default, local office)

2. SCFs

3. ADCs (Periodicals Science-of-Agriculture or Outside-County only)

4. NDCs

5. Default entry point, usually the local office

User Guide | 150

It does not matter how you arrange entry points within each of these levels. If you want, you can"nest" local offices within their serving SCF, and SCFs within their serving NDC. However, you mustfollow the same basic sequence—local offices, SCFs, ADCs (Periodicals), then NDCs. For example(this example does not include ADCs for Periodicals):

Entry point sequence Entry point "nesting"

Cedar Rapids office Cedar Rapids office

Waterloo office Cedar Rapids SCF

Des Moines office Waterloo office

Cedar Rapids SCF Waterloo SCF

Waterloo SCF Des Moines office

Des Moines SCF Des Moines SCF

Des Moines NDC Des Moines NDC

Given this rule, you may not be able to arrange entry points by truck route or other considerations.We have a couple of other methods for getting your mail in truck-route order. You can use back-endprocessing, after the main presort process itself, to control the way that entry points appear in youroutput files and reports.

For example, let's say the service areas for two SCFs (and others not shown) lie within the NDC area.Our truck route includes stops at all three facilities.

In the job setup, the SCFs have to come before the NDC. Thus the SCF pieces can be sifted out,leaving the rest for the NDC. If we set it up the other way—if the NDC came before the SCFs—theNDC would "catch" all the mail. By the time the software got to the SCFs, there would be no mailleft.

It's possible that the software won't find a match. We call this an undetermined record. To tell thesoftware how you want it to handle these records, set the Action parameter as follows:

l Have the software ignore undetermined records (drop them from all further processing).

l Set up one of your entry points (usually your local post office) as the default, then have the

User Guide | 151

software reassign the undetermined records to the default entry point.

l Have the software abort the whole job at the first undetermined record found.

Two or three entries at the same place

You may end up with mailings that contain more than one destination-entry rate. For example, bydropping mail at the Billings, Montana, office, you could enter mail at a delivery unit (DU), an SCF,and an ASF; there are three different facilities under one roof.

CAUTION When you have two or three destination rates in one mailing, the containers mustbe physically separated. When you transport and unload the mail, make sure to preserve thisseparation.

How to limit a mailing by ZIP

Usually you will want to mail to all eligible addresses on your list. However, you can use your entry-point setup as a filter, to restrict the mailing to a certain ZIP Code area. This method runs faster andis easier to set up than an Input Filter based on ZIP.

For example, suppose you want to limit a mailing to a certain SCF area. In that case, you would setup an Entry Point Description for that SCF. Records with a ZIP outside that range would have anundetermined entry point. To drop those records out of the mailing, you would select the Ignoreoption.

See Also

Essential points of setting up entry points

Last Entry Point

You can set up a last entry point as a "catch-all" for pieces that did not qualify for other entry pointsin your jobs. This feature is for Standard Mail and Package Services BPM mail only.

CAUTION This is an optional procedure that requires approval from your postal representativeor acceptance clerk.

With approval from your postal representative or delivery facility manager, you can set up your jobso that the last entry point accepts less than 200 pieces or 50 pounds (Standard Mail), or 300 pieces(Package Services) while still qualifying based on the overall mailing job. The setting can be as lowas one piece to qualify the entry point.

To make the software accept this lower setting, you must

User Guide | 152

1. Turn on USPS Optional Procedures in the Execution block.

2. Select Last EP for the STD/PSVC Qualification Min parameter in the Optional Proceduresblock.

If you don't make these selections, and you enter too low of a piece/pound figure (lower than theaccepted mailing minimums), an error appears and your job won't get processed. If you don't set upa last entry point, leftover pieces from each entry point drop out of the mailing and mail at First-Class single-piece rates.

When you set up your job using the last entry point feature, any pieces that didn't qualify for otherentry points in the job are combined to form a mailing for the last entry point (typically your localfacility). The software disregards the mailing minimums for this entry point, sorts these pieces to theappropriate sortation levels, and charges postage suitable to the sortation.

You must also arrange with your acceptance clerk what method of reporting you will use. For anexample, you could arrange with your acceptance clerk to use a Sum Job type Postage Statementand a Register of Mailing to enter the job into the USPS mailstream.

Use coded fields to indicate entry points

For multiple entry points, the software must link each input record to one entry point or another.Most users allow the software to do this by ZIP Code range.

For a few of our more advanced users, that approach is too simple or, in some cases, they need todefine more ZIP Code ranges than the software allows. These mailers pre-process the database toassign records to entry points by using a more complex algorithm. To each record, they append acoded field that indicates the entry point. This field is then presented to the software through thefield PW.Entry_ID.

Technically, you can set up entry points by both methods. The software assigns each mail piece tothe first entry point that it is able to match either by ZIP or PW.Entry_ID.

To use coded fields to indicate entry points

1. Set up your DEF file(s) by using the input field PW.Entry_ID. In the DEF file, create the linkbetween PW.Entry_ID and your database field. For example, your DEF entry might be:

PW.Entry_ID = DB.ENTRY_PT

2. Link each entry point to a field value. After you've got each entry point set up, and thePW.Entry_ID field set up, you need to link the two. The link is that each Entry Point

User Guide | 153

Description includes one value for PW.Entry_ID. As the software evaluates each inputrecord, it checks the PW.Entry_ID value. Then the software tries to match this value to oneof the Entry Point Descriptions.

It's possible that the software won't find a match. For example, the software might find arecord in which the PW.Entry_ID field is empty, or contains an invalid value—that is, a valuenot among those you have defined in the job. We call this an undetermined record.

See Also

Essential points of setting up entry points

Eligibility for discounts

Mail is eligible for destination discounts depending on where you enter the mail, the mail class, andthe type of mailing. If you have questions about this, refer them to your USPS account rep-resentative or postmaster.

For some types of mail and entry points, the software can automatically determine which pieces getthe destination discount, and which do not. (This is based on the ZIP Code of the piece and data inthe software's SCF directory.) In other situations, you may have to or want to spell out which ZIPs getthe discount.

We explain each situation below:

Mail class DNDC DSCF DADC DDU

Periodicals None Pieces not eli-gible for in-county rates,entered at theSCF anddestined withinthe SCF servicearea.

Pieces not eli-gible for in-county rates,entered at theADC anddestined withinthe ADC servicearea.

Carrier routepieces destinedwithin the ser-vice area of thedelivery unitwhere the mailis entered.

User Guide | 154

Mail class DNDC DSCF DADC DDU

Standard,ECR Regular

Mail entered atthe NDC forpieces destinedwithin the NDCservice area. Ifthe area is alsoserved by anASF, enter themail there toreceive the dis-count.

Mail entered atthe SCF forpieces destinedwithin the SCFservice area.Mail cannot bein ADC, AADC,NDC, MADC,MAADC, or resid-ual tray, sack, orpallet.

None Pieces destinedwithin the ser-vice area of thedelivery unitwhere the mailis entered.

Standard,ECR Automation

Mail entered atthe NDC forpieces destinedwithin the NDCservice area.

Mail entered atthe SCF forpieces destinedwithin the SCFservice area.

None Pieces enteredwhere thepieces are bar-code sorted.

Standard,Auto/Regular

Mail entered atthe NDC forpieces destinedwithin the NDCservice area.

Mail entered atthe SCF forpieces destinedwithin the SCFservice area.

None None

Package ServicesBPM

Mail entered atthe NDC forpieces destinedwithin the NDCservice area.

Mail entered atthe SCF forpieces destinedwithin the SCFservice area.

None Pieces destinedwithin the ser-vice area of thedelivery unitwhere the mailis entered.

User Guide | 155

Mail class DNDC DSCF DADC DDU

Package ServicesParcel Select

Mail entered atthe NDC forpieces destinedwithin the NDCservice area.

Mail entered atthe SCF forpieces destinedwithin the SCFservice area.

For some ZIPCodes, you mustactually enter themail at the NDCto receive theDSCF discount.

None Earn DDU dis-count on piecesdestined withthe service areaof the deliveryunit where themail is entered.

See Also

Automatic DDU versus setting ZIP ranges

DSCF, DADC, and DNDC discounts

When you enter mail at an SCF, you can claim the DSCF discount on pieces destined within the ser-vice area of that SCF. Also, when you enter Periodicals Outside-County and Science-of-Agriculturemail at an ADC, you can claim the DADC discount on pieces destined within the service area of thatADC. The same is true for mail entered at an ASF or NDC, and claiming the DNDC discount.

The software automatically determines which pieces are eligible for the DSCF, DADC, and DNDCdiscounts.

Co-located NDCs with an ASF

In any area that is served by both a NDC and an ASF, you have to enter at the ASF to be eligible forthe discount. Montana is served by the Denver NDC, but to earn the DNDC discount on Montanamail, you have to enter at the Billings, Montana ASF.

Co-located ADCs with an SCF

Some ADCs are co-located with SCFs and DDUs. To set up your job for pallets going to co-locatedADCs you must include an ADC entry point in your job and select the DADC, DSCF, and DDU dis-count options. Then choose to use USPS data for the DDU discount.

User Guide | 156

DSCF discount for mail dropped at NDC

In Package Services Parcel Select mailings, there are some ZIP Codes for which you can receive theDSCF discount, but only if you drop that mail at the NDC for distribution to the delivery unit.

As long as you include both the NDC and SCF entry points in your job, and you tell the software thatthe mailing qualifies for both the DSCF and DNDC rates when you set up the NDC entry point, thesoftware will automatically calculate a DSCF discount on those special pieces that you must drop atthe NDC to get the DSCF rate.

See Also

Two or three entries at the same place

DDU discounts

If you enter your mail at the post office from which the carrier delivers it, you can earn the Destin-ation Delivery Unit (DDU) discount on the following types of mail:

l Periodicals

l Standard Mail, Enhanced Carrier Route

l Package Services Bound Printed Matter and Parcel Select

Carriers operate from local offices, SCFs, and some ASFs.

l If you enter at an SCF, ADC, or ASF, the software can automatically determine (by ZIP Codeand route) which mail is eligible for the DDU discount. The software gets this informationfrom its SCF directory.

NOTE You might want to provide the software with the eligible ZIP Code ranges your-self, rather than have the software rely on USPS data. The data in the SCF directory isalways changing as routes are deleted from one facility and shifted to another. But thedata in the SCF directory sometimes takes time to catch up with the actual changes atthe local level. Your information about a facility's service area may be more accurate.

l If you enter at a DDU, you need to specify the zip codes delivered to from that DDU. Youmay be able to get this information from Presort, or you can enter it manually.

You may have to hold a USPS permit at each office where you enter mail. Ask your postmaster orUSPS account representative about what you're required to do.

User Guide | 157

Link schemes to entry points

In most cases, the software links each presort scheme in your job to an entry point. For example, saywe are preparing a Standard Mail Enhanced Carrier-Route letter job with pieces destined for theQuad Cities SCF, the Cedar Rapids SCF, and the Des Moines NDC. The software uses each of the fol-lowing schemes to sort mail pieces destined to each of the three entry points.

We would set up our job schemes in the following order:

1. STD Enhanced Carrier Route (regular)

2. STD Automation Letters

3. 1C/STD Regular Letters

In some cases, however, you may not want to apply each presort scheme in the job to each entrypoint. Here are two examples:

l A pallet mailer might use this feature to ensure that only palletized mail is trucked to remoteentry points, while sacks are entered locally. You could also set up two or more copies of ascheme, each with different settings such as minimum pallet weight. Then you'd be able toapply different minimum pallet weights to each entry point.

l A lettershop in Small Town, Wisconsin enters mail at several nearby towns. They use this fea-ture to ensure that only DDU carrier-route mail is prepared for the outlying towns, while a lar-ger set of schemes are applied to the SCF in downtown La Crosse.

TIPPlan carefully. You might find it helpful to draw a matrix or table of all your schemes andentry points. Your setup task will be much easier if you first set up all presort schemes,and all entry points, before linking them.

Manually linking schemes to entry points

In Views, the software lists all of the schemes for each entry point. You may choose to limit theschemes that are applied to each entry point.

If you use the job-file to run the software, linking schemes is a bit more work.

To link schemes to entry points manually using the jobfile

User Guide | 158

1. In the Entry Point block, type a number above each scheme, in a comment.

2. Enter a value for the Scheme Numbers this Entry Point parameter.

l Type ALL to apply to all schemes.

l To apply to selected schemes, type the scheme numbers, separated with a comma.

NOTE The software processes schemes in the order that scheme blocks appear in thejob file, even if your scheme numbers are out of numerical sequence. If you later insertan additional scheme into the middle of your scheme sequence, you need to updateyour scheme/entry-point links. Use a text editor to manually edit the job file and updatethe scheme numbers in each Entry Point section. Although Views lets you selectschemes by name, it simply writes the scheme numbers to the job file when you clickOK. If you subsequently add, delete, or rearrange schemes, Views does not auto-matically update the scheme numbers in the Scheme Nums this Entry Pt parameters inthe job file.

For example, the aim of the lettershop is to prepare CART mail for deposit in small outlying towns,where they can earn the DDU discount. CART, automation, and regular mail would all be entered atthe SCF downtown.

First, we set up our presort schemes. Then we set up our entry points. The first two are local officesin outlying communities and La Crosse is an SCF. Then we assign the schemes that produces DDU-discount-eligible mail to the two local offices and the remaining schemes to the SCF.

Entry points Schemes

West Salem, WI 1 - STD, Enhanced Carrier Route Regular Letters

La Crescent, MN 1 - STD, Enhanced Carrier Route Regular Letters

La Crosse, WI 2 - STD, Enhanced Carrier Route Regular Letters(with 3DG CART trays)

3 - STD, Automation Letters

4 - 1C/STD, Regular Letters

User Guide | 159

How multiple entry points affect reports and output files

Each entry point in your job results in a separate legal mailing, with separate reports. For example, ifyou have two entry points, the software automatically creates one set of reports for each one, eventhough you set up each type of report only once.

Normally, when you create output files, the software outputs all entry points, in the order that theyappear in the job setup. You have some options for controlling this output behavior.

l If you would like to output only a selected entry point (or entry points), use the Output Selec-tion feature. The particular option to look for is Select Entry Points To Output.

l To output each entry point to a separate output file, use the Split Output feature. The par-ticular option to look for is Create Files per Entry Point.

l If you output all entry points together, in one file, you might wish to control their sequence.You could use the Mailflow feature. In the Mailflow window, the particular option to look foris Alternate Entry Point Sequence.

l If you want to change the mailstream hierarchy from the normal order of entry point, seg-ment, and scheme, to make entry point less dominant, use Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy.

See Also

Output selection

Split output

Using Mailflow to change sequence within each mailing

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Use output fields to identify entry points

You might like to include a field in your output file to identify the entry point. Mailing crews andacceptance clerks might appreciate this. You can use one of the following output fields:

Field Content

AP.Ent_Pt_No An entry point number assigned by the software (1 to 32500). The soft-ware numbers entry points in the order that your Entry Point Descriptionsappeared in the job file.

User Guide | 160

Field Content

AP.Ent_Pt_Nam A descriptive name up to 31 characters long. This is the entry point nameas you entered it in the Entry point Description in the job.

PW.Entry_ID The entry point code, passed through from your input file.

User Guide | 161

Mixed-class comailMixed-class comail lets you put a mix of Periodicals flats, Standard Mail flats, and Bound Printed Mat-ter flats (or any two of those three) in the same bundles when making packages on pallets.

Comail bundles containing all three classes of mail assume the Standard Mail service standard.Bundles made of Periodicals and Bound Printed Matter Flats, without Standard Mail, assume thelesser of the two service standards.

All pieces must be machinable or automated flats. Periodicals alternative automation flats are notallowed.

There is a restriction that applies to BPM but not Periodicals or Standard Mail: Only pallets enteredfor DSCF or DDU discounts can contain BPM in mixed-class comail.

NOTE

l Mixed-class comail is not a standard feature of Presort, but is available as an optional add-on. For more information, contact your BCC Software Sales Representative.

l Mailers must have approval from the USPS to submit mixed-class comail. For more inform-ation, contact the Manager, Business Mailer Support at the USPS.

Introduction to Mixed-class comail

Comailing pieces from two or three of the following classes—Periodicals, Bound Printed Matter, andStandard Mail—can benefit mailers by providing increased discounts, fewer packages, more efficientpallet makeup, and improved drop-ship penetration.

CAUTION The Presort software does not produce all the required USPS reports and formsneeded for USPS mixed-class comail. Even though the software doesn't generate pallet or pack-age output files, it does populate the information you need in the Mail.dat Container Summaryrecord (.csm). You can use the .csm table and your Mail.dat tool to generate the necessary out-put files. 

Mixed-class comail mailing minimums

The following minimums apply:

l Any bundle that contains Standard Mail or BPM must have a minimum of 10 pieces. There isno minimum ratio of Periodicals to Standard Mail pieces across the job.

User Guide | 162

l Each mixed-class comail job must include at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of Standard Mailand/or at least 300 pieces of Bound Printed Matter mail, when USPS Standard and/or BoundPrinted Matter are combined within a mailing.

NOTE You should not set the STD/PSVC Qualification Min parameter in the OptionalProcedures block to None.

l No mailing minimum is required for Periodicals.

l A pure Periodicals bundle may be created at a minimum of 6 pieces. The software firstattempts to build a mixed class bundle at 10 pieces. If 10 pieces are not available to the des-tination, then the software attempts to build a pure Periodicals bundle using the 6 piece min-imum.

l The software creates firm packages for Periodicals only.

Mixed-class comail sortation and other rules

The following pallet preparation levels are supported:

l Merged 5-digit and 5-digit scheme (including FSS pallets)

l Carrier Route 5-digit and 5-digit scheme (including FSS pallets)

l 5-digit and 5-digit scheme (including FSS pallets)

l 3-digit

l SCF

l ASF

l NDC

l Mixed NDC

NOTE The mixed NDC pallet has no minimum load requirements. You can set yourmixed NDC (MNDC) level as low as zero pounds to catch all the leftover mail.

Be aware of the following sortation rules:

User Guide | 163

l Each pallet should be labeled according to the content of that individual pallet, for example:STD/BPM/PER or BPM/PER—or even just STD.

l Co-packaging of automation and regular rate mail is always enabled within comail pre-paration.

l If the piece is "fletter" sized, all pieces are prepared as flats under the exceptions providedfor within the DMM.

See Also

Mixed-class comail reports

Comailing Heavier Flats Weighing 20–24 oz.

You can comail heavier flats by setting the options in Presort to allow Periodicals and BPM flatsweighing between 20 and 24 oz.

CAUTION You may include either heavy Periodicals flats or heavy BPM flats in your comailpool; you may not include both.

If you include heavy BPM or Periodicals flats, there are some additional USPS rules to be aware of.We suggest that you coordinate with your acceptance unit to ensure that your mailing will be accep-ted.

Periodicals

DMM 705.11 states that mailers may comail and/or copalletize machinable automation and presortedflats. The maximum weight limit of automation Periodicals flats is 20 oz..

The USPS Customer Support Ruling (PS-325) allows Periodicals non-machinable flats measuring upto 3/4 inch thick and weighing over 20 oz. up to 24 oz. to be comailed and/or copalletized with Peri-odicals machinable flats, as long as the following conditions are met: 

l There are no "heavy" (weighing between 20 and 24 oz.) BPM flats in the comail pool

l No more than 25% of the non-carrier route Periodicals pieces weigh over 20 oz. up to 24 oz.

l The mailing complies with DMM 705.11.

l Pieces weighing over 20 oz. must meet all other standards for automation compatible flats.

User Guide | 164

l You submit a version summary report with specific information to the acceptance personnelfor each comail pool that contains comailed flats over 20 oz.

For more information, see http://pe.usps.com/text/CSR/PS-325.htm.

IMPORTANT Presort does not enforce the 25% threshold on Periodicals pieces weighing over20 oz. up to 24 oz. You need to monitor this to ensure that your mailing complies with this rul-ing.

BPM

Heavier BPM flats—those weighing between 20 and 24 oz.—can be included in mixed-class comailentered at DSCF and DDU locations, with 3 additional restrictions:

l There are no "heavy" (weighing between 20 and 24 oz.) Periodicals flats in the comail pool.

l No more than 50% of the mail pool consists of BPM flats weighing over 20 oz. up to 24 oz

l Heavy BPM flats may only be prepared as carrier-route mail.

l Heavy BPM flats are not allowed in FSS zones.

IMPORTANT Presort does not enforce the 50% threshold on BPM pieces weighing over 20oz. up to 24 oz. You need to monitor this to ensure that your mailing complies with this ruling.

NOTE Even with heavy BPM, you can still include Automation and Regular preparation typesin a scheme; Presort will not sort any of the heavy BPM flats those ways.

How Presort processes flats

Jobs with flats over 20 oz. up to 24 oz.

l For jobs with automated flats over 20 oz., an error will occur and the job will not run. Toallow an automated flat above 20 oz., you can use Optional Procedures and set thePER/COMAIL Allow Auto Flt > 20 oz parameter to Yes. The 24 oz. conditions described inthe next two bullet points will apply to the pieces over 20 oz., and FSS preparation willapply. For example, if you call the piece an automated flat and set optional procedures toallow auto flats over 20 oz., if all pieces in the job are over 24 oz., the job will be processed,but without FSS preparation. If there is a mix of pieces over 24 oz. and pieces up to 20 oz.,the job will not run. You will need to separate the pieces into two jobs.

l For jobs with PER flats with automated flats that are over 20 oz. up to 24 oz., FSS

User Guide | 165

containers will be created.

l For jobs with automation compatible flats that are all 24 oz. or less, FSS bundles and con-tainers will be created.

Jobs with flats over 24 oz.:

l For jobs with flats that are all over 24 oz., FSS bundles and containers will not be created;those pieces are too heavy for FSS sorting.

Jobs with flats of mixed weights (above AND below 24 oz.)

l For jobs with PER alternative auto flats of mixed weights with FLAT is Auto-Compatible setto Yes, ALL versions in the job must be for flats that are all 24 oz. or less, OR all over 24 oz. Ifthe job contains a mix of pieces that are 24 oz. or less AND pieces that are over 24 oz., thejob will not run. You will need to separate the pieces into two jobs: one with all flats 24 oz.and under (to be prepared for FSS), and all flats over 24 oz. (FSS prep does not apply).

Mixed-class comail Periodicals Bundle and Container pricing

Prices for Periodicals flats in comail bundles are determined using the following USPS rules:

l The bundle prices applicable to the ADC container level will be applied to the auxiliary ser-vice facility (ASF)/network distribution center (NDC) container level.

l The bundle price applicable to the ADC bundle placed on the ADC container level will applyto mixed ADC bundles placed on mixed NDC pallets.

l The container price applicable to the ADC pallet level will apply to the ASF/NDC pallet level.

l The container price applicable to the ADC pallet level will also apply to the mixed NDC pal-let level.

l For comail jobs, the software does not apply bundle and container charges to the StandardMail or BPM portion of your job. Within the COMAIL PER/STD/BPM, Packages on Palletsscheme, the software allocates the bundle and container charges for the Periodicals mail.

l For example, on a pallet containing 1000 copies with 400 copies of Periodicals mail, the con-tainer charge will amount to 40% of the total container charge for that pallet.

User Guide | 166

Setting up a Mixed-class comail job

You must perform the following basic steps when setting up a Mixed-class comail job. To minimizeyour efforts, we suggest using the mixed-class comail template (p_comail.pst).

To set up a Mixed-class comail job

1. Set the Mail Class parameter in the General Information block to specify the mailing classyou are processing. For a mixed-class comail job, set this to COMAIL.

2. Go into the Version Descriptions block and set the Mailing Class parameter for each versionto Periodicals (PER), Standard Mail (STD), or Bound Printed Matter (BPM).

If your current jobs are already set up for auto dimension, use the PW.Mail_Class input fieldin your definition file and then populate the mail class field in your database. Valid values forthis field are PER or 2 for Periodicals, STD or 3 for Standard Mail, and BPM or 4 for BoundPrinted Matter.

NOTE The rate category for a BPM piece must be set to BPM. (In Presort Views, youcan find this option under Version Setup > Version Description > Rate Category.)

3. Add the COMAIL PER/STD/BPM, Packages on Pallets scheme.

4. Set entry point types.

l The software lets you run a job with the Entry Point Type parameter in the Entry PointDescription block set to Other, and you can then perform post-sort analysis and plan-ning via the Mail.dat.

l For pallets containing BPM, the USPS requires comail preparation to be entered atDSCF or DDU facilities. If your mailing includes BPM, the Destination Entry Knownparameter can be set to N or unchecked, which will allow you to select entry pointsduring your post presorting process. (In Presort Views, this parameter is located underReport Setup > IDEA Mail.dat > Options. ) Presort will prepare pallets containing BPMto preserve the option of doing destination entry later. The downside is that once thepallets are created, you will need to destination enter them; you may not want to dothis if you have only a small number of relevant pieces.

5. Decide which reports you'll need. See Mixed-class comail reports for more information.

User Guide | 167

Mixed-class comail reports

The software generates the following documentation and output files.

Report Description

Mail.dat The software populates the Class Defining Preparation field in theSegment file with either a 2 (Periodicals), 3 (Standard), or 6 (Stand-ard/BPM/Periodicals Comail).

You choose the comail value for the Segment file by entering one ofthe three values in the COMAIL Class Def Prep in SEG parameter,which is located in the IDEA Mail.dat report block.

Qualification Report The Presort Qualification report shows each sortation level, the num-ber of pieces for each, and the versions for each container. Versionsare identified by P for Periodicals, S for Standard Mail, or B for BoundPrinted Matter.

The Edition Legend prints at the top of the report, while a VersionSummary, which includes piece counts, prints at the end of thereport. Bundle totals are not included on this report. You can gen-erate them via the Mail Sort Listing report.

Mail Sort Listing and JobSummary

The Mail Sort Listing is included in the p_comail.pst template. Togenerate the Bundle report, you must set the Report Format para-meter to PKG or EXT.

Detailed Zone Listing To generate a Detailed Zone Listing report for your comail job, setthe Report Format parameter in the Report: ZIP Code Listingscheme to USPS. This report provides the information needed for aPeriodicals mailing about zone coverage, as documented in DMM207.17.4.

Address output file Address output file can be used with your own labeling software, orin your word-processing program. The software produces one outputrecord per mail piece.

NOTE You can use your Mail.dat tool to produce some postage statements.

User Guide | 168

Preventing and troubleshooting problems with Mixed-class comail

Comailing provides cost-saving opportunities for mailers, but introduces additional complexity intothe presorting process. Follow these guidelines to help prevent or correct problems.

Circumstance Caution or Solution

You use autodimensioning. If you attempt to run a comail job containing fewer than two dif-ferent classes of mail, Presort will not generate an error messageuntil the end of the run. You need to ensure that each autodi-mensioning comail job contains two or more different classes ofmail, since this is a USPS requirement.

You are preparing bundlesand containers with Presortand then using post-pre-sorting software to determ-ine an entry plan. (TheDestination Entry Knownparameter in Presort isunchecked or set to No.)

Review the results to ensure that pallets containing BPM in mixed-class comail will be entered only at the DSCF or DDU level. SincePresort doesn't "know" which pallets will be entered at the DNDClevel in this scenario, it can't exclude the ones containing BPM inmixed-class comail. If the results aren't suitable, you may need to fil-ter your input before running Presort.

BPM pieces are falling outof jobs.

BPM pieces can fall out of a presort due to USPS restrictions onBPM in mixed-class comail. If this happens, run those piecesthrough a second, BPM-only presorting round. If you use BCCIgnite®, you can set up your project to do this automatically.

User Guide | 169

SegmentingSegmenting is a way to divide a single job into separate mailings. You can use segmenting foralmost any reason and in any way that suits your needs.

There are two methods for setting up segments: automatic and manual.

CAUTION If you're just getting started with the software, we urge you to run simpler jobsbefore tackling segmenting.

Introduction to segmenting

When your job involves segmenting—dividing a single job into separate mailings—you have thesesetup tasks:

l Link your fields. You need some way to create a link between each input database recordand a segment. For most users, this means using some sort of a "segment code" field.

l Name the segment. Each segment needs some kind of a name. If you choose Automatic seg-menting, the software will assign names for you, so they may be less meaningful. If youchoose Manual setup, you can assign more meaningful names.

Prevent mingling of versions

If your mailing equipment does not support mingling, you could use segmenting to prevent ming-ling. With segmenting, the software keeps each version or edition separate, both in the mail streamand in reports.

However, if you have adequate room to accommodate pallets, we recommend that you use the bind-ery sets feature, especially if you use a combination of selective and non-selective binderies.

The bindery sets feature lets you control which versions are mingled or if any mingling occurs at all.Your mailings will likely be more dense and sort to higher levels because bindery lines will be co-pal-letized. Note that, because each pallet will contain packages from each bindery line, you will need alot of floor space to accommodate pallets as they wait for each bindery line to form packages.

For example, one of our users, a major news magazine, has a selective bindery. They produce demo-graphic editions of the magazine that also include a section (signature) of regional ads.

When you multiply the number of demographic editions times the number of regional signatures,you get more versions than the bindery's pockets can support. So each region takes its turn on thebindery, and the job is segmented by region. Within each regional segment, demographic editionsare mingled.

User Guide | 170

See Also

Bindery sets: Mingling selected versions

Pseudo entry points

A magazine publisher with a printing plant in Tennessee struck this deal with the local post office:To speed delivery, the publisher loads USPS trucks for direct transit to Philadelphia, Richmond, andWashington DC. The local office provides USPS trailers and drivers for immediate dispatch. Postageis paid based on entry at the Tennessee plant, so there is no zone-skipping involved.

This publisher doesn't set up the job using Philadelphia, Richmond, and Washington (DC) as entrypoints. If they did that in the usual way, the software would calculate postage as if the mail wereentered in those cities. Remember, postage is being paid from Tennessee.

Instead, the publisher sets up the job with Philadelphia, Richmond, and Washington as segments.Segmenting forces the software to separate the mail by city. Each segment is loaded in a separatetruck.

Stagger your mailing

The USPS considers each day's entry a separate mailing. However, large bindery runs may take morethan one day. You could use segmenting to divide the job into manageable amounts of mail per day.

Direct-mail advertisers often want to divide a job and stagger mailing dates, so that in-home datesare spread out a bit. This prevents logjams in fulfillment. By segmenting, you could run the entirejob at once, then mail each segment at your own pace. Often, that's easier than dividing the list andrunning it as several separate jobs.

Several "jobs" per job

One of our users is a printing plant that produces dozens of weekly newspapers. Each newspaperhas its own mailing list (input file) and is mailed separately; there is no mingling.

This plant could set up a separate job file for each newspaper. But that would be more work andmore files to manage. So instead, the printer sets up one job file every two weeks. In that job, eachinput file is a separate segment.

Separate mailings and reports

Each segment results in a separate legal mailing, with separate reports. For example, if you have twosegments, the software would automatically create one set of reports for each segment, eventhough you set up each type of report only once.

User Guide | 171

Think before segmenting

Before you use segmenting, consider that your criteria for dividing the mailing list into segmentsmight work toward postal efficiency, or might hamper it.

Not everyone should use segmenting. Don't use segmenting if you don't want the software to applythe same presort schemes, entry point(s), reports, and many other settings to all segments. Instead,you must divide your mailing list and run separate jobs.

Suppose you segment by something completely unrelated to geography or postal sortation—say,membership status. If you have to keep mail separated this way, that's absolutely fine. But be awarethat you may pay more postage, handle more containers, and get slower delivery than you would ifyou ran the same job without segmenting. This is because the software keeps segments separate,so overall, more mail may be sorted at the lower sort levels.

If you're considering using segmenting just to break the job into daily workloads, you might considerother alternatives:

l If you can drop-ship, it may be more efficient to divide the job by entry points, and not usesegmenting.

l You can presort your whole job at one time, but use on-demand reporting to create reportsfor each day's mailing. You'll get a more efficient presort mix and lower postage. You'll alsoget more flexibility, because with on-demand reporting you can determine each day's mailon that day.

Some people call on-demand reporting back-end segmenting. With (front-end) segmenting,you would have to plan ahead and determine each day's volume before running the presort.One crucial difference: segmenting forms whole mailings, while on-demand reporting canbreak up a mailing.

l If your mailing equipment does not support mingling, you could use segmenting to preventthe software from mingling. However, we recommend that you use the bindery sets feature.Bindery sets lets you control which versions are mingled or if any mingling occurs at all.

See Also

On-Demand Reporting

Bindery sets: Mingling selected versions

User Guide | 172

Automatic segmenting

The automatic method entails less Presort setup work.

To perform automatic segmenting

1. In your DEF file, set up an input field called PW.Segment_ID. As the software takes in eachrecord from your DEF file, it evaluates the PW.Segment_ID field. Each time it detects a newvalue in that field, it sets up a new segment internally. The name of each segment is thesame as the value found in the field. If Presort finds a record in which PW.Segment_ID is leftblank, it creates a segment named "blank".

Suppose that after scanning all your input records, the software finds that the PW.Segment_ID field contains the values N, S, E, and W. The software will automatically define four seg-ments, named N, S, E, and W.

2. Link your database for input to the software. For example, if your magazine comes inregional editions, your subscriber database might include an "Edition" field. The softwaredoes not require any particular values in this field. Your field might contain a one-digit code,fully spelled words, numbers, or whatever you like.

You must map or link the "Edition" field to the PW.Segment_ID input field by enteringPW.Segment_ID = DB.Edition in your DEF file.

3. If appropriate, use a constant value for the "segment code" field. For example, you might bea printing plant that produces dozens of weekly newspapers. Each newspaper has its ownmailing list (input file) and is mailed separately; there is no mingling.

This printer could set up a separate Presort job file for each newspaper. But that would bemore work, and more files to manage. So instead, the printer sets up one Presort job fileevery two weeks. In that job, each input file is a separate segment. In this case, it's appro-priate and easy to set up the PW.Segment_ID field based on a constant value. For eachinput file, all records will have the same value. Therefore all records will go into the samesegment.

Client A Client B Client C

Database a.dbf b.dbf c.dbf

DEF file a.def b.def c.def

DEF entry PW.Segment_ID="A" PW.Segment_ID="B" PW.Segment_ID="C"

User Guide | 173

Client A Client B Client C

Segmentname

A B C

4. Set the Action parameter in the Segment Defaults block to Auto. When you use the Autooption, you are not required to set up any Segment Descriptions in your job. However, youmay do so if you want. If you have Segment Description blocks, the software will still auto-matically create segments for any Segment_ID values that you don't set up.

Manually describing each segment

The manual method takes more setup work, but it gives you more control:

l You define the segments, letting you assign a meaningful name to each segment and havecontrol over the way segment codes are handled. That can help make reports and labelseasier to understand. In the Automatic method, the software assigns names, and names tendto be cryptic database codes.

l You have more control over the way that segment codes are handled. For example, when arecord contains a spurious value in the segment-code field, you can override that spuriousvalue and divert the record into one of your defined segments. This sort of control isn't pos-sible with the Automatic method.

Technically, it is possible to use a mixture of the automatic and manual methods. You can set upsome of your segments manually and still use the automatic feature to take care of other segments.

To manually set up segments

1. In your DEF file, set up an input field called PW.Segment_ID. When setting up segmentsmanually, you need some sort of "segment code" field in your input database(s) that indic-ated which segment is to be mailed to each customer.

2. For each segment you want to define, set up a Segment Description block. In the job file,repeat the Segment Description block as many times as necessary.

3. You need to link your database for input to the software. For example, if you have amagazine that comes in regional editions, your subscriber database might include an Editionfield. The software does not require any particular values in this field. Your Edition field

User Guide | 174

might contain a one-digit code, fully spelled words, numbers, or whatever you like.

When you present your database for input to the software, you must map or link the Editionfield to the PW.Segment_ID input field. To do this, you might enter PW.Segment_ID =DB.Edition in your DEF file.

4. Set the Action parameter in the Segment Defaults block to tell the software how to handleundetermined records. A link exists when each Segment Description includes one value forPW.Segment_ID. As the software evaluates each input record, it checks the PW.Segment_ID value. Then the software tries to match this value to one of the Segment Descriptions.

It's possible that the software won't match a PW.Segment_ID value with a Segment Descrip-tion. For example, the software might find a record in which the PW.Segment_ID field isempty, or contains a spurious value— that is, a value not among those you have defined inthe job. We call this an undetermined record.

How segments affect output files

Normally, when you create output files, the software outputs all segments in the order that theschemes appear in the job setup. You have several options for controlling this output behavior.

l If you would like to output only a selected segment (or segments), use the Output Selectionfeature. The particular option to look for is Select Segments To Output.

l To output each scheme to a separate output file, use the Create Files per Segment option.

l If you output all segments together in one file, you can control their sequence by using theAlternate Segment Sequence option.

l To change the mailstream hierarchy from the normal order of entry point, segment, andscheme, to make segment more dominant, use Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy.

l You might also want to use the Mailflow option called Print Nonpresort Pieces with Seg-ments.

See Also

Output selection

Split output

User Guide | 175

Introduction to Mailflow

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Output field to use when segmenting

You can include a field in your output file to identify a segment. Mailing crews and acceptanceclerks might appreciate this. You can use the following fields.

Field Content

PW.Segment_ID The segment code, passed through from your input file.

AP.Seg_No A segment number assigned by the software (1 to 9,999).

l If you used the manual method, the software will number segmentsin the order that your Segment Descriptions appeared in the jobfile.

l If you used the Auto Segment feature, the software will numbersegments in the order that it found values in your Segment_IDfield.

l If you used a combination of manual and automatic segmenting,the software will number the manual segments in the order thatyour Segment Descriptions appeared in the job file. Then it will con-tinue numbering automatic segments in the order that it found val-ues in your Segment_ID field.

User Guide | 176

Field Content

AP.Seg_Name A descriptive name up to 31 characters long.

l If you used the manual method, this field will contain the segmentname as you entered it in the Segment Description in the job file.

l If you used the Auto Segment feature, the software will use eachSegment_ID value as the segment name. If one of the Segment_IDvalues is blank or null, the software will assign the segment name"blank" (literally, the word "blank").

l If you used a combination of manual and automatic segmenting:For manual segments, this field will contain the segment name asyou entered it in the Segment Description in the job file. In the auto-matic segments, the software will use each Segment_ID value asthe segment name.

User Guide | 177

Firm packaging and multi-piece parcelsFirm packaging is a way to bundle pieces that are destined for the same company or school.

The software can prepare firm packages in Periodicals and multi-piece parcels in Package Servicesjobs. The incentive is that you pay only one per-piece charge for the whole package. So you save onper-piece charges, but you still pay normal postage per pound.

The USPS does not offer a postage incentive for firm packaging in First-Class or Standard Mail, sothe software does not support firm packaging in these classes.

Firm packages and multi-piece parcels are fundamentally the same. The difference is in the mailclass:

l We refer to "firm packages" when we are explaining Periodicals.

l We refer to "multi-piece parcels" when we are explaining Package Services jobs.

Periodicals firm packages

Firm packaging makes sense if you are mailing Periodicals in certain circumstances. The softwaresupports a couple of methods for forming firm packages: matching and copies. You can even usethem both in the same job.

Firm packaging by matching

You're mailing a trade journal or other business periodical. Most of your subscribers receive theircopy at the office. In some companies, you may have two or more subscribers. If you could bringtogether those pieces into a firm package, you could save postage.

If you use the matching method, you would have separate database records for each subscriber andthen count on the software to match them up.

Note that you would want an address label on each copy, identifying the subscriber. Your package isgoing to be opened in the mail room of the receiving company, and you need names on pieces.

Firm packaging by the copies

You're mailing a children's periodical. Your subscriber list consists of schoolteachers, and in eachrecord there is a field for the number of students (that is, copies). You want the software to generatethat number of copies, and keep all those copies together in one package.

User Guide | 178

If your pieces are large enough, or the number of copies is high enough, it's possible that a firm pack-age might exceed your maximum package size. In that case, the software will form two packagesdestined for the same firm.

The same story would apply, by the way, to a magazine being mailed to newsstands and other retailoutlets. The database contains one record for each store, each containing the number of copies thatstore ordered. It would be sensible and efficient to mail those copies as one package.

If using the copies method, you need the software to "multiply" each record by the number in the"copies" field.

The mail room is probably going to deliver the package whole. You would probably want just oneaddress label on the top piece in the package, or on a facing slip.

See Also

Forming firm packages using the matching method

Forming firm packages using the copies method

Forming firm packages using the matching method

IMPORTANT The matching method will increase the processing time for your job, comparedwith running the same job without matching. There is no escaping this, because you are givingthe program more work to do.

With the matching method, you'll have many records, but only one package. Let's assume you'remailing a trade journal or other business periodical. Most of your subscribers receive their copy atthe office. In some companies, you have two or more subscribers. You would like to bring togetherthose pieces into a firm package.

To form firm packages by using the matching method

You can use this method by itself, or use it with the copies method.

1. Define PW.Firm_ID, PW.ZIP, and PW.CART. To form firm packages by the matching method,the software does a rudimentary search for matching records. This search is based on two ofthe input fields, PW.Firm_ID and PW.ZIP. To place pieces in a firm package, the input data-base records must exactly match on both fields. Note that for walk-sequence jobs PW.CARTis also matched. It's entirely up to you to decide what data you will use in the PW.Firm_IDfield. Consider these points:

User Guide | 179

l If your database contains a discrete field for company name, you could use it. YourDEF file entry might look like PW.Firm_ID = DB.COMPANY.

l However, the software tests PW.Firm_ID only for exact matches. The slightest vari-ation in capitalization, spelling, or punctuation will throw it off. Those records wouldnot be placed in a firm package. Clearly, consistent data entry is essential.

2. Make sure that your company-name field is standardized.

3. If your mailing includes ride-along enclosures, the USPS requires that all pieces in a firmbundle have the same ride-along enclosure. To keep pieces with different enclosures frombeing bundled together, define the PW.Firm_ID field in the DEF file by using the input com-pany field plus the input ride-along enclosure code. For example, enter PW.Firm_ID =DB.Company + DB.RAE_Code.

See Also

Forming firm packages using the copies method

Ride-along enclosures

Forming firm packages using the copies method

When using the copies method, you'll have one record, many copies, and only one package.

As in previous firm-packaging examples, let's assume you're mailing a children's periodical. Your sub-scriber list consists of schoolteachers, and in each record there is a field for the number of students(which equates to copies). You want the software to generate that number of copies, and keep allthose copies together in one package.

NOTE If your pieces are large enough, or the number of copies is high enough, it's possiblethat a firm package might exceed your maximum package size. If you exceed your maximumpackage size, the software forms two packages destined to the same firm.

The same story would apply to a magazine being mailed to newsstands and other retail outlets. Thedatabase contains one record for each store, each containing the number of copies that storeordered. It would only be sensible and efficient to mail those copies as one package.

We call this firm packaging by the copies method. To form firm packages by the copies method, youneed to provide a database field containing the number of copies. It might be a numeric or a char-

User Guide | 180

acter-type field. Present your database field to the software as the input PW field PW.Copies. Forexample, you might enter PW.Copies = DB.Num_Copies or PW.Copies = DB.Students.

You may use the PW.Copies field, in any job, to generate multiple copies per record. Using PW.Cop-ies does not require that you also turn on firm packaging.

See Also

Forming firm packages using the matching method

Preparing of firm packages and multi-piece parcels

In Periodicals and Package Services jobs, the software makes firm packages and multi-piece parcelsand calculates postage on them in basically the same way. However, that's about where the sim-ilarities end.

In Package Services, the USPS does not provide set rules for multi-piece parceling, but they doallow mailers to prepare parcels made up of multiple pieces. We call these multi-piece parcels, butyou won't find any mention of that term in the USPS Domestic Mail Manual. That's because the USPSsees only the finished piece, which in their eyes is either an irregular parcel or a machinable parcelwith a single delivery address.

The table below may help you to see how firm packages and multi-piece parcels are alike and dif-ferent.

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Per-piececharges

Postage is paid as if the package wereone mail piece. So you save on per-piece charges, but you still pay normalpostage per pound.

Postage is paid as if the package wereone mail piece. So you save on per-piece charges, but you still pay normalpostage per pound.

Name Firm packages or firm bundles Multi-piece parcels

User Guide | 181

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Job setup Firm packages are an integral part ofyour Periodicals job. You can preparefirm packages, along with other mail, inone pass.

Most users run two jobs.

The first job forms the multi-piece par-cels, which are mailed as parcels at Pack-age Services rates (for those packagesthat meet the 1 pound min weightrequirement).

Remaining records are passed throughto the second job, which is prepared as anormal Standard mailing of letters orflats.

Schemes Firm packaging is available in these pre-sort schemes:

l PER, CART Regular Letters

l PER, Regular Letters

l PER, Flats

l PER, Packages on Pallets

l PER, Sack on Pallets

Firm packaging is not available in theautomated schemes because USPS sort-ing machines process individual pieces.

Multi-piece parcels are possible in thesePSVC presort schemes:

l BPM Machinable Parcels

l BPM Packages on Pallets

l BPM Machinable Parcels Pallet

l Media and Library, MachinableParcels

l Media and Library, MachinableParcels Pallet

l Media and Library

l Media and Library, Packages onPallets

l PSVC, Single Piece

l PSVC, BPM Irreg Parcels

User Guide | 182

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Preparationandprocessingcategory

Firm packaging is simply a special typeof package. A firm package made offlats remains in the same processing cat-egory—it is a package of flats. Same forletters. In the job file, as in USPS rules,firm packaging is an optional sort level.You control it through options in the pre-sort schemes, the same way that youmight control 3-digit carrier-route trays.Look for the options named Create FirmPackages and Minimum Firm Package.

A multi-piece parcel is, to the USPS, asingle parcel. The USPS does not knowor care that the parcel contains (as yousee it) two or more copies.

Though the individual pieces in a firmpackage might be flats, the processingcategory of the package is either mach-inable or irregular parcel. Use the Multi-Piece Parcel Description block to definea new type of mail piece. The Multi-Piece Parcel Description serves a pur-pose similar to the Version Description.

If you shrink-wrap or box your parcels,they should be machinable. If you usestraps or bands, and there are open orunwrapped corners, then your parcelsmay be irregular. See your postmaster orUSPS account representative for details.

User Guide | 183

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Postagerate

Firm packages are formed near thebeginning of job processing. If the jobincludes a carrier-route scheme, the soft-ware checks whether you have sixpieces for the route. Remember that forthis purpose, a firm package counts asone piece. Any combination of firmpackages and ordinary copies is suf-ficient to meet the six-piece minimum.

Firm packaging is not permitted in Auto-mation presorts. So in letter mailings,the software drops any remaining firmpackages "through" the Automationscheme to the Regular scheme.

NOTE This "dropping" featuredoes not apply to the Periodicals,Packages on Pallets scheme. In thatscheme, the software can placefirm, carrier-route, automation, andregular packages on the same pal-let. In a multiple-version job, therate for the package is based on thepiece that has the highest rate (theversion with the largest percentageof advertising).

Rate is assigned as usual for machinable,irregular parcels, or barcoded mach-inable parcels. It is based on package,sack, or pallet level, depending on thescheme you are using.

User Guide | 184

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Reports On some reports, you can find columnsof statistics labeled "Pieces" and "Cop-ies." A firm package is counted as onepiece (for postage), but the Copiescolumn shows the total number of indi-vidual mail pieces.

On the Mail Sort Listing, you can findcolumns of statistics labeled "Pieces"and "Copies." A multi-piece parcel iscounted as one piece (for postage), butthe Copies column shows the total num-ber of individual mail pieces.

The Copies column does not appear onthe USPS Qualification Report. A multi-piece parcel is counted as one Piece,period. The software does not report thenumber of individual copies within amulti-piece parcel.

Addresslabel

The USPS requires only one addresslabel on the package; you do not haveto label individual copies. However, thesoftware offers three options:

One output record per copy (oneaddress label).

l One output record per package.

l One output record per inputrecord.

Your choice may depend on how youstrap packages. In the job, you'll findthese options in the window calledAddress Output File. Also refer to theLabel Studio documentation for relatedoptions.

The USPS requires only one addresslabel on the package; you do not have tolabel individual copies. However, thesoftware produces one output record percopy. So for a multi-piece parcel of sixcopies, your Address Output File willcontain six records, and you will nor-mally have six address labels.

User Guide | 185

Key areas Periodicals Package Services

Multipleversions

The software offers a single "on/off"switch in the job file, which you can useto control whether or not the softwarewill mingle versions in firm packages.The parameter, Allow Multi-Version FirmPackages, is located in the VersionDefaults window. If you turn this switchoff, the software does not mingle ver-sions in firm packages. However, it willmingle versions in other packages.

If your mailing involves ride-alongenclosures, all copies in a firm bundlemust have the same ride-along enclos-ure. You can still mingle versions aslong as every piece in the mailing hasthe same enclosure. If different versionshave different enclosures, you cannotmingle them. If you use the Bindery Setsfeature, the software will mingle ver-sions, but only within each bindery.

The software normally mingles versionsin multi-piece parcels.

Permit You do not need any special USPS per-mit to prepare firm packages.

You do not need any special USPS per-mit to prepare multi-piece parcels. Youpay an annual presort fee for StandardMail and Package Services Media andLibrary, but there is no additional annualfee for Package Services BPM & Lib/Me-dia.

DMMcitation

See DMM 700. None. The DMM does not specificallyaddress multi-piece parcels in PackageServices. A multi-piece parcel is, in theeyes of the USPS, a parcel of bound prin-ted matter, media, or library mail. TheUSPS does not care, and your doc-umentation will not show, that your par-cel consists of multiple pieces.

User Guide | 186

See Also

Setting up Standard Mail multi-piece parcels

Bundling Periodicals non-automated pieces

To bundle Periodicals non-automated pieces that are destined for the same company or school, dothe following:

1. In the Designer window, expand the Presort Scheme Setup Group. If you are setting up anew scheme, also expand the New Scheme group.

2. Double-click the scheme for which you want to set up firm packaging.

3. Click the Sortation Levels button and select the Firm Level option. Also consider theother sortation levels that you want the software to use to attempt to keep the FRM pack-ages together (for example, the 3-digit and Mixed ADC levels). Click OK.

4. In the Presort Scheme setup window, click the Package Makeup button. In the Firm box,type the minimum number of pieces required to form a firm package.

5. If you want to create multi-version firm packages, go to the Version Defaults block and selectAllow Multi-Version Firm Packages.

6. To create one label for each firm package or one label for each piece in the package, postdata to an Address Output File.

Setting up Standard Mail multi-piece parcels

In Standard Mail, the USPS does not allow firm packaging. However, if you are preparing a StandardMail job that involves many instances of multiple pieces destined for the same address, you may beable to benefit from lower postage by mailing those pieces as a Package Services multi-piece par-cels mailing.

For example, suppose you are preparing a business-to-business mailing of Standard Mail flats. Yourmailing list includes several people in the same company, as in our first example. You skim off thosepieces and mail them at far lower postage as a Package Services job. Then you prepare the rest ofthe mailing list as usual, as a Standard Mail job.

This preparation is more work than mailing the whole list in as a Standard Mail job. But the postageincentive may make it worthwhile. It depends on how many multi-piece parcels you can make.

User Guide | 187

To prepare multi-piece parcels in Standard Mail

1. Set up two job files. Note that both jobs should contain the same Version Descriptions andEntry Point Descriptions. The jobs differ in other respects, such as class of mail, presortschemes, and reports.

Job Description

#1 The first job must call out the "firm" packages, which are mailed as parcels at Pack-age Services rates.This job may contain one or more of these schemes:

l BPM Machinable Parcels

l BPM Packages on Pallets

l BPM Machinable Parcels Pallet

l Media and Library, Machinable Parcels

l Media and Library, Machinable Parcels Pallet

l Media and Library

l Media and Library, Packages on Pallets

l PSVC, Single Piece

l PSVC, BPM Irreg Parcels

This job must contain the completed Multi-Piece Parcel Description block. Fordetails about setting these parameters, see to the Job-File Reference.

#2 The second job takes the remaining records from Job #1 and prepares the pieces asa normal Standard mailing of flats or machinable parcels.Job #1 contains the Multi-Piece Parcel block, so the software automatically formsonly multi-piece parcels. All other records fall into the Qualified Nonpresort orUnqualified section. These records go into the Standard job (Job #2), and you mustseparate them from the Package Services portion.

2. Separate the multi-piece parcels from the rest of the job with one of these methods:

User Guide | 188

l Split Output by Scheme

l Output Selection

l Input Posting

CAUTION If you will use the copies method in both jobs, select the Input Post-ing option. If you were to use copies with either of the other two options, youmight have a problem with the software applying the copies method twice.

See Also

Forming firm packages using the copies method

Split output by scheme

You can create address output files using the split-by-scheme.

The software prepares three or four address output files: One or two for the presort portion, one forqualified nonpresort, and one for unqualified. The presorting file contains the multi-piece parcels;use the other two files (qualified nonpresort and unqualified) as input for the second job.

NOTE If you ask the software to do so (at the Create DEF File option in the Create File for Out-put window), it will create a DEF file (pst_adr.def) and, if the output files are ASCII, an FMTfile (pst_adr.fmt). Rename these files as necessary. Remember to edit the DEF file anddefine PW fields.

See Also

Split output

Output selection method

The output selection method lets you take a Package Services job and create separate address out-put files in two passes.

1. On the first pass, enable Select Presort Pieces in Output Selection block to limit output topresorted pieces only. Only the multi-piece parcels will be output. Use this Address outputfile to prepare your multi-piece parcels.

2. On the second pass, output the rest of the records by using Qualified and Unqualified Non-Presort pieces in the Output Selection block. The file you make this time becomes the input

User Guide | 189

for the second job.

NOTE If you ask the software to do so (use the Create DEF File option in the Create Filefor Output window), it will create a DEF file and, if the output files are ASCII, an FMT file.Remember to edit the DEF file and define PW fields.

Set up input posting

To set up input posting for Standard Mail multi-piece parcels

1. In your Package Services job, navigate to the Input Posting block. Place a mark in those inputrecords that are included in a multi-piece parcel. Use that same field for an Input File Filter inthe Standard Mail job.

2. In the Set Input File window, enter the name and location of the input file.

3. Enter an input filter. For example, EMPTY{DB.PKG_BREAK}.

CAUTION When you perform input posting, the software automatically deletes itswork files. Make sure that you have all the reports you need from the Package Servicesjob before running input posting

Single piece preparation for BPMmulti-piece parcels

When you process Package Services (PSVC) bound printed matter (BPM) multi-piece parcels, thesoftware sorts any non-presorted parcels at the PSVC single-piece rate instead of dropping the par-cels out of the sortation.

To use single piece preparation

1. Include a PSVC Multi-Piece Parcel Description block in your job setup.

2. Set up a PSVC, BPM/MEDIA & LIB Mach Parcels scheme (requires 300 parcels).

3. Set up a PSVC, Single Piece scheme for the leftover parcels (less than 300 parcels).

You can follow up your Package Services multi-piece parcel job with a Standard Mail flats job to pro-cess any of the individual pieces (qualified non-presort) that didn't qualify for a parcel in the first job.These pieces will mail at the Standard Mail flats rate.

NOTE The Prepare BPM Barcoded Flats parameter setting is ignored in the single-piecescheme because the job is for machinable parcels.

User Guide | 190

See Also

Preparing of firm packages and multi-piece parcels

Institutional firming

You can send Periodicals mail class materials to a business or educational institute by using thename of the business or institute as the firm ID. This cannot be used for mixed class comail jobs.This makes it easier to distribute Periodicals material and it can save you money by significantly redu-cing bundle charges.

To turn on this feature, use the PER Allow Institutional Firming parameter in the USPS Optional Pro-cedures block.

For example, you might be sending educational magazines to a school. Presort allows you to usethe firm ID (the name of the school), a firm group (classroom within the school), and break mark indic-ators (hash marks) to create and shrink-wrap copies for each group inside of a firm bundle. You mustdefine both the Firm_ID and the Firm_GrpID input fields in your .def file.

As a result of using this feature, Presort may create more physical bundles. Presort tried to grouptogether all of the copies that are going to the same firm group in the same physical firm bundle. Ifthe firm copies exceed the max package thickness, Presort splits the bundle in such a way as tokeep the firm groups together.

User Guide | 191

PW field

To specify the firm group within a firm bundle, you must use the firm group ID PW field (PW.Firm_GrpID). This field ensures that all copies for the same group end up in the same physical firmbundle.

For example, you could input a teacher's name (such as "Smith"), or the grade level (such as "3"). Pre-sort trims any blank spaces and leading zeroes before or after the value.

AP fields

Use the following AP fields to indicate the first and last record belonging to the firm group (forexample, a classroom):

Output field Description

AP.Firm_Grp_F Indicates with a hash mark (#) that the record is the first in the firm group.

AP.Firm_Grp_L Indicates with a hash mark (#) that the record is the last in the firm group.

These fields will be filled in only for records that are part of a firm bundle. In addition, fields are avail-able in the Address Output file only.

Multiple components in a single version

For Periodicals mail only, you can create separate components in a version. For example, if you aresending materials to a school, you can create components for a teacher (for example, a book), a stu-dent (for example, a worksheet), and one for any extra pieces (for example, a poster).

NOTE Presort will always set the Periodicals advertising percent in the Component record(.cpt) to zero for multiple components.

The first Version Description block you will need to create is for the teacher. This version would con-tain one teacher component (book), one student component (worksheet), and a poster. The secondVersion Description block would contain a student component (a worksheet) and an extra piece com-ponent (poster). The teacher might get all three components, while a student would get only two,and so on.

User Guide | 192

Mail.dat information

Presort creates a separate Component record (.cpt) for each component in a version, and the totalsfor the components (for example, weight or thickness) can be found in the Mail Piece Unit (.mpu)record.

For example, here is the data that would go into the Component Record:

Mail Piece Unit ID Component record ID Rate type Weight Host ComponentRecord ID

00001 CPT1 R = Regular(US/MEX/CAN)

1.0000 CPT2

User Guide | 193

Mail Piece Unit ID Component record ID Rate type Weight Host ComponentRecord ID

00001 CPT2 R = Regular(US/MEX/CAN)

0.7500 CPT2

Here is the data that would go into the Mail Piece Unit record:

Mail Piece Unit ID Weight

00001 1.7500

If the weight of any component changes after you presort a job, you can easily change the weight inthe Mail.dat by using post-sortation software, like our Monticello MAILdbTMproduct.

NOTE Presort will always set the advertising percent in the Component record (.cpt) to zero.

Ride Alongs, RPNs, and 1C Incidentals

When using Ride Alongs, RPNs, or 1C Incidentals, Presort populates the Host Statement ComponentID field in the MPU / C - Relationship Record (.mcr) file with the ID of the host piece.

The table below shows you how Presort populates the MCR record:

MPU ID CPT ID Hose CPT ID Description

00001 00000001 000000001 Main piece

00001 00001RAE 000000001 Ride Along

00001 00001INC 000000001 First-Class Incidental

00001 00001RPN 000000001 Repositionable Notes

Setting up multiple components

To set up a multiple component version:

1. Define your components in the Component Description block. You need to populate the fol-lowing parameters:

User Guide | 194

Parameter Description

Name Enter the name of the component. For example, Teacher Component

ID Enter an ID for the component. This ID cannot contain a comma or a quo-tation mark. For example, you can use teacher_cpt, but not teacher,cpt.

Height

Width

Enter the height and width of the component. According to the USPS:"The external dimensions of a supplement (its length and height) may notexceed those of the host publication except when the host publicationand the supplement are contained in an envelope, polybag, or other com-plete wrapper..."When you have more than one component with unique Height andWidth parameter settings, the software takes the largest value from allthe components and prints that value on the Job Summary report.

SampleNumber ofPieces

Enter the number of component pieces in a sample.

Note: The Sample Number of Pieces parameter on the Job Summaryreport always shows as 1 when you use multiple components in a ver-sion. The version dimensions are calculated based on the componentsthat make up the version.

SampleThickness

SampleWeight

Enter the weight (ounces) and thickness (inches) of the componentpieces.

Note:When using components, you do not need to include the value ofthe PER Incidental 1C Wt parameter in your sample weight calculation.The software automatically adds in the PER Incidental 1C Wt parametervalue during processing.

2. List the components in your version.

l In job-file, use the PER IDEA Component IDs parameter in the Version Descriptionsblock to enter a comma separated list of Component ID field names. For example,you might enter teacher_cpt, student_cpt, piece_cpt, and so on. Pre-sort uses the first component you list as the host component.

l In Views, use the Components to Process window to organize existing components.To access this window, click the Component IDs button in the Version Descriptionwindow.

User Guide | 195

PolybagsA static polybag is a user-defined grouping of periodicals versions shipping to the same address,combined in a polybag to provide savings on postage. (Dynamic polybagging would be a system inwhich the presorting software automatically identifies periodicals shipping to the same address andcombines them in a polybag. Dynamic polybagging is not currently supported in Presort, butBCC Software plans to leverage the static polybag capability in Presort to add a dynamic poly-bagging feature in BCC Ignite®.)

Polybag creation is supported in three presort schemes: PER, Packages on Pallets; PER, Sacks on Pal-lets; and PER, Flats.

NOTE Static polybagging is not a standard feature of Presort, but is available as an optionaladd-on. For more information, contact your BCC Software Sales Representative.

Creating Static Polybags

To Create Polybagged Periodicals using Static Polybag Versions

1. Create a job using one of the following presort schemes:

l PER, Packages on Pallets

l PER, Sacks on Pallets

l PER, Flats

2. Create the base versions in your job. For example, suppose you are mailing two periodicals,Blue magazine and Red magazine, that have some overlap in their subscriber lists. In orderto create polybagged versions containing both periodicals (or even multiple versions of oneperiodical), you must first create one version for each periodical in Presort.

The processing category must be set to Automated Flat or PER Alternative Automated Flat.

When you specify the weight of the mail piece, you should add one-half the weight of thepolybag (just the plastic bag itself, not the total weight of bag plus periodicals) to the normalweight of the piece.

IMPORTANT The weight of the polybag, though slight, must be accounted for. TheUSPS suggests adding one-half the weight of the polybag to each version. In somecases, this may result in a slight overpayment based on weight, but this should be fairlyinsignificant, and it will help prevent issues with acceptance of your mailing by the

User Guide | 196

USPS.

3. Create each polybag version.

In Views: Create a polybag version

a. Under Version Setup, double-click PER Static Polybag Version Description: New.

b. In the Version Name field, type a descriptive name for this polybag version.

c. In the Version_ID Field Value field, type the value (data) that will identify a record inthe customer database as receiving this polybag version. The software does notrequire any particular values in this field; your field might contain a one-digit code,fully spelled words, or numbers, for example. Use alphanumeric characters, dashes,underscores, and spaces only; the software won't accept special characters in thisfield.

When you present your database for input to the software, this field must map towhichever field in your database indicates the version each customer receives. Yourentry on this line must match exactly the data in the Version_ID field of your inputdatabase, even the case (uppercase and/or lowercase).

d. From the list in the Defined Base Versions box, select the first version you wouldlike to include in the polybag, then click Add --->. (If you need to make a change, usethe Remove <-- button.) For your convenience, each version is listed by both nameand field value, separated by a comma (for example, B, Blue).

e. Repeat Step D until the Base Versions in Polybag field reflects the desired contentsof your polybag. The software supports 2–5 items per static polybag (which could beone copy of each of several different periodicals, multiple copies of one periodical, orsome other combination of different versions and copies).

In the example shown below, one Blue version and one Red version create a polybagversion that we'll call Purple.

User Guide | 197

NOTE A polybag may contain more than one copy of a version. The list in theBase Versions in Polybag box should have one instance of the version name foreach copy of the version you want to include in the polybag. For example, thesetup below is for a polybag containing two copies of the Blue version and onecopy of the Red version.

User Guide | 198

In Job File: Create a polybag version

a. Include the PER Static Polybag Version Description block in your job; you can copythis block from the master.pst file.

b. At the Version Name parameter, type a descriptive name for this polybag version (upto 31 characters long).

c. At the Value in PostWare Field Version_ID parameter, type the value (data) that willidentify a record in the customer database as receiving this polybag version. The soft-ware does not require any particular values in this field; your field might contain aone-digit code, fully spelled words, or numbers, for example. Use alphanumeric char-acters, dashes, underscores, and spaces only; the software won't accept special char-acters in this field.

When you present your database for input to the software, this field must map towhichever field in your database indicates the version each customer receives. Yourentry on this line must match exactly the data in the Version_ID field of your inputdatabase, even the case (uppercase and/or lowercase).To indicate a blank field, typetwo consecutive apostrophes (single-quote marks like this: ' ').

User Guide | 199

d. At the Base versions in polybag parameter, type the Version_IDs of the base ver-sions to be included in this polybag, separated by a comma. The software supports2–5 pieces per static polybag (which could be one copy of each of several differentperiodicals, multiple copies of one periodical, or some other combination of differentversions and copies).

In the example shown below, one Blue version (B) and one Red version (R) togethermake a polybag version that we'll call Purple.

BEGIN PER Static Polybag Version Description==================Version Name (to 31 chars)........... = PurpleValue in PostWare Field Version_ID... = PBase versions in polybag (See Note).. = B, REND

NOTE A polybag may contain more than one copy of a version. The Base Ver-sions in Polybag parameter should contain one instance of the version ID foreach copy of the version you want to include in the polybag. For example, thesetup below is for a polybag containing two copies of the Blue version and onecopy of the Red version.

BEGIN PER Static Polybag Version Description==================Version Name (to 31 chars)........... = IndigoValue in PostWare Field Version_ID... = IBase versions in polybag (See Note).. = B, B, REND

Polybag Details

ANote on "Copies" vs. "Pieces"

At one time, the terms copies and pieces were used more or less interchangeably in the Presort userinterface and documentation. However, with polybags, there is a need to make a distinction.

User Guide | 200

l A polybag (including its contents) is considered a piece.

l The items within a polybag are referred to as copies. One of these copies will be assignedthe piece charge. Exception: If the polybag is itself contained within a firm bundle, the piececharge might be assigned to a copy within this polybag or to a copy in the same firm bundlebut not in this polybag.

l A single periodical that's mailing without a polybag is both a piece and a copy.

Piece Charges and Advertising Percentages

The piece charge for each polybag version is assigned to the periodical with the highest ad per-centage. Exception: When the polybag contains a mixture of Classroom/Nonprofit periodicals andother types of periodicals, then the Classroom/Nonprofit periodicals will not get the piece charge; itwill be assigned to whichever of the remaining periodicals has the highest ad percentage.

CAUTION

l In the unlikely event that two periodicals in a polybag are tied for highest ad percentage,Presort will generate a warning. In this case, we suggest that you arbitrarily increase thead percentage of one of the periodicals by 0.01%.

l If you need to adjust the ad percentage after presorting, proceed with care. Since ad per-centage is used to determine piece charges within a polybag, changing the ad percentageafter presorting could cause a problem. If the ad percentage needs to change after the ini-tial presort, you can either (1) Do a full re-presort to make sure everything is correct, or (2)Use Post Presort to modify the ad percentages in the Mail.dat.

NOTE You can create firm bundles containing polybags. The software assigns the piececharge to the periodical with the highest ad percentage in the whole bundle (or in some cases,to the periodical with the highest ad percentage among those that are not Classroom/NonprofitPeriodicals, as explained above).

Calculation of Dimensions for Polybag Versions

Dimension in Polybag Version How it is Calculated

Polybag thickness The sum of the thicknesses of all copies in the polybag

Polybag weight The sum of the weights of all copies in the polybag

User Guide | 201

Dimension in Polybag Version How it is Calculated

Polybag Calc. volume The height of the tallest base version, multiplied by thewidth of the widest base version, multiplied by the polybagthickness

Reports

Postage statements are not fully supported for static polybags.

CAUTION If your job contains polybags, you can use the postage numbers in reports as anestimate of your postage costs, but these numbers may not be exact. Please use your post pre-sorting software or PostalOne! to generate postage statements for polybag jobs.

Reports may use the terms copies and pieces in a different way than you are accustomed to; fordetails, please see A Note on "Copies" vs. "Pieces" .

Output Files

The Address output file generates a single record for each polybagged piece, not for each poly-bagged copy.

Firm Bundles

You can create jobs containing both firm bundles and polybags. You can even create firm bundlescontaining polybags.

Subscribers and Nonsubscribers in Polybag Versions

For periodicals that aren't polybagged, the field PW.Subscriber is used to indicate subscriber vs.nonsubscriber status. By default, the software assumes all copies are going to subscribers.

For input records that are polybags, subscription status for the various copies in each polybag canbe indicated via the following 10 fields:

l The Subscriber Version fields: PW.SubVer1, PW.SubVer2, PW.SubVer3, PW.SubVer4,PW.SubVer5

l The Subscriber Status fields: PW.SubStat1, PW.SubStat2, PW.SubStat3, PW.SubStat4,PW.SubStat5

IMPORTANT As with non-polybag periodicals, recipients are presumed to be subscribers

User Guide | 202

unless otherwise indicated. If all copies in your job are known or assumed to be mailing to sub-scribers, you do not need to use the PW.SubStat and PW.SubVer fields.

NOTE All of the base versions within a polybag version must be set to the same Periodical Sub-scriber Option in the Version Description: Assume All, Assume None, or Count Under. (In JobFiles this is the PER Subscriber Option in the Version Description Defaults Block; in Views thisis the Subscriber Option accessed by clicking the Periodical button under Additional Optionson the Version Description Defaults dialog box.) If this is not the case, Presort will generate anerror message.

You cannot use the Count Over Subscriber Option in a static polybag job.

Set up your job to track subscription status within polybags

If you need to indicate subscriber or non-subscriber status for each copy, add PW.SubVer andPW.SubStat fields to your DEF file, as well as to your format file (if required for the type of databaseyou use). You will add one PW.SubVer and one PW.SubStat field for each copy in your largest poly-bag (assuming you are tracking subscription status for all copies). Your database will also need tohave corresponding fields.

To help illustrate the use of these fields, let's suppose a mailer is preparing a mailing that includesthe two polybag versions we showed earlier:

l The Purple polybag, containing one copy each of the Blue and Red periodicals

l The Indigo polybag, containing two copies of the Blue periodical and one copy of the Redperiodical

We'll step through the process of updating the DEF and format files to support these fictional poly-bag versions, then show what a few of the database records might look like. For more generalinformation about preparing your database for Presort, please refer to the Database Prep Guide.

Step 1: Add and define the SubVer and SubStat fields in the DEF file

Add the PW.SubVer and PW.SubStat fields to your DEF map file, using either a text editor orDEFMAP.

l Map each PW.SubVer field to the field in your database that specifies a base version in apolybag.

l Map each PW.SubStat field to the field in your database that indicates the subscriber statusfor that base version.

User Guide | 203

EXAMPLE Because the largest polybag version, Indigo, contains 3 copies, this user woulddefine 6 fields: 3 SubVer and 3 SubStat fields.

SubVer1 = subver_1SubStat1 = substat_1SubVer2 = subver_2SubStat2 = substat_2SubVer3 = subver_3SubStat3 = substat_3

If this user later created a larger polybag version, containing 4 copies, they would return to theDEF file to define the SubVer4 and SubStat4 fields; likewise the SubVer5 and SubStat5 fieldsif the largest polybag version had 5 copies.

NOTE If you're defining some but not all 10 fields, you must define them in ascending order—so you will always define the 1s (SubVer1, SubStat1), but you will only define the 5s (SubVer5,Substat5) if you have a polybag containing 5 copies and have already defined 1–4.

Step 2: Specify the characteristics of the corresponding fields in your database

Add your new database fields to your .fmt file.

EXAMPLE

subver_1,10,csubstat_1,1,csubver_2,10,csubstat_2,1,csubver_3,10,csubstat_3,1,c

NOTE

l If you are using logical fields, rather than character fields as shown in the example above,a value of T or Y will be interpreted as indicating a subscriber; all other values, includingblanks, will be interpreted as indicating a nonsubscriber.

l If you are using character fields, any non-blank character will be interpreted as indicating asubscriber. A blank will be interpreted as indicating a nonsubscriber.

User Guide | 204

EXAMPLE This is what the ends of the first few lines of data might look like in the database ofpolybag records that's just been mapped, assuming the SubVer_1 field is preceded by the Ver-sion_ID and Address fields. (Each dot represents a space.)

In the first line, you can see that the residents of 100 Nosuch Ave. are receiving a Purple poly-bag, containing a Blue periodical to which they subscribe, and a Red periodical to which theydo not subscribe (like all blank values in a SubStat character field, this blank is interpreted as anonsubscriber). On the second line is another Purple polybag, this time for a Blue nonsubscriberand a Red subscriber. On the third line is an Indigo polybag, containing a Blue nonsubscribercopy, a Blue subscriber copy, and a Red subscriber copy.

Polybag Limitations

The following are limitations of the static polybagging feature:

l You cannot create static polybags in comail jobs.

l You cannot use the Count Over Subscriber Option in a static polybag job.

l You cannot use binderies in a static polybag job.

l Base versions contained in a polybag cannot include ride-alongs.

l Name Optimizer cannot be turned on in a static polybag job.

l Institutional firming is not supported in static polybags.

l Static polybags are supported only in Mail.dat version 18-1 or higher.

No Mixing of Preferred and Non-Preferred Publications

CAUTION The USPS does not currently allow creation of a polybag containing a mix of pre-ferred and non-preferred publications—for example, a publication mailing at the regular ratetogether with one mailing at the nonprofit rate—because a flaw in the PostalOne! system wascausing the Preferred Price Discount to be applied to polybags that were not fully preferred.

User Guide | 205

The USPS intends to support this type of mixed polybag before the end of 2018, with aPostalOne! release. Until the USPS resolves this issue, they will reject polybag jobs containingboth preferred and non-preferred publications, issuing error code 4865. For details, refer tohttps://postalpro.usps.com/PostalOneR47.1.0.0PreReleaseChange3.0.

The Presort software does not prevent you from creating a polybag containing both preferred andnon-preferred publications.

User Guide | 206

Carrier-sequence mailing: LOT and walk sequenceCarrier-sequence mailing means preparing mail in the same order that the letter carrier walks ordrives the route. This preparation saves the carrier a lot of time in the office, so the USPS gives anattractive postage discount.

The software supports two kinds of carrier-sequence mailings. Their common names are:

l LOT (line of travel)

l Walk sequence

These two carrier-sequence mailing types are not the same. LOT is appropriate if you have enoughmailing density for carrier-route sorting (basically, a package of 10 pieces per route for Standard Mail;6 pieces for Periodicals), but less than 125 pieces per route.

Walk sequencing requires more work on your mailing list, and higher mailing density (more piecesper route).

For more information, refer to USPS publications, including the Domestic Mail Manual.

If your bindery equipment stacks pieces "upside down"

Some mailers' bindery equipment creates packages by stacking mail pieces from the bottom up. Inthis case, the first mail piece in a package ends up on the bottom of the package. If you own thistype of equipment, you must reverse the order of the output so that the first mail piece in a packageends up on top. The software can do this for you automatically.

To reverse the order of the output

In your job, look in the carrier-route presort scheme(s) for an option called Reverse Piece Sequencein Walk Sequence or LOT Packages.

If you turn on this option, the software reverses the sequence of pieces within each package. It hasno effect on the sequence of packages or anything else. This option affects only carrier-route pack-ages; it has no effect on any other packages.

Line-of-travel (LOT) sequencing

With LOT sequencing, the software sorts pieces by a LOT number, which represents a block face,the ZIP+4, and the DPBC in the direction that the carrier walks the route.

User Guide | 207

LOT is a simplified form of carrier sequencing. LOT is easier and requires less density (that is, fewerpieces per route) than true walk sequencing. You'll pay less to prepare your mailing list for LOT pro-cessing, as compared with walk sequencing. However, postage for LOT mailings is a little higher.

Line-of-travel (LOT) sequencing applies to:

l Periodicals basic carrier-route schemes

l Standard Mail enhanced carrier route regular letters or flats schemes

In fact, with these mailings, the USPS requires that you use either LOT or walk-sequencing.

See Also

Combining walk sequence and line-of-travel carrier route mail

Prepare your mailing list for LOT processing

To prepare your mailing list for LOT processing, you can use the Postalsoft ACE program (AddressCorrection and Encoding). Postalsoft ACE can assign numerical codes that the software needs forLOT processing.

LOT is a number, assigned sequentially within each carrier route, to indicate the sequence of deliv-ery stops. Like ZIP+4 codes, LOT numbers often are assigned to a whole block face. Within eachblock face, the direction of travel is indicated by the LOT_Order field—either an "A" for Ascending(0–9) or a "D" for Descending (9–0).

1. In your Postalsoft ACE job, append two LOT fields to each record. You also need the ZIP+4and Delivery Point Barcode (DPBC) fields.

2. The names of the LOT fields vary slightly as you go through the Postalsoft ACE and Presortjob setups. In your database, we recommend that you call the fields simply LOT and LOT_Order. You can have Postalsoft ACE append these fields for you.

3. Fill the database fields by inserting, or posting, two Postalsoft ACE output fields: AP.LOT andAP.LOT_Order.

4. Set up your database fields for input to the software. In your definition (*.def) file, yourentries might look like these:

PW.LOT = LOTPW.LOT_Order = LOT_Order

User Guide | 208

PW.DPBC = DPBCPW.CART = CARTPW.ZIP = ZIPPW.ZIP4 = ZIP4

If you're not sure what PW fields or definition files are, read the Database Prep manual.

LOT field example

To sequence pieces for the carrier's line of travel, the software sorts pieces first by LOT—whichoften means that pieces are sorted by block face.

Then within each LOT group (block face), the software sorts ZIP+4 and DPBC—in effect, on the lasttwo digits of the house number. The direction of this second sort is indicated by LOT_Order ("A" forAscending (0–9) or a "D" for Descending (9–0)).

NOTE If you are using Postalsoft ACE or BCC Architect for Job files, a code of 0000 isassigned to those records that have not yet been assigned a LOT code by the USPS; forexample, new housing developments. When the software finds the 0000 code in the LOT codefield, it drops the piece to the end of the carrier route and sorts those pieces by ascendingZIP+4 order.

Lot field values:

LOT LOT order

0001 A

0002 A

0003 D

0004 A

0005 D

0006 D

0007 A

0008 D

User Guide | 209

For example, consider a carrier delivering around the four-way intersection. Then line-of-travelsequence would be expressed in the following sequence of codes:

The addresses would then be sorted in the following sequence:

1. 133 Main

2. 137 Main

3. 141 Main

4. 800 Elm

5. 804 Elm

6. 805 Elm

7. 801 Elm

User Guide | 210

8. 201 Main

9. 205 Main

10. 209 Main

11. 208 Main

12. 204 Main

13. 200 Main

14. 757 Elm

15. 753 Elm

16. 752 Elm

17. 756 Elm

18. 140 Main

19. 136 Main

20. 132 Main

Introduction to walk-sequenced mailing

Walk-sequencing means that pieces are presented in the order that the carrier drives or walks his orher route.

User Guide | 211

There are two postage-rate categories of walk-sequenced mail.

Category Rate

Saturation Lowest available walk-sequence rate. You must have enough pieces tomeet either of these criteria:

l 90 percent of all residential delivery points.

NOTE "Delivery point" does not mean an individual addressor piece. Consider an apartment or office building in whichseveral addresses are served by a rack of mailboxes; that rackis one delivery point. Two pieces going to the same home(say, one for each spouse) would count as only one deliverypoint.

l 75 percent of all delivery points

High density The high density rate is lower than the rate for ordinary carrier-routemail.

For Standard Mail and Periodicals non-in-county rate mail, to qualify forthe high density rate, you must have at least 125 pieces for each route.

For Periodicals in-county rate mail, you must have either 125 pieces or25% of the total active possible deliveries.

High density plus The high density plus (HDP) price applies to Standard Mail letters andflats. To obtain the High Density Plus price, you must have 300 piecesgoing to a carrier route. Multiple pieces to a single stop can counttoward the minimum.

See Also

Combining walk sequence and line-of-travel carrier route mail

The Computerized Delivery Sequence file (CDS) and your mailing lists

The basis for walk sequencing is a large database produced by the USPS, called the ComputerizedDelivery Sequence file (CDS). It is basically a list of all addresses in the United States. So the USPSkeeps it confidential. The USPS distributes the CDS database only to a selected, carefully regulated

User Guide | 212

group of companies. The USPS licenses these companies to offer CDS-based services, includingwalk sequencing.

To prepare your mailing list for walk-sequence processing, you must send it out to a CDS vendor.For a list of CDS vendors, contact your USPS account representative or postmaster.

For details about CDS processing, refer to the CDS User's Guide, a publication of the USPS NationalCustomer Support Center in Memphis. That document can help you become an informed consumerof CDS services.

CDS fields

Your CDS vendor may append several new fields to each record in your database. Two of thosefields are useful in the software:

l The Delivery Sequence Number (DSN) is a 5-digit serial number used for sorting records intowalk sequence.

l The Business Indicator Code is a single letter (A, B, C, or D) that indicates whether theaddress is a business or a residence.

Type Value

Residential A

Business B

Primary Residential withBusiness

C

The software will read this value, but it will treat it as a res-idential value (A).

Primary Business withResidential

D

The software will read this value, but it will treat it as a busi-ness value (B).

How the software handles walk-sequenced mailing

In your job, both saturation and high-density mailings are handled through the same carrier-routepresort schemes.

User Guide | 213

In your carrier-route presort schemes, set the Retain Walk Sequence parameter to Yes. By turningthis option on, you present walk-sequenced records to the software as follows:

l Some mailers prefer to index their database by Delivery Sequence Number, then export afile especially for processing. In the exported file, records are physically in walk sequence,and the DSN field is omitted. If the records in your input file are physically in walk sequence,you can tell the software to keep them that way. That's why the parameter is called RetainWalk Sequence.

The software assumes that your input records are physically sorted to walk sequence. In prac-tice, this means that input records must be sorted by three keys: ZIP, CART, and DSN. Thesoftware may change the sequence of records at the route, ZIP, or other levels; but withineach route, it will keep records in the same sequence that they appeared in the input file.

l You can manage your database in any physical order you like, so long as you keep the CDSfields mentioned above. Present the Delivery Sequence Number (DSN) field to the softwareas the field PW.Walk_Seq. If the software does not find an entry in the Delivery SequenceNumber field in a record in your input file, it will drop that piece to automation rate.

To define this field, your entry in the DEF file might be "PW.Walk_Seq = DB.DSN". If you donot set up the PW.Walk_Seq field, the software assumes that you are taking the firstapproach.

Qualify for residential saturation rates

If you are trying to qualify for residential saturation rates, the software needs access to the value inthe Business Indicator field.

Present the Business Indicator field to the software as the field Bus_Ind.

Some CDS vendors do not supply a Business Indicator field. If your database does not include a Busi-ness Indicator field, set up a constant in your DEF file using the following values:

l A = Residential

l B = Business

l C = Primary Residential with Business. Presort will read this value, but will treat it as a res-idential value (A).

l D = Primary Business with Residential. Presort will read this value, but will treat it as a busi-

User Guide | 214

ness value (B).

l G = General delivery

Walk-sequence processing

The software automatically tries to qualify mail for the best possible rate based on density. The soft-ware does the following:

1. Determines the number of pieces. The software automatically determines whether you haveenough pieces to qualify for the saturation rate. That is, the software sifts out those routeswhere you meet the 75/90 rule. To calculate the percentage of saturation, the softwarerelies on a USPS database called the Delivery Statistics File. (We call it the DSF Directory.)That file lists the number of delivery points on each carrier route in the United States.

If you set up the User.Bus_Ind field, the software checks whether you have either 75 per-cent of total delivery points, or 90 percent of residential. If you do not provide this field, thesoftware can only check for 75 percent of total delivery points.

If you are certain that you meet the saturation requirement, you can turn off the software'sdensity checking. Refer to the Optional Procedures window in the job.

2. Qualifies pieces for high-density or high-density plus. The software tries to qualify remainingmail for the high-density rate. When you have fewer than 125 pieces per route, the softwarechecks the DSF file again. On some routes there are fewer than 125 delivery points; on them,the 125-piece minimum doesn't apply.

The high-density plus price tier applies to Walk Sequence Standard Mail letters and flats. Toobtain the High Density Plus price, you must have 300 pieces going to a carrier route. Mul-tiple pieces to a single stop can count toward the minimum.

3. Prepares non-qualifying pieces. With pieces that do not qualify for the high-density rate, thesoftware forms ordinary carrier-route packages at the usual minimum of 10 pieces. Walk-sequencing does not apply to these packages.

4. Prepares pieces that aren't walk-sequence. Records in which the software cannot find walk-sequence information are processed as automated or regular-rate pieces

Counting copies per delivery point

So that the software accurately counts delivery points, set up the PW field Firm_ID in your DEF file(s). For example: PW.Firm_ID = DB.CART + DB.DSN or PW.Firm_ID = COMPANY +

User Guide | 215

ADDRESS.

This setup ensures that your rate eligibility is correctly determined and your reports contain correctstatistics. For saturation eligibility, the software counts only one copy per delivery point. However,all copies will be mailed.

If you are using the Optional Procedures method, you may ignore this information. The job-file veri-fier issues a warning about the PW field Firm_ID that you can ignore.

Walk-sequencemailing limitations

If you have two or more input files, those files must not contain any overlapping ZIP Codes.

DPBC required for ECR walk-sequence letters

The USPS requires that certain Standard Mail pieces have a delivery-point barcode (DPBC) and mustbe automation-compatible. The requirement applies to Standard Mail Enhanced Carrier Route (ECR)letter-size pieces that are mailed at high-density or saturation walk-sequence letter rates.

When you prepare your mail this way, the USPS can merge your mail with other mail going to thesame carrier route in the same walk sequence.

Non-automation-compatible mail

If your pieces don't have the automation components to create a DPBC or they don't meet the auto-mation-compatible requirements, you can mail them at either the ECR basic rate for letters, or thenon-letter rates for walk sequence high density (WSH) or walk sequence saturation (WSS). Thesepieces have to be mailed in a separate mailing, and the mailing has to meet a separate volumerequirement.

Letter tray labels

Tray labels must show the processing category and contain the content identification number (CIN).The software outputs the CIN and the following USPS-required information for labels:

l MACH (machinable)

l MAN (nonmachinable or manual)

l BC (barcoded)

User Guide | 216

Here are the three processing categories and sample setups in the software.

Processingcategory

Sample setups

MACH When you use the 1C/STD Regular Letter scheme in your job, and you select theMachinable processing category, the software knows that your mailing is mach-inable and outputs MACH for the tray labels.

MAN When you use the 1C/STD Regular Letter scheme in your job, the software knowsthat your mailing is non-machinable and outputs MAN for the tray labels.

BC When you use the STD Automation Letter scheme in your job, the softwareknows that your mailing is barcoded and it outputs BC for the tray labels. There isno machinable setting is this scheme.

Simplified address tray labels

The tray labels for simplified addresses that are being mailed at the high density or saturation ratesmust include "MAN" to indicate that the pieces are nonmachinable.

Standard Mail letter walk-sequencing

Our scheme setup for Standard Mail letter walk-sequenced mail can save you money by processingcertain walk-sequenced, enhanced carrier route mail pieces at saturation, high density, or high dens-ity plus rates.

The advantage of this scheme setup is that your walk-sequenced and automated enhanced carrierroute (WS and auto carrier route basic) pieces can get saturation/high density/high density plus(SAT/HD/HDP) or automated carrier route basic rates. The special scheme setup allows you toinclude automated ECR mail with WS ECR mail in the same job. In addition, the setup enables thesoftware to process carrier route basic pieces at the 5-digit automated rate.

CAUTION Your mail will not receive SAT/HD/HDP rates if it does not comply with all USPS eli-gibility rules for SAT/HD/HDP walk-sequenced mail. It is up to you to make sure that your mail-ing is in compliance.

The way the software attempts to save you postage with the Standard Letter WS setup is twofold:

l The software attempts to move auto ECR pieces that are eligible for SAT/HD/HDP rates toregular ECR where they will receive the SAT/HD/HDP rate.

User Guide | 217

l The software attempts to drop carrier route basic rate pieces to the auto 5-digit rate.

To setup this scheme, you need to include the STD, Enhanced Carrier Route Regular Lettersscheme in your job.

TIP To palletize your trays, include the STD, Letter Trays on Pallets scheme in your job.

The parameter you use for this setup, Optimize ECR Basic to Automation , is present in the STD Let-ter Trays on Pallets scheme.

NOTE The Optimize ECR Basic to Automation parameter is not part of the postage optim-ization feature that you turn on in the Execution block.

Tips for setting up STD Letter walk sequencing

There are several setup steps to make this processing work. However, the success of the setuprelies on:

l Scheme order

l Job setup correlations

Scheme order

The scheme order in your job setup is crucial for this type of processing. Therefore, make sure whenyou set up your jobs that you place the two ECR schemes and an applicable tray scheme in thisorder:

l STD, Enhanced Carrier Route Regular Letters

l STD, Automation Letters

Job setup correlations

When you set up for this type of processing, make sure that your job includes these combinations ofsettings.

Scheme Parameter and setting Correlation

STD Letterschemes

Retain Walk Sequence = Y Create 3DG Carrier Route Traysmust be set to Y.

User Guide | 218

Scheme Parameter and setting Correlation

STD,EnhancedCarrier RouteRegularLetters

Optimize ECR Basic to Automation = Y Scheme order must be:

1. STD, Enhanced CarrierRoute Regular Letters

2. STD, AutomationLetters

Mix simplified and non-simplified walk sequence carrier route mail

You can prepare simplified and non-simplified (normal) walk sequence carrier route mail in the sameStandard Mail letter or flat job. Preparing simplified and non-simplified mail together in the samemailing can save time and preparation costs.

Simplified mail is mail that does not contain specific name or address information. For example, sim-plified mail pieces may have general salutations, such as "Current Resident," on them. These piecesare then delivered to every address within a mail carrier's route.

Be aware of the following USPS requirements:

l Simplified mail and non-simplified mail is combined to count towards the minimum mailingrequirement of 200 pieces or 50 pounds.

l Your simplified address routes must meet complete coverage requirements (see DMM602.3.2 for more information).

For more information on USPS requirements, see DMM 602.3.2.3 as well as 245.6.6, 245.6.7, and245.9.

Preparation requirements

Before you prepare simplified and non-simplified addresses together, read the following preparationrequirements.

User Guide | 219

Letters

When mixing simplified mail with non-simplified address carrier route mail, the software separatesthe simplified pieces and the non-simplified pieces into separate trays. The software splits thepieces for the following reasons:

l The contents line for saturation carrier route mail is different from the contents line for sim-plified address mail .

l The saturation carrier route mail claiming letter rates is barcoded; the simplified mail is not.

If you set the ECR Reg Flat Rates parameter to Yes, simplified address records continue to receiveletter rates while only the normal address records receive the flat (non-letter) rates.

NOTE If you have the Retain Walk Sequence parameter in your scheme block set to Mix, youcannot use the ECR Reg Flat Rates parameter because the software needs the ZIP4 and DPBCto determine which records are simplified.

Flats

The software prepares simplified address pieces in separate bundles from the non-simplifiedaddressed mail. Doing this makes it more convenient for the mail carrier to handle the simplifiedmail. The simplified mail bundles can be sacked with the non-simplified mail bundles.

Palletization

In DMM 602.3.2.3, the USPS states that, "Mailers must prepare flat-size pieces and irregular parcelsin carrier route bundles in sacks or directly on pallets. Bundles, sacks, or trays may be placed on 3-digit, 5-digit or 5-digit scheme pallets under 705.8.10."

The software implements this rule for jobs in which the Retain Walk Sequence parameter is set toMix or Simp. When palletizing, the software puts simplified mail on only 5-digit/scheme and 3-digitpallets. After the 3-digit pallet level is met, the software drops the simplified mail to the nextscheme.

If you are currently doing simplified mailing jobs, you can stop the scheme that contains the sim-plified mail from dropping pieces after it meets the 3-digit pallet level. To do this, use the No SortAfter parameter within your job's pallet scheme block.

User Guide | 220

Required fields

Before you can mix simplified and non-simplified addresses in a walk-sequenced mailing, the fol-lowing fields must be present in your record layout:

l Walk Sequence

l CART

l ZIP

l ZIP+4

l Delivery Point add-on

l Firm ID

Mixing simplified and non-simplified mail in a walk sequenced mailing

To mix simplified and non-simplified records in a walk sequenced mailing:

1. Add required fields (discussed in the previous section) to your .def file. Your mailing listshould contain a combination of both simplified and non-simplified walk sequenceaddresses. The PW.Walk_Seq field must be present and populated in the input file.

The following table indicates when data is present for a particular field.

Input field Simplified addressedmail

Walk sequence mail Non-walk sequencemail

PW.Walk_Seq Data is present Data is present Data is not present

PW.Cart Data is present Data is present Data may be present

PW.Zip5 Data is present Data is present Data is present

PW.Zip4 Data is not present Data is present Data may be present

PW.DPBC Data is not present Data is present Data may be present

2. Within your Standard Mail letter or flat schemes, set the Retain Walk Sequence parameter toMix. By using the Mix option, you tell the software to mix simplified and non-simplified

User Guide | 221

address format records.

The following options are available for the Retain Walk Sequence parameter.

Option Description

Y Indicates that the job is a walk sequenced mailing that is usingnormal addresses.

N Indicates that the job is a carrier route LOT mailing.

Simp Indicates that the entire job is composed of simplified address pieces.

Mix Indicates that the entire job is composed of a mix of simplified and non-sim-plified address pieces.

Setting a separate walk sequence setting for simplified mail only

Use the Qualify Walk Seq Simp parameter in the Optional Procedures block to set up a separatewalk sequence setting for simplified mail.

The following options are available for this parameter:

Options Results

Off Tells the software to use the YYMM_dsf.dir file to determine qualification for thewalk-sequence discount. The software applies saturation high density or basic ratesbased on the rate counts.

CDS Res Indicates that your CDS file contains only residential addresses.

CDS Pos Indicates that your CDS file contains both residential and business addresses. Thisis an override option that gives the saturation rate to all carrier route recordswithout verifying any carrier routes.

NOTE When you use CDS Res or CDS Pos, the software does not verify any route counts.The software assumes that you processed the records with a current Computerized DeliverySequence (CDS) file and that all the records qualify at 100 percent for the walk sequence sat-uration rate.

User Guide | 222

Populating AP fields for simplified mail

Simplified addressed mail is not automation compatible. Therefore, the software populates AP fieldsdifferently depending on whether a record or tray contains simplified mail or normal addressed mail.

AP field Normaladdress value

Simplifiedaddress value

Adr_BC_Min 0 or 11 0

Adr_BC_dgt 11 digits 0

Prt_Req_BC Y or N N

Combining walk sequence and line-of-travel carrier route mail

The software can sort walk sequence (WS) and line-of-travel (LOT) carrier route mail together in asingle sort. This feature applies only to flats and letters for Periodicals and Standard Mail.

To sort both WS and LOT carrier route mail together

1. Set the Prepare Both WS and LOT parameter to Yes.

2. Define the PW.Walk_Seq field in all the input files.

3. Define the PW.LOT and PW.LOT_Order in at least one input file.

TIP To reduce your overall postage when mailing Standard letters (given the rules and pricesat the time of publication), we recommend that you set the Optimize ECR Basic to Automationparameter to Yes. Enabling this parameter moves basic priced carrier route letters to the auto-mation price.

See the Presort Job-File Reference for more information about the parameters used for this feature.

Dropping WS basic priced pieces to the LOT sortation level

The software can drop WS pieces to the LOT level and put them in the same bundle with other LOTsequenced mail for the same route. It does this when you don’t have enough WS pieces going tothe carrier route level to get the walk-sequence saturation or high-density rate.

NOTE All the WS records for the route in question must contain PW.LOT and PW.LOT_Orderinformation for the software to attempt to combine the two sets of carrier route pieces.

User Guide | 223

Using the RetainWalk Sequence parameter when combining WS and LOT

When the Prepare Both WS and LOT parameter is set to Yes, the Retain Walk Sequence para-meter must be set to Yes or Mix.

The following table shows how the Retain Walk Sequence parameter works when you are com-bining WS and LOT carrier route mail:

Retain WalkSequence parametervalue

Behavior

Yes If the PW.Walk_Seq field does not have a value for a given address in theinput database, the software looks at the PW.LOT and PW.LOT_Orderfields to determine if it should sort records at the basic carrier route price.

Mix The software looks at the value of the PW.Walk_Seq field to determinehow a record should be sorted. The software considers a record to be sim-plified if the PW.Walk_Seq, PW. CART, and PW.ZIP fields are all valid, butthe ZIP4 and/or DPBC are not present.

If the PW.Walk_Seq field does not have a value for a given address in theinput database, the software looks at the PW.LOT and PW.LOT_Orderfields to determine if it should sort records at the basic carrier route price.The software looks at the value of the PW.Walk_Seq field to determinehow a record should be sorted. The software considers a record to be sim-plified if the PW.Walk_Seq, PW. CART, and PW.ZIP fields are all valid, butthe ZIP4 and/or DPBC are not present.

To combine WS and LOT carrier route mail, you must define the PW.Walk_Seq field.

Using the copies field with simplified mailings

When combining WS and LOT carrier route mail, you can use the PW.Copies field with simplifiedmail if you set these parameters as follows:

Parameter Location Setting

Prepare both WS and LOT Periodicals and Standard Mail flats and lettersscheme blocks

Yes

User Guide | 224

Parameter Location Setting

Retain Walk Sequence Periodicals and Standard Mail flats and lettersscheme blocks

Mix

USPS Optional Procedures Execution block Yes

Qualify Walk Seq Simp USPS Optional Procedures block CDS POS orCDS RES

Reporting WS and LOT pieces

The Mail Sort Listing (MSL) allows you to see which flats are given the basic CART price. This isshown only when you have the Report Format parameter set to PKG or EXT.

Packages that use LOT order to qualify for line-of-travel carrier route prices are marked with a "lessthan" (<) symbol. You'll notice that the less than symbol looks slightly like an L for LOT.

User Guide | 225

Flats Sequencing SystemThe Flats Sequencing System (FSS) is a mail-sortation machine that sorts flat-sized mail into deliverypoint sequence (in the order that the mail is to be delivered).

FSS preparation is required for bundles and pallets of flat-size Standard Mail, Periodicals and BoundPrinted Matter mailpieces prepared for delivery within ZIP Codes serviced by FSS processing. Flatsmust be placed into combined 5-digit FSS scheme pools when addressed for delivery to any FSS 5-digit scheme combination according to Labeling list L006. Bundles can also be placed in sacks ortrays. You may be allowed to use flat tubs if sufficient quantity of tubs are available.

FSS labeling lists

The USPS uses two labeling lists for FSS. These labeling lists are in the YYMM_mpc.dir file.Labeling list L006 describes the 5-digit FSS scheme sortation list for flat sized Periodicals, StandardMail and Package Services placed in bundles and pallets. This labeling list must be used whenpreparing FSS bundles and pallets.

Labeling list Description

L006 column A This list is for the FSS Scheme sort level. This sort level is a scheduled runthat includes one or more 5-digit ZIP Codes.

L006 column B This list is for the FSS Facility sort level. An FSS Facility destination includesmultiple FSS Scheme destinations (similar to how a 3-digit destinationincludes multiple 5-digit destinations).

Rules and regulations

Each FSS mail piece must meet the physical and eligibility standards in the DMM. See the followinglinks for more information:

l Standard Mail (DMM 201)

l Periodicals (DMM 207 and DMM 201)

l Periodicals flats no more than 1" (DMM 705)

User Guide | 226

l PSVC BPM (DMM 260)

l Comail of Standard and Periodicals flats (DMM 705)

FSS packages (bundles)

FSS bundles are sorted to the FSS Scheme level by using the L006 column A labeling list.

IM barcoding is recommended.

An Optional Endorsement Line (OEL) is required for each piece in an FSS bundle because itindicates what rate the piece received. The OEL, which is usually the same throughout a bundle,could vary within a given bundle because of that price indication embedded in it.

Bundles can be placed in sacks or trays. However, the Postal Service recommends the use ofauthorized flat trays in lieu of sacks for FSS bundles. FSS scheme bundles that are not required to beplaced in a FSS scheme or FSS facility container are combined with bundles of non-FSS sortedbundles and placed in or on non-FSS containers at 3-digit or lower level.

Bundles for all FSS schemes must be identified as an FSS Scheme presort with an optionalendorsement line under DMM 708.7. It is recommended that all pieces placed into an FSS Schemebundle be barcoded, and bear an accurate delivery point Intelligent Mail barcode with an accurate11-digit routing code.

The following types of priced mail can be included within the same physical FSS bundle:

l Carrier Route High Density Plus (HDP)

l Carrier Route High Density (HD)

l Carrier Route Basic

l 5-Digit Auto

l 5-Digit Presort

l 3-Digit Auto

l 3-Digit Presort

Any PER mail eligible for saturation price must also be included in FSS bundles, but Presort will notapply the saturation price to such pieces.

User Guide | 227

The sequencing of mailpieces within bundles is not required or recommended when preparing FSSbundles, so Presort places mailpieces in a randomized order within the FSS bundles.

FSS packages (bundles) maximums and minimums

The USPS recommends that you create bundles of uniform thickness. This ensures that bundlesevenly fill an automation compatible tray (ACT) to minimize the amount of bundle handling. Uniformbundle sizes also assist with more stable pallet construction.

The following maximums and minimums apply to FSS bundles:

l When there is at least 3 inches of mail, a FSS bundle can be created. If the pieces do notqualify for a better rate, the bundle will receive the 3-digit automation or 3-digit presortedrate.

l Bundles should be 3 to 6 inches thick. The software makes bundles as close to the targetthickness as possible, but uses a 0.25 inch margin on either side. For example, if you set theFSS Package Thickness parameter to 6, the software makes bundles 5.75 inches to 6.25inches. However, the software won't make 2.75 inch bundles, because that falls below theminimum thickness threshold.

l The software levels pieces in bundles (strongly encouraged by the USPS), so that all bundlesto the same destination are the same thickness. The USPS allows only one overflow bundleof less than the minimum thickness to a destination. Bundles must be prepared inaccordance with the other conditions in DMM 705.14.0.

l The USPS does not allow FSS bundles to exceed 20 pounds, therefore Presort doesn't createFSS bundles weighing over 20 pounds. If you have a version that might result in a bundleweighing more than 20 pounds, the software displays a warning.

l Mailings that include 10 or more pieces of Standard Mail flats, 6 or more pieces of Periodicalsflats or 10 or more pieces (or 10 or more pounds) of Bound Printed Matter flats, to an FSSscheme must be prepared in FSS scheme bundles.

l You may also include non-machinable PER Alternative Auto Flats that are no more than 1inch thick (optional).

User Guide | 228

After Presort initially sorts the mail and creates bundles close to the size specified in the job, it triesto avoid creating a last bundle that is "tiny." Specifically, if the thickness of the mail remaining for thelast bundle is less than the FSS minimum of 3 inches and the piece count is less than the classminimum (6 or 10 pieces), Presort does one of the following:

l Presort adds mail from the last bundle to an existing bundle if the end result is a bundle thatis thinner than the FSS maximum of 6.5 inches.

l If Presort can't add the mail to a thinner bundle, then it splits the mail into 2 bundles ofapproximately the same size.

NOTE In certain cases, a tiny bundle may still be created based on the USPS bundle weightlimit of 20 pounds. Presort may not always be able to level evenly or combine the last tinybundle due to the weight of the piece.

For example, if you have 23 flats that are each 8 inches by 11 inches, 0.2 inches thick, and weigh14.24 oz. and FSS Package thickness set to 6 inches, Presort will create two bundles:

l The first bundle will contain 22 pieces, be 4.4 inches thick, and weigh 19.58 pounds.

l The second bundle will consist of only one piece, because adding the last piece to the firstbundle would have caused its weight to exceed 20 pounds, and splitting the bundle wouldresult in two bundles with at least one below the minimum thickness of 3 inches.

FSS preparation for PER flats in trays

When preparing a tray-based sort, Presort will automatically create FSS Scheme trays for qualifyingPER Flats pieces. You do not have to configure Presort to create these trays. FSS Scheme trays arerequired by the USPS.

NOTE Presort does not create optional FSS Facility trays.

There must be at least 24 qualifying PER Flats pieces for a single FSS scheme for Presort to createan FSS Scheme tray. If there are fewer than 24 pieces for a single scheme, those pieces will fall tothe next non-FSS level and be placed into a tray at that level. For example, those pieces could becombined with other pieces going to the same 3-digit area and placed into a 3-digit tray. All of thepieces in that 3-digit tray would then get the 3-digit price.

Presort supports only loose tray preparation; pieces are not bundled. Overflow trays for PER Flats arenot allowed. Any pieces that are not placed into a qualifying tray will fall to the next non-FSS leveland be placed in a tray at that level.

FSS Scheme trays are created prior to 5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, and MAADC PER Flats in trays levels.

User Guide | 229

Presort will place FSS Scheme trays on FSS pallets if the minimum tray feet that you set is met.

Either one or both of these schemes is required for Presort to create FSS Scheme trays:

l PER, Flats in Trays (DMM 705.9, 207.22 and 207.25)

l PER, Flats in Trays on Pallets (DMM 705.8)

For more information:

l "Periodicals flats in trays," "FSS Pallets," and "FSS Prices" in the Presort User Guide

l DMM References:

l 705.14.1 and 705.14.2

l 207 (Automation and Presorted sections)

FSS pallets

There are two types of FSS pallets: 

FSS pallet level Labeling list used Description

FSS Scheme L006 column A All for the same 5-digit FSS Scheme ZIP Codecombination

FSS Facility L006 column B All 5-digit FSS Scheme ZIP Code combinations processedwithin the same facility

Existing DMM pallet minimum load requirements (DMM 705.8.5.2 and 705.8.5.3) apply to these FSSpallet levels.

l FSS Scheme pallets are required for over 250 lbs of mail and optional for below 250 pounds.

l FSS Facility pallets are optional at any level. To create these pallets, set the CreateFSS Facility Pallets parameter to Y. If the FSS Facility pallet is not used, the FSS Schemebundles will cascade to the other pallet levels (3-digit, SCF, etc.).

User Guide | 230

Pallet preparation

When performing FSS preparation, the software creates FSS pallets before other existing palletlevels in the sequence.

Pallets are required to bear a pallet placard with an Intelligent Mail container barcode. Mailerswithout the capacity to palletize can request an exception to these palletization requirements fromthe local plant manager.

Container charges

FSS scheme pallets are assessed the Carrier Route Pallet price.

FSS facility sort level pallets are charged a 3-Digit/SCF Pallet container price.

FSS scheme or facility sacks or trays are assessed the 3-Digit/SCF Sack/Tray price.

Pallets, sacks and trays entered at a DFSS can claim the DSCF entry price.

FSS Pricing

The following table displays the supported piece rates available for mail prepared for FSS and theprice indicator in the OEL:

Piece Rate Indicator

Carrier Route High Density Plus (HDP) FSSA

Carrier Route High Density (HD) FSSB

Carrier Route Basic FSSC

Automation 5-Digit Barcode FSSD

5-Digit Nonautomation FSSE

Automation 3-Digit Barcode FSSF

3-Digit Nonautomation FSSG

Carrier route pieces

The software bundles carrier route pieces into FSS Scheme bundles with non-carrier route mail.Carrier route pieces retain the normal carrier route price if it meets the 200 piece or 50 pound

User Guide | 231

minimum. Carrier route sequencing standards do not apply to pieces within FSS Scheme bundles.

FSS bundles in a PER mailing placed on a FSS scheme pallet, sack, tray or approved alternatecontainer will claim the Carrier Route bundle price.

FSS bundles in a PER mailing placed on FSS facility pallets, sacks, trays, or approved alternatecontainer will claim the 3-Digit/SCF bundle price.

If they are entered at an FSS facility, they are eligible for the DSCF entry price. (Presort doesn'tcurrently support DFSS entry points, but you can use BCC Post-Presort or other post-presortsoftware to submit to DFSS entry points.)

BPM carrier route flats in an FSS Scheme bundle placed on FSS Scheme pallets, sacks or trays willreceive the appropriate carrier route price.

STD carrier route flats in an FSS Scheme bundle will receive the appropriate carrier route price.

Only Saturation mailpieces are eligible for Destination Delivery Unit (DDU) entry within FSS zones.

Unbound, non-stapled, newspaper-type Standard Mail flat-sized mailpieces are not recommendedfor FSS preparation.

PER carrier route flats will receive the appropriate carrier route price.

Periodical bundle charges

Periodical FSS bundles placed on a FSS scheme pallet, sack, tray or approved alternate containerwill claim the Carrier Route bundle price.

Periodical FSS bundles placed on FSS facility pallets, sacks, trays, or approved alternate containerwill claim the 3-Digit/SCF bundle price.

FSS bundles incur a 5-digit Outside-County bundle charge, although the bundle may contain piecesclaimed at Inside-County carrier route price. All FSS bundles are considered Outside-County.

Unbound, non-stapled, newspaper-type Periodicals flat-sized mailpieces are not recommended forFSS preparation.

Periodical container and pallet charges

FSS scheme pallets will be assessed the Carrier Route Pallet price.

FSS facility sort level pallets will be charged a 3-Digit/SCF Pallet container price.

FSS scheme or facility sacks or trays will be assessed the 3-Digit/SCF Sack/Tray price. However,there will be no container charge when FSS scheme pallets are entered at an FSS facility.

User Guide | 232

FSS reports

Qualification Report

The following table shows each piece rate that can occur in an FSS bundle and the correspondingrate code. The rate codes appear as column headings on the report.

Piece Rate Rate Code

Carrier Route High Density Plus HDP

Carrier Route High Density HD

Carrier Route Basic CR

Automation 5-Digit Barcode 5B

5-Digit Nonautomation 5D

Automation 3-Digit Barcode 3B

3-Digit Nonautomation 3D

The Group Destination column will indicate if the group is for an FSS facility, where you can seewhat rates are being applied to FSS bundles.

Mail Sort Listing

FSS pieces are marked as follows in the Mail Sort Listing report:

l FSS level packages are marked as FSS destination.

l FSS Facility Pallets and Facility Sacks are marked as FSF.

Manifest listing

The Manifest listing reflects the piece rates and pound rates.

Summary Listing Report, Processing Listing Report, and ZIP Code Listing Report

FSS pieces will be reported in the appropriate columns based on the rate assessed.

User Guide | 233

Excluding mail from FSS preparation

The USPS allows you to exclude PER Automation Flat-size mailings from FSS Preparation sortationas long as there are fewer than 5000 Outside-County pieces. FSS preparation is optional for fewerthan 5000 Outside-County PER pieces.

NOTE All Basic Carrier Route, Automation, and Regular rate automation flat mail (with morethan 5000 pieces and not being entered at a DDU) should be included in FSS preparation.

HD/HDP must be included in FSS preparation. Saturation mail may be included. (PeriodicalsFlats are required to be included in FSS prep as well, but Presort does not yet support the priceapplication of CR saturation rates for pieces in FSS bundles).

It is your responsibility to know whether you qualify for any exceptions to FSS preparation. Seehttp://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/FR-2013-12-18/html/2013-29879.htm for information about whenFSS preparation is optional. We strongly recommend that you contact your acceptance clerk toverify that you can submit mailings without FSS preparation.

See "Turn off all FSS Preparation" in the Presort Job File Reference for more information.

User Guide | 234

Intelligent Mail® barcodesPresort supports Intelligent Mail barcodes for letters, flats, and packages. Detailed information aboutthese barcodes can be found on the following websites:

Barcode Website

IM barcode (IMb) for letters and flats https://postalpro.usps.com/mailing/intelligent-mail-barcode

IM package barcode (IMpb) https://postalpro.usps.com/shipping/impb

See https://postalpro.usps.com/GuidesandSpecs for more information about Intelligent Mail.

Terminology clarification

In some cases, USPS terminology doesn't match the terminology used within Presort software. Seethe following table for clarification of these terms.

USPS term Presort term Description

Parcel,package

Parcel Mail that doesn't meet the physical requirements of letter-sized mailor flat-sized mail.

What Presort calls a "parcel" is referred to as both a "parcel" and a"package" by the USPS. Especially in the realm of IM packagebarcode, the USPS uses "package. "

Bundle Package "A group of addressed pieces, for a presort destination, securedtogether as a unit." (See DMM 235.2.)

The USPS switched their "package" terminology to "bundle" someyears ago. Presort usage may be updated in the future.

Intelligent Mail barcode support for letters and flats

The Intelligent Mail (IM) barcode is a single 4-state barcode that combines routing ZIP Codeinformation and tracking information. You can use the Intelligent Mail barcode to qualify forautomation discounts as long as you met all other automation requirements. You can find moreinformation about the Intelligent Mail barcode at https://postalpro.usps.com/mailing/intelligent-mail-barcode.

User Guide | 235

See Also

Intelligent Mail package barcode (IMpb) support for parcels

IM barcode format for letters and flats

These tables, which were taken from the USPS's Intelligent Mail® Barcode Technical ResourceGuide, show how the Piece, Tray/Sack, and Pallet barcodes are broken down.

The following table shows a barcode with a 6-digit mailer ID. Most 6-digit mailer IDs are assigned, bythe USPS, to mailers that produce large mailings. This allows mailers to have longer serial numbers.

The next table shows a barcode with a 9-digit mailer ID. Most 9-digit mailer IDs are assigned, by theUSPS, to mailers who produce smaller mailings (less than 100 million pieces a year).

For the definition of each field within the IM barcode, see the Intelligent Mail® Barcode TechnicalResource Guide at https://postalpro.usps.com/node/221.

Types of IM barcodes for letters and flats

Presort supports the following IM barcodes for letters and flats:

Barcode Description

Piece A barcode for letters or flats.

Tray/Sack A barcode for trays or sacks. The USPS calls this the Tray barcode.

Pallet A barcode for pallets. The USPS calls this the Container barcode.

The fields that make up each barcode are discussed in the following sections. For more information,including valid barcode field values, see the Intelligent Mail Barcode 4-State Specification athttps://postalpro.usps.com/node/2190.

User Guide | 236

Piece barcode

The Piece barcode consists of the following fields:

Field Description

Barcode ID Identifies the makeup of the mail piece (2 digits). When you print flat-sizepieces bearing an OEL, the IMBC must contain the OEL coding.

The software populates this field with "00" unless you set your processingcategory to a type of flat.

Service type Identifies special services that are requested on a mail piece (for example,change of address, ACS, and so on).

Mailer ID Identifies the mailer.

This is a 6- or 9-digit ID that the USPS assigns to you. Note that 9-digit mailerIDs are assumed to begin with the digit "9."

Serial number Identifies the mailing or mail piece (6- or 9-digits).

NOTE You are responsible for the uniqueness of the value you get fromcombining the Mailer ID and the Serial Number. The length of the Mailer IDplus the Serial Number must be 15 digits in length. This combination shouldbe unique for a period of 45 days.

ZIP Code Identifies the destination of the letter or flat. This number is 0, 5, 9, or 11 digitsin length, depending on the mail shape and the automation discounts youreceive.

NOTE The software populates the digits based on the rate that is given tothe piece. For example, the digits for a regular rate flat would have only 5digits of the ZIP Code while an automated letter would have the full 11digits of the ZIP Code.

User Guide | 237

TraySack barcode

The TraySack barcode consists of the following fields:

Field Description

ZIP Code Contains the destination of the tray or sack or the ZIP Code of the mail withinthe container.

CIN Describes the content of the tray or sack.

Label Source Identifies the system or facility that generated the label. This field is populatedwith:

l "1" for auto-compatible, barcoded, and machinable mail

l "7" for all other mail.

Mailer ID Identifies the mailer.

Your Mailer ID should be 6- or 9-digits long and the length of the Mailer ID plusthe 5- or 8-digit Serial Num Start needs to be 14-digits or less.

NOTE This ID might not be the same as the Mailer ID for the Piecebarcode. This value may come from an input file or from the IMB Tray/SackMailer ID parameter in the Intelligent Mail block.

Serial Number Identifies the tray or sack.

NOTE You are responsible for the uniqueness of the value you get fromcombining the Mailer ID and the Serial Number. The length of the Mailer IDplus the 5- or 8-digit Serial Num Start needs to be 14-digits or less. Thiscombination should be unique for a period of 45 days.

Label Type Qualifier for systems to recognize and parse the data within this barcode. Thisfield is populated with:

l “1” when the Mailer ID is 6-digits.

l “8” when the Mailer ID is 9-digits.

User Guide | 238

Pallet barcode

The Pallet barcode consists of the following fields:

Field name Description

ApplicationIdentifier

The value of this field is always 99.

Type Indicator The value of this field is always M.

Mailer ID Identifies the mailer. This is a 6- or 9-digit ID that the USPS assigns to you.

Serial Number Identifies the mailing. This is a 12- or 9-digit alphanumeric ID.

See Also

IMpb fields

IM discounts for letters and flats

Full-service Intelligent Mail in the mail classes and processing categories discussed in this sectionare eligible for discounts.

The IMb full-service discount applies only to the piece rate.

When selecting a postage payment method for metered mail, the USPS applies full-serviceIntelligent Mail discounts as follows:

l If you choose the Metered Correct option, “the amount of affixed postage shall be exactlythe price of the mail piece including, if applicable, the Full-Service discount.”

l If you choose the Metered Lowest Mlg or Metered Lowest Job option, “the amount of affixedpostage shall be the amount applicable to the piece with the lowest required postage,including, if applicable, the Full-Service discount.”

For more detailed information about the discounts, go tohttps://postalpro.usps.com/aGuidetoFullService.

Postage Statements

The USPS postage statements for all applicable mail class processing categories include a full-service IM discount section.

User Guide | 239

First-Class

Full-service First-Class mail receives an IM discount of $0.003 for pieces in the following processingcategories:

l Automated letters

l Automated flats

l Automated cards

Periodicals letters and flats

Some full-service Periodicals letters and flats receive an IM discount of $0.001.

The following outside-county categories are eligible for an IM discount:

l Barcoded letters

l Barcoded machinable flats

l Barcoded nonmachinable flats (FSM 1000 or DMM 207.26)

l Carrier route basic letters/flats

l Carrier route high density letters/flats

l Carrier route saturation letters/flats

The following in-county categories are eligible for an IM discount:

l Automated letters

l Auto flats

l Carrier route basic letters/flats

l Carrier route high density letters/flats

l Carrier route saturation letters/flats

User Guide | 240

Standard Mail regular and non-profit letters

Full-service Standard Mail regular and non-profit letters (when barcoded with a full 31-digit IMb)receive an IM discount of $0.001 for pieces in the following processing categories:

l Automated letters

l Basic carrier route letters

l High-density carrier route letters

l Saturation carrier route letters

Carrier route letters that you pay for at a carrier route flat rate are not eligible for the discount. Inaddition, simplified mail for both letters and flats is not eligible for IM discounts.

Standard Mail regular and non-profit flats

Full-service Standard Mail regular and non-profit flats receive an IM discount of $0.001 in thefollowing processing categories:

l Automated flats

l Basic carrier route flats

l High-density carrier route flats

The following mail is not eligible for discounts:

l Saturation carrier route flats

l Simplified addressed mail (not barcoded)

Bound Printed Matter flats

Full-service Bound Printed Matter flats (when barcoded with a full 31-digit IMb) receive an IMdiscount of $0.001 for pieces in the following processing categories:

l Barcoded Presort flats - non-DDU

l Barcoded Presort flats - DDU

User Guide | 241

l Barcoded Carrier Route flats

PSVC Bound Printed Matter

Although there is no DMM requirement saying that you need a barcode on PSVC carrier route flatsand DDU presorted flats, the USPS is offering the full-service discount if you barcode these pieceswith an Intelligent Mail barcode.

When preparing a full-service mailing, it is your responsibility to verify that you are printing the IMbarcode on these pieces.

See Also

IM barcode format for letters and flats

Types of IM barcodes for letters and flats

Creating IM barcodes for letters and flats

To create Intelligent Mail barcodes, perform the following tasks:

1. Set the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter in the Execution block to IMB. This tells thesoftware to create output for your AP fields.

2. Decide how you want to input data into the software.

Method Barcode Description

Input fields Piece You can use input fields for Piece barcodes only. Usinginput fields gives you more control over the content ofyour Piece barcodes. The information you set in your PWfields overrides anything you set up in the job file.

NOTE When using input fields to set the mailer IDand/or serial number for Piece barcodes, you are fullyresponsible for the uniqueness of the mailer ID plus theserial number.

Parameters Piece, Pallet,andTray/Sack

Using parameters may be easier to use for small or simplemailings. See the Presort Job-File referencefor informationabout specific parameters.

3. Define the service type by using the PW.Srvc_Type field or the Automation Barcode Type

User Guide | 242

parameter in the Version Description or Version Defaults block.

4. Define your mailer ID, serial number, service type, and so on. (The software creates barcodes(including mailer ID and service codes) for foreign records and records without ZIP Codes,but it won't assign serial numbers to those records.))

See Also

Creating IM package barcodes for parcels

IM barcode output fields

IM barcode input fields

IM barcode service types for letters and flats

Service type identifiers for letters and flats

IM barcode and IM package barcode serial numbers

IM barcode input fields

You can use the following input fields when creating all types of IM barcodes:

Field Description

PW.Srvc_Type For letters and flats, use this input field to set the service type IDassociated with a particular record. The software can determine thefollowing from the service type ID:

l If a piece qualifies for full- or basic-service.

l The type of services available for each record (address change, andso on).

For packages, use this input field to set the service type code associatedwith a particular record.

PW.IMB_MID Use this field to set the Mailer ID that appears in the barcode for eachrecord. This field allows you to use different Mailer IDs across the entirejob.

User Guide | 243

Field Description

PW.IMB_Serial Use this field to set the serial number that appears in the barcode for eachrecord.

NOTE The software does not do anything to prevent repeatedvalues. For example, if a job produces over 99,999 trays, the softwaredoes not issue a warning. Note that serial numbers on the outputrecords may not be in sequential order.

See Also

Service type identifiers for letters and flats

IM barcode output fields

IMpb input and output fields

Verifying the uniqueness of mailer IDs and serial numbers that are read from an input file

To verify the uniqueness of the mailer ID and serial number on each piece that is read from an inputfile, set the Verify Input Serial Nums Unique parameter in the Intelligent Mail block to Yes.

The software does not detect duplicates within the Basic service type, but does detect them in theFull service type. However, if there are a mix of Full and Basic service types and a Full and a Basicservice type share the same IMB_Serial, the software will detect the Basic piece as a duplicate.

NOTE Performing this verification adds processing time when reading input files. The largerthe input file, the longer the verification takes.

Retrieving field values from the job-file block when an input field is empty

Usually, the information you set in the PW fields overrides anything you set up in the job-file. Thesoftware allows some exceptions so that you can use a single "house-format" DEF file whenprocessing files for multiple customers.

If the PW.Srvc_Type, PW.IMB_MID or PW.IMB_Serial input fields in your input file are empty, thesoftware uses the corresponding Version Description block parameter value in its place.

User Guide | 244

Automatically creating versions in auto-dimension jobs

For auto-dimension jobs, the software automatically creates a new version when the followingcriteria are met:

l Intelligent Mail Barcode is set to Yes in the Execution block.

l Input fields PW.IMB_MID and PW.Srvc_Type are in the input file.

Auto dimension jobs using IM barcode input fields

You can indicate which Intelligent Mail barcode input fields to use when generating new versionsby doing the following:

1. In the Execution block, set the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter to Yes.

2. In the Version Defaults block, set the Action parameter to AUTO DIMEN.

3. In the Intelligent Mail Barcode block, set the AUTO DIMEN Fields Selection parameter toone of the following options.

Option Description

None Tells the software that you don't want to use any of the IMb parameters.This is so that within auto dimension, you can combine records from bothfull-service and basic-service in the same version.

IMB_MID Tells the software to use the PW.IMB_MID input field to generate newversions.

SRVC_TYPE

Tells the software to use the PW.IMB_MID and PW.SRVC_TYPE fields togenerate new versions.

NOTE If a single version uses more than one mailer ID (the Multiple Mailer IDs perVersion parameter is set to Yes), Presort uses the Mail.dat MPA Mail Owner ID valuefrom the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter in the Version Description or Defaultsblock.

See Also

Mixing service types in the same version

User Guide | 245

IM barcode output fields

The software populates output fields when you set the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter in theExecution block to Yes. If you set the parameter to No, or if you leave it blank, the software leavesthe fields blank.

The software supports the following output fields:

Field Description

AP.IMB_Adr Contains the 31-digit number for the IM barcode. This field is available onlyfor the address output file.

AP.IMB_Adr_AC In order to shorten the length of the IM barcode when it prints, some printershave included lower case letters in the IM barcode font to shorten the length.If your printer has this feature, you should use this field.

This field posts the encoded barcode in mixed case to the address output file.When you post this field, the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and so on character are lowercase.

AP.IMB_Adr_EC Posts the encoded barcode in all upper case to the address output file.

AP.IMB_Adr_MI For letters and flats, this field contains the 6- or 9-digit mailer ID for the IMbarcode. You can also use this field for IM package barcodes. See IMpb inputand output fields for more information. This field is available only for theaddress output file.

AP.IMB_Plt Contains the pallet IM barcode. This field is available only for the palletoutput file.

AP.IMB_Rtauto The USPS requires you to print certain information on your Intelligent Mailbarcode tray labels. For carrier route direct trays, the carrier route must beprinted on the label (for example, C001). For other trays, if the mail isbarcoded, the word "AUTO" must be printed on the label.

This field posts the route or auto information to the container output file. Forcarrier route direct trays, this field outputs the carrier route code for thepieces in the tray. For all other trays, if the pieces within the tray arebarcoded, the field output would be "AUTO."

User Guide | 246

Field Description

AP.IMB_Adr_SN Contains the 9-digit serial number for the IM barcode. You can also use thisfield for IMpb (up to 14 digits). See IMpb input and output fields for moreinformation. This field is available only for the address output file.

AP.IMB_Trysck Contains the 24-digit number for the TraySack barcode. This field is availableonly for the container output file.

NOTE If you have a mix of 6- and 9-digit fields in your job, you should post to all 9 digits.Presort will correctly display both fields.

See Also

IM barcode input fields

IMpb input and output fields

IM barcode service types for letters and flats

You can use different IM barcode service types. Using the full-service option results in automatedaddress correction notices for letters and flats, as well as start-the-clock information. The softwaresupports IM barcode solutions for First-Class, Standard Mail, Periodicals, and Package ServicesBound Printed Matter letters and flats. The USPS offers some discounts on full-service rates.

NOTE For those processing flats with basic-service or full-service, we recommend that youprint the optional endorsement line (OEL) on every flat mail piece. Because the software doesn'tknow whether you intend to print the optional endorsement line on your pieces, itautomatically returns a barcode ID code for every piece. For those pieces on which you don'twant to print the endorsement line, you need to change the barcode ID to "00".

To define a service type

User Guide | 247

Use the PW.Srvc_Type field or the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version Descriptionor Version Defaults block to define a service type. The following service types are available:

Service type Description

Basic-service With the basic-service type, the USPS requires you to use Intelligent Mailbarcodes on your letter and flat mail pieces. The USPS also requires thefollowing information:

l CASS certified delivery point information.

l A USPS assigned Mailer ID, the class of mail indicated in a ServiceType ID field, and the optional endorsement line (OEL) information inthe Barcode ID field if an OEL is printed on a flat-sized mail piece.

l A serial number containing numbers that you choose. You do not haveto use a unique serial number on your basic-service mail pieces.

Full-service With the full-service type, the USPS requires you to include the followinginformation:

l Use unique barcodes on letters and flats.

l Use unique serial numbers (Mailer ID plus sequence number) on lettersand flats. The serial numbers do not have to be unique if a mailing hasless than 10,000 copies.

l A USPS assigned Mailer ID, the class of mail indicated in a ServiceType ID field, and the optional endorsement line (OEL) information inthe Barcode ID field if an OEL is printed on a flat-sized mail piece.

l Use Intelligent Mail tray labels that have unique barcodes, on trays andsacks.

l Attach Intelligent Mail container placards, containing unique barcodes,on the outside of pallets.

Other The Other type indicates to the USPS that you are using other types ofbarcodes on your mail pieces.

User Guide | 248

See Also

Service type identifiers for letters and flats

Mixing service types in the same mailing

You can mix basic-service and full-service barcoded mail pieces together in the same mailing. To dothis, you must follow the rules for full-service mailings, with the exception that you do not need toinclude a unique IM barcode on the basic-service mail pieces.

To mix service types within the same job

1. Set up a Version Description block for each version in your job.

2. Set the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version Description or Version Defaultsblock. The following options are available: Full, Basic, From_Service_Type, andIMpb.

3. Proceed with defining other applicable IM barcode parameters.

See Also

IM barcode service types for letters and flats

Creating IM barcodes for letters and flats

Mixing service types in the same version

You can mix Intelligent Mail full-service and basic-service in the same version. The software can tellif a piece qualifies for full-service or basic-service by looking at the service type identifier for arecord.

For a full list of service type identifiers, see https://postalpro.usps.com/service-type-identifiers/stidtable.

To mix service types within the same version

1. Define PW.Srvc_Type in the .def file and code your input file with the service types.

2. Set the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version blocks to From_Srvc_Type.

When you use the From_Srvc_Type option, the software determines the service type byusing information from one or both of the following sources:

User Guide | 249

Source Description

PW.Srvc_Type inputfield

The software first looks at this input field for the service typeidentifier. If this field is empty, the software looks at theIMb/IMpb Srvc Type ID/Code parameter in the Version block.

IMb/IMpb Srvc TypeID/Code parameter

For letters and flats, this parameter sets the service type for aparticular version. The software uses this service type ID if thePW.Srvc_Type input field is empty.

NOTE The PW.Bar_Type input field is no longer available. The software candetermine full-service or basic-service from the service type ID.

To mix service types within the same version in auto dimension jobs

1. In your auto dimension jobs, set the AUTO DIMEN Fields Selection parameter in theIntelligent Mail block to None.

2. Set the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version blocks to From_Srvc_Type.The software first looks at the PW.Srvc_Type input field for the service type identifier. If thisfield is empty, the software looks at the IMb/IMpb Srvc Type ID/Code parameter in theVersion block.

See Also

Automatically creating versions in auto-dimension jobs

Auto dimension jobs using IM barcode input fields

IM barcode and IM package barcode serial numbers

Serial numbers identify the mailing or mail piece. For IM barcodes, the length of the serial numberdepends on the type of barcode you are using. For example, the Piece barcode serial number mustbe 6 or 9 digits. The serial number is then combined with the mailer ID so that it is 15 digits in length.However, for IM package barcodes, the length of the sequence number depends on the constructand length of the mailer id.

There are three ways to create and assign serial numbers: 

1. You can manually define them in the job file in the version defaults and version descriptionblock by setting the IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start and IMb/IMpb Serial Num Max parameters.

User Guide | 250

2. Presort can also create and assign unique serial numbers. See Assigning and tracking uniqueserial numbers.

3. You can set up Presort to read in serial numbers that exist in an input file and then(optionally) store them in the IMb/IMpb Database for tracking purposes. (Set up your jobs touse PW.MID, PW.SRVC_TYPE, and PW.IMB_Serial to read in the serial numbers.)

Serial numbers and non-automation pieces

To apply serial numbers to all versions and all non-automation pieces within a job, use the AssignSerial for Non-Auto parameter in the Intelligent Mail block.

The following table lists the options for this parameter:

Option Description

Unique The software assigns a unique serial number to every non-automation piece in yourmailing.

Zero The software assigns a serial number that contains all zeros to every non-automation piece in your mailing.

Static The software assigns the same non-zero serial number to every non-automationpiece in your mailing. The software assigns a number that is within the range youset in the Version Description block.

Using static serial numbers for IM Tray/Sack labels

To indicate whether or not you want the software to automatically increment the Tray/Sack serialnumbers, use the Tray/Sack Increment Serial Num parameter in the Intelligent Mail block.

The software must increment serial numbers if you have any full-service versions in a job. This isbecause the USPS requires that you use unique Tray/Sack serial numbers on your Intelligent Mailtray labels.

Serial numbers for mailings with fewer than 10,000 copies

The USPS does not require you to use unique serial numbers on basic-service or full-servicemailings that contain fewer than 10,000 copies.

To dictate how you want the software to assign serial numbers, use the IMb/IMpb Increment SerialNumber parameter in the Version Description or Version Defaults block. This parameter does notapply to Periodicals, but you can still mix together basic-service and full-service mail.

User Guide | 251

The following tables lists the options for this parameter:

Option Description

Yes The software assigns a unique serial number to all copies in the version.

No The software uses the value stated in the IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start parameter inthe Version Description or Defaults block for all copies in the version.

CAUTION For users with Periodicals firming jobs. The software does not warn whenPeriodicals firming jobs reach 10,000 pieces. According to the Guide to Full Service(https://postalpro.usps.com/GuidetoFullService):

"For mailings of fewer than 10,000 pieces, and postage is affixed to each piece at the correct priceor each piece is of identical weight and the mailpieces are separated by price, the serial numberfield of each Intelligent Mail barcode can be populated with a mailing serial number that is unique tothe mailing but common to all pieces in the mailing. This unique mailing serial number must not bereused for a period of 45 days from the date of mailing. These mailings are not required to submitelectronic documentation for full-service, only an electronic postage statement. Unique mailingserial numbers must be populated in the Postal Wizard entry screen field or in the Mail.XMLmessages. Mailers must populate the serial number field of all Intelligent Mail tray or sack labels, andIntelligent Mail container barcodes (when mailings are containerized) with the unique mailing serialnumber."

Using different starting serial numbers

Some of you might want to determine your own sequence numbers. Sequence numbers are acombination of the mailer ID and the serial number. The USPS has no uniqueness requirements forsequence numbers in basic-service mailings, so the software does not have any starting serialnumber restrictions.

To use different starting serial numbers for your piece barcodes

l Set the Automation Barcode Type parameter in the Version block for all your versions in ajob to Basic.

l Set IMb/IMpb Increment Serial Num parameter in the Version block for all your versions in ajob to No.

You cannot use different starting serial numbers if a version in your job has the AutomationBarcode Type parameter set to Full or if a version has the IMb/IMpb Increment Serial Numparameter set to Yes.

User Guide | 252

The following table shows an example of acceptable values.

Parameter name Version 1 Version 2 Version 3

IMb/IMpb Mailer ID 333333 333333 333333

Automation Barcode Type Basic Basic Basic

IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start 000001 000100 500000

IMb/IMpb Increment Serial Num No No No

Mailer IDs for letters and flats

According to the USPS, "The Mailer ID is a field within the Intelligent Mail® barcodes that is used toidentify Mail Owners and/or Mailing Agents. The IDs are assigned by the USPS to each Mail Ownerand/or Mailing Agent that requests them. A Mailer ID can be a 9-digit field or a 6-digit field. TheUSPS assigns 6-digit or 9-digit Mailer IDs based upon the mail volume of the mailer. Mailer ID's areused in the Intelligent Mail® barcode, Intelligent Mail® Tray barcode, Intelligent Mail® Containerbarcode and Intelligent Mail® Package barcode."

For more information, see https://postalpro.usps.com/mailing/mailer-id.

Using the mailer ID (MID) of the mail owner

Use the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter to specify the mail owner MID.

Presort allows you to use different mailer IDs to help track mail pieces. For example, a mail preparermight want to use their MID within the 31-digit IM barcode (printed on the mail piece) in order tomanage uniqueness requirements and to keep the complexity of Intelligent Mail from theircustomers.

The preparer can also use the mail owner MID to populate records in the Mail.dat for tracking, billingpurposes, and so on. You can specify the mail owner MID in the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameteror the PW.IMBOwnrMID input field. (If the parameter and an input field are both populated, Presortuses the MID from the input field.) Note that when using mailer IDs this way, the USPS sendsfeedback to the mail owner and not the mail preparer.

Presort uses the value in the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter in the Version Defaults and VersionDescription blocks to populate the following Mail.dat records:

l Mailer Postage Account (MPA) record, position 171-179 (for Mail.dat 14-2) or 216-224 (forMail.dat 14-1)

User Guide | 253

l Component (CPT) record, position 085-093 (for Mail.dat 14-2) or 099-107 (for Mail.dat 14-1)

When creating a 31-digit IM barcode, the software uses the values of the IMB parameters in theVersion Description or Version Defaults blocks, or the values from PW.IMB_MID input field.

You do not need to populate the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter. If you leave it blank, Presortpopulates the field with either the value from PW.IMB_MID or the IMB Mailer ID parameter in theVersion Description and Version defaults blocks.

Presort also populates the mail owner MID in the Shipping Services File, depending on whether youare the mail preparer only or the mail preparer and the mail owner. See "How MIDs are Populated" inthe Presort User Guide for more information.

If you have multiple mail owners in a single version, see Multiple mailer IDs in a single version.

Using multiple mailer IDs within a single version

You can use multiple mailer IDs within a single version. For example, you might use this feature tocombine names from more than one mailing list within a single version.

To use multiple mailer ID sin a single version

l Use the Multiple Mailer IDs per Version parameter in the Intelligent Mail block to usemultiple mailer IDs in a single MPA record.

l Populate the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter (if the IMb/IMpb Owner By/For Optionparameter is set to "MID" or "BOTH"). Presort uses this value in the MPA and CPT records ofthe Mail.dat.

l Define the PW.IMB_MID and PW.IMB_Serial fields in the definition (.def) file. Make sureyou do not leave these fields blank on input.

See Also

Using the mailer ID (MID) of the mail owner

Using MIDs and CRIDs to identify mail owner and mail preparer in the Mail.dat

There are different ways that you can identify the mail owner and mail preparer. For detailedinformation about mail owners and mail preparers, see the latest Mail.dat specification athttps://www.idealliance.org/mail-dat.

User Guide | 254

Identifying the mail owner

If you're using the Component (CPT) record, you can identify the mail owner by using one of thefollowing options:

l Mailer ID of the Mail Owner parameter

l Customer Registration ID (CRID) of the Mail Owner parameter

l PW.IMBOwnrMID input field

In the Mailer Postage Account (MPA) record, you can identify the mail owner by using one of thefollowing options:

l Mailer ID of the Mail Owner parameter

l Customer Registration ID (CRID) of the Mail Owner parameter

l Mail Owner's Lcl Permit Ref Num / Int’l Bill Num parameter

l PW.IMBOwnrMID input field

For Nonprofit Standard Mail, you must populate Mail Owner's Lcl Permit Ref Num / Int’l Bill Numwith the mail owner’s permit number that is authorized for Nonprofit Standard Mail.

Using PW.IMBOwnrMID to identify the mail owner

You can use PW.IMBOwnrMID to pull in the mail owner MID when Multiple Mailer IDs per Versionis set to N. However you must be careful to not accidentally create a single version mailing withmultiple owners. Presort does not verify whether the MIDs are consistent across a version. Each timea MID is read from the input file, Presort copies it to a Version structure and overwrites any existingMIDs. Mail.dat pulls the MID from this structure to populate the MPA and CPT records. If you arecreating a single-version mailing but your input set has multiple distinct MIDs in PW.IMBOwnrMID,the last MID that was read in will be present in the Version structure and will be the MID thatMail.dat uses in the MPA and CPT records.

You CANNOT use the PW.IMBOwnrMID field to pull in the mail owner MID when Multiple MailerIDs per Version is set to Y and IMb/IMpb Owner By/For Option is set to MID or BOTH. You mustmanually populate Mailer ID of Mail Owner in each Version Description block in this case.

User Guide | 255

Identifying themail preparer

You can identify the mail preparer by using one or both of the following options:

l Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter

l Customer Registration ID (CRID) of the Mail Owner parameter

Parameters

Presort allows you to determine what you want it to populate in the Mail.dat for by/for preference.Use the following parameters to specify which ID you want to use for the mail owner or preparer.

l IMb/IMpb Owner By/For Option in the Version blocks

l IMb/IMpb Preparer By/For Option in the IDEA Mail.dat block

l MIDMail Owner's Lcl Permit Ref Number in the IDEA Mail.dat block

For more information about these parameters, see the Presort Job File Reference.

See Also

Using MIDs and CRIDs to identify other parties in the Mail.dat

Mail.dat

Using MIDs and CRIDs to identify other parties in the Mail.dat

You can use MIDs and CRIDs to specify parties other than the mail owner and mail preparer in theMail.dat:

EPD record

l The PW.EpdMvUCrid and PW.EpdPcMCrid input fields are used to populate the "CRID" fieldof the EPD record. See the Quick Reference for Views Guide or Help file for moreinformation about these input fields.

User Guide | 256

MPU record

l The CRID of Move Update Supplier parameter is used to uniquely identify the partyresponsible for compliance with USPS move update requirements. The entry in thisparameter is populated into the "Move Update Supplier CRID" field of the MPU record.

l The CRID of Piece Uniq Manager parameter is used to uniquely identify the partyresponsible for maintaining piece IMb uniqueness. The entry in this parameter is populatedinto the "Piece Uniqueness Manager CRID" field of the MPU record.

PBC and PDR records

l The IMb MID is Move Update Supplier parameter indicates whether the party identified bythe IMb Mailer ID is also the Move Update Supplier. The entry in this parameter (either Y orN) is populated into the "MID in IMb is Move Update Supplier" field of the PBC and PDRrecords.

SEG record

l The IDEA Handling Unit Uniq CRID parameter is used to uniquely identify the partyresponsible for maintaining handling unit uniqueness. The CRID in this parameter ispopulated into the "Handling Unit Uniqueness CRID" field of the SEG record.

l IDEA Container Uniq Man CRID parameter is used to uniquely identify the party responsiblefor maintaining container uniqueness. The CRID in this parameter is populated into the"Container Uniqueness CRID" field of the SEG record.

See Also

Using MIDs and CRIDs to specify mail owner and mail preparer in the Mail.dat

Service type identifiers for letters and flats

The service type identifier is a 3-digit field that indicates the special services that are requested on amail piece. The 3-digit value also corresponds to a particular class of mail and a service type (full orbasic).

Different classes and sortation levels use different service type identifiers. The software can helpyou to convert to the correct service type identifier.

User Guide | 257

Automation vs. non-automation mail pieces

Full-service and basic-service automation priced mail requires a different service type identifier thannon-automation priced mail.

To automatically convert full-service and basic-service type identifiers into non-automation servicetype identifiers, set the Convert Srvc Type ID for Non-Auto parameter in the Intelligent Mail schemeblock to Yes. This conversion includes service types that are read in from input files.

NOTE The software converts only non-automation (regular) rate and Standard Mail SaturationECR flat rate mail pieces.

Periodicals non-subscriber copies

To convert the service type identifiers for your Periodicals non-subscriber copies, enter a servicetype into the PER IMB Nonsub Srvc Type ID parameter in the Version Description or VersionDefaults block.

If a mail piece is both non-automation and non-subscriber, the software assigns the mail piece anon-automation service type. The software does not convert service types for non-subscriber copiesif you leave the PER IMB Nonsub Srvc Type ID parameter blank in the Version Description orVersion Defaults block.

NOTE The software does not convert service types that are read in from input files.

Converting service type IDs for mail not eligible for free ACS

Some mail, like automation rate mail and Periodicals carrier route priced mail, receives AddressChange Service (ACS) for free. ACS is not free for full-service flat-sized Standard carrier route,Bound Printed Matter carrier route, or DDU rate mail.

To convert ACS service type IDs

To convert the ACS service type ID for carrier route priced mail pieces that are not eligible for freeAddress Change Service, use the Convert Srvc Type ID Non-Free ACS parameter in the IntelligentMail block. This parameter is set to Yes by default.

The software converts only Full Service flat-sized Standard carrier route rate mail, Bound PrintedMatter carrier route rate mail, and DDU discount mail.

NOTE First-Class Mail does not have a carrier route price category. Therefore, Presort does notconvert service types for this mail.

See Also

IM barcode service types for letters and flats

User Guide | 258

Firming and serial numbers for Piece barcodes

The USPS treats firms as one piece. Therefore, the USPS scans only the top piece on a firm packageand does not scan all the other pieces in the firm package even though they have unique serialnumbers.

If you use the PW.Copies field when firming, there is a chance you could encounter unscanned IMbarcodes and duplicate serial numbers.

Having unused scans when you aren't using the PW.Copies field

Let's say you are running a Periodicals firming job. You can have the job set up so that the softwareassigns a unique serial number to each piece or you can have the software pull in, from an input file,a unique serial number for each piece.

After a unique serial number is assigned, the software still doesn't know which records it will usewhen it puts together a firm package.

Given the above circumstances, the following happens:

l Records with serial numbers of 15, 17, 27, 32, 47, and 52 are created as a firm package, withpiece 15 being the top piece on the firm. The USPS scans piece 15 because it is at the top ofthe firm.

l The USPS never scans the rest of the pieces in the firm package because they are belowpiece 15.

l Firm packaging remains intact from when it enters the USPS mail stream all the way todelivery.

Having unscanned IMbs when using the PW.Copies field

Let's say you are running a Periodicals firming job. You have the job set up so that the software isassigning the unique serial number for each record and you are using the PW.Copies field.

After the software reads in a unique serial number for each record, the software still won't knowwhich records it will use to put together a firm package.

If a record comes in with a PW.Copies field value of 10, the software breaks that record into ten newrecords and each record is assigned a unique serial number. The following happens:

l The records with serial numbers of 15 through 24 (one record with a PW.Copies field value of10), 27, 32, 47, and 52 are all in one firm package.

User Guide | 259

l Due to package size limitations, the software splits the above firm package and creates twopackages with seven pieces in each package.

l The software positions piece 15 on top of the first firm and piece 22 on top of the secondfirm package. The USPS will scan pieces 15 and piece 22.

l The USPS will never scan the other pieces in the firm packages because they are belowpiece 15 and 22 in the two firm packages.

l The firm packages remain intact from when it enters the USPS mail stream all the way todelivery.

Having unscanned IMbs and duplicate serial numbers when using the PW.Copies field

Based on the USPS uniqueness rule, if you are firming you should to let the software assign theserial number to prevent duplicate numbers from being created (unless you are certain that thevalue in your PW.Copies field is always less than the max firm package size).

In this example, let's say you are running a Periodicals firming job and you have the job set up sothat the software pulls in unique serial numbers for each piece from an input file. Let's also say arecord comes into the software with a serial number of 15 and your PW.Copies field is set to 10. Thefollowing happens:

l The software breaks the record into ten new records and each record is assigned a serialnumber of 15.

l The software put the records with serial numbers of 15 (one record with copies field of 10),27, 32, 47 and 52 into the same firm package.

l Due to package size limitations, the software splits the firm into two packages and eachpackage contains seven records.

l The software puts piece 15(1) on the top of the first firm and piece 15(8) on the top of thesecond firm. The USPS will scan the top two pieces. The two pieces both have the sameserial number of 15 even though they are different pieces.

l The USPS will never scan the other pieces in the firm packages because they are belowpiece 15(1) and 15(8).

See Also

User Guide | 260

Forming firm packages using the copies method

Intelligent Mail® package barcode (IMpb) support for parcels

The Intelligent Mail barcode is to be used on the following mail classes:

l Priority Mail parcels

l First-Class Package Service parcels:

l 1C, Package Service Parcel Single Piece

l 1C, Package Service Parcel

l 1C Parcel

l 1C Irregular Parcel

l Standard Mail parcels:

l STD, Machinable and Marketing Parcels (Regular and Non-Profit)

l STD, Irregular and Marketing Parcels Non-Profit (Regular and Non-Profit)

l Bound Printed Matter:

l PSVC, BPM/MEDIA & LIB Mach Parcels

l PSVC, BPM Irregular Parcels

l PSVC, BPM Carrier Route Irregular Parcels

l Parcel Select:

l PSVC, Parcel Select

l Parcel Select Lightweight:

l PSVC, PSLW Machinable Parcels

l PSVC, PSLW Irregular Parcels

User Guide | 261

TIP The first step to participating in the IMpb program is to enroll on the USPS BusinessCustomer Gateway website. For more detailed information about how to get started with IMpb,go to https://postalpro.usps.com/shipping/impb.

The IMpb is printed in a UCC/EAN Code GS1-128 font, and includes a human-readable portion belowthe barcode. The following USPS graphic is an example of an IMpb barcode:

IMPORTANT The IMpb must be used along with the Shipping Services File.

Supported Commercial Mail constructs

The software supports constructs C02, C03, C06, and C07. In most cases, you'll want to use abarcode with the fewest number of digits.

The combination of all the fields in the Tracking Number section of the barcode must be unique for180 days. The Tracking Number section is sometimes referred to as the Package Identification Code(PIC). The human-readable representation of the barcode is equivalent to the PIC or TrackingNumber. To create unique barcodes, see Assigning and tracking unique serial numbers.

User Guide | 262

IMpb fields

The Package barcode consists of the following fields:

Field Description

Postal Routing AI A 3-digit GS1 application identifier that the USPS uses to designate thepresence of a delivery postal code within a single postal authority. Thisfield value is always 420.

Dest ZIP The 5-digit ZIP Code of the mail piece.

Channel AI The mail piece's originating business induction channel and the locationwhere the USPS can locate a payment record for the mail piece. Thefield values are 92 for a 9-digit Mailer ID or 93 for a 6-digit Mailer ID.

STC A 3-digit service type code that identifies the piece's mail class and anyextra services that are applied to the mail piece. A full list of parcelbarcode service type codes can be found athttps://postalpro.usps.com/node/785.

CAUTION Presort does not perform verification on the service typecodes that you enter manually. In Presort Views, you can select froma list of commonly used codes or you can manually enter a code thatis not listed.

MID The 6- or 9-digit Mailer ID.

Sequence Number The sequence number of the piece. The length of the sequence numberdepends on the barcode construct you choose and the length of theMailer ID.

Check Digit The check digit is calculated by using the Channel AI, STC, MID, andSequence Number fields. This does not include the Postal Routing AI orDest ZIP.

Creating IM package barcodes for parcels

All parcels must have an Intelligent Mail package barcode (IMpb). IM parcel barcodes must beunique for 180 days. This section describes how to set up Presort to create IM package barcodes.See Assigning and tracking unique serial numbers for information about enforcing serial number

User Guide | 263

uniqueness. You must also generate and submit a Shipping Services File, which is required forparcel mailings.

To create IM package barcodes

1. Set the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter in the Execution block to IMpb. This tells thesoftware to create output for your AP fields.

2. Set up the Intelligent Mail block.

3. Set the following parameters in the Version Description block. For information about theseparameters, refer to the Presort Job File Reference.

l Automation Barcode Type

l IMpb Barcode Length Digits

l IMb/IMpb Mailer ID (or PW.IMB_MID in the input file)

l IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start

l IMb/IMpb Serial Num Max

l IMb/IMpb Increment Serial Number

l IMb/IMpb Srvc Type ID/Code (or PW.Srvc_Type in the input file)

l IMb/IMpb Owner By/For Option

4. Populate the input file with the following fields and define them in .DEF file. For informationabout these fields, refer to the Quick Reference for Views and Job File Products Guide.

l PW.AdrSsfUpa

l PW.ZIP and PW.ZIP4 or PW.ZIP10 if the ZIP and ZIP+4 are in the same field

l PW.DPBC

l PW.IMB_MID (if IMb/IMpb Mailer ID was not populated in the Version Descriptionblock)

l PW.IMB_Serial (if you are importing your own serial numbers)

User Guide | 264

l PW.Srvc_Type (if IMb/IMpb Srvc Type ID/Code was not specified in the VersionDescription block)

NOTE The information you set in your PW fields overrides anything you set up inthe job file. When using input fields to set the Mailer ID and/or Sequence Number,you are fully responsible for the uniqueness.

5. A Transaction ID is required for IMpb compliance. It is a unique 12-digit number made up oftwo parts: a date (year, month, and day) and a four-digit number (YYYYMMDD####. Enter adate in the IDEA Pstg Stmt Mlg Date parameter in the Entry Point Description block. Presortuses this date in the date part of the ID (YYYYMMDD). How the Transaction ID is created formore information.

6. Set up the Address Output File Create block to add the following fields:

l IMPB_Dest,8,c - Contains the Routing AI and ZIP Code digits of the package barcode.

l IMPB_PIC,26,c - Contains the Channel AI, Service Type Code, MID, Serial Number andCheck Digit.

l IMPB_Human,32,c - Contains the human readable portion of the IMpb for the addresslabel, includes a space after every 4 digits.

7. Setup the Address Output File Posting block to post these fields. For information aboutthese fields, refer to the Quick Reference for Views and Job File Products Guide.

l AP.IMPB_Dest

l AP.IMPB_PIC

l AP.IMPB_Human

8. Set the following parameters in the Shipping Services File block:

l Output File

l Elec. File Num Mailer ID

l Elec. File Num Serial Num Start

User Guide | 265

l Time Of Mailing

l Elec. File Type

The software automatically creates the information required for Intelligent Mail barcode pallet andsack labels for parcels when Create Package Output File and/or Create Container Output File areset to Yes.

See Also

Shipping Services file

Using IM package barcodes with multi-piece parcels

Presort generates and assigns a unique IM package barcode for every piece in a multi-piece parcel.

You only need to use the barcode on the top piece as the unique bundle ID. If the bundle breaks atUSPS, each piece can still be identified as part of that bundle. Use the AP.PKG_BRK_F output fieldto build a filter for this purpose.

IMpb input and output fields

You can use the following input fields for the IMpb:

Field Description

PW.Srvc_Type Use this input field to set the service type code associated with a particularrecord.

PW.IMB_MID Use this field to set the Mailer ID that appears in the barcode for eachrecord. This field allows you to use different Mailer IDs across the entire job.This sets the MID for the preparer of the mail. This can be the mail pieceowner as well.

PW.IMB_Serial Use this field to set the serial number that appears in the barcode for eachrecord.

PW.IMBOwnrMID If the Mailer (mail preparer) is not the mail piece owner, use this field to setthe MID of the mail piece owner.

Using this field will trigger Presort to create a new version for each MailOwner ID specified if you have Auto-dimensioning enabled in the VersionDefaults block.

User Guide | 266

You can use the following output fields for the IMpb:

Field Description

AP.IMB_ADR_MI Contains the 6- or 9-digit mailer ID for the IM barcode.

This field can be used for letters, flats, and parcels.

AP.IMB_ADR_SN Contains the 6- or 9-digit serial number for the IM barcode or up to 14 maxfor the Package IM barcode.

This field can be used for letters, flats, and parcels.

AP.IMB_PLT Contains the Pallet IM barcode. This field is available only for the palletoutput file.

This field can be used for letters, flats, and parcels.

AP.IMB_RTAUTO Posts the route or auto information to the container output file. For carrierroute direct trays, this field outputs the carrier route code for the pieces inthe tray. For all other trays, if the pieces within the tray are barcoded, thefield output would be "AUTO".

This field can be used for letters, flats, and parcels.

AP.IMB_TRYSCK Contains the 24-digit number for the Tray/Sack IM barcode. This field isavailable only for the container output file.

This field can be used for letters, flats, and parcels.

AP.IMPB_DEST Contains the Routing AI and ZIP Code digits of the Package barcode. Thisfield should be 8 digits in length and is available only for the address outputfile.

AP.IMPB_ENCOD Includes IMpb conversion alpha characters required to print the barcodefont when using inkjet printers. The maximum length of this field is 133characters.

AP.IMPB_HUMAN Contains the human readable portion of the IMpb label. Presort outputs thePIC (Channel AI, Service Type Code, MID, Serial Number, and Check Digit)and adds one space after every 4 digits. The maximum length of this field is32.

User Guide | 267

Field Description

AP.IMPB_PIC Contains the Channel AI, Service Type Code, MID, Serial Number, andCheck Digit (up to 26 digits in length) of the IMpb. This field is available onlyfor the address output file.

NOTE The Tracking Number section is sometimes referred to as thePackage Identification Code (PIC). The human-readable portion of thebarcode is equal to the value of this output field.

Shipping Services File

The Shipping Services File contains specific data records for each item being tendered with a givenshipment. The information in this file is used to support the Intelligent Mail package barcode (IMpb).All parcels must have an Intelligent Mail package barcode (IMpb).

There is more information about IM package barcodes and the Shipping Services File available fromthe USPS in the Intelligent Mail Package Barcode (IMpb) Implementation Guide (Publication 199)found at https://postalpro.usps.com/impbimplementationguide.

Supported file types

Presort supports the generation of file type 1 and file type 2.

File type Purpose Comments

1 eVS tracking andpostage payment

To use eVS, you need special MIDs that are registered as eVS-specific (to avoid potential billing or reconciliation issues.)

Enter 1 in the Electronic File Type parameter in theShipping Services File block to use this file type.

See Electronic Verification System (eVS) for more informationabout using eVS.

2 Confirmationservices tracking

This file type is used for all IMpb mailings not submitted througheVS.

Enter 2 in the Electronic File Type parameter in theShipping Services File block to use this file type.

User Guide | 268

File format

The Shipping Services File is an electronic file containing all manifest and payment information. AShipping Services File must contain a minimum of one manifest. Most Shipping Services Filesgenerally consist of many manifests (one per job) identified by unique header records.

A manifest consists of at least two records: a Header record (H1) for each qualified mailing (one perentry point segment scheme combination), and one or more Detail records (D1 and optionally, D2)for each mail piece within that mailing scheme.

l The Header record is the first record in the Shipping Services File that identifies the mailerinformation and Electronic File Number (EFN).

l The Detail record(s) provides payment details for each package. There must be a detailrecord for every package in the mailing.

Here is an example of a Shipping Services .manifest containing a header record and multiple detailrecords:

The USPS suggests the following naming convention for manifests: <logonid><sequencenumber> .manifest

For example, if your logon ID is "mmcw" and the sequence number for the job was 93, the filenamewould be mmcw93.manifest.

When sending multiple separate files (in one session or in multiple sessions within a few minutes ofeach other) through the PTR, add a sequential identifier (a, b, c, and so on) to the file name to avoidoverwriting existing files: <logonid><sequence number><sequentialidentifier>.manifest

For example, mmcw93a.manifest.

User Guide | 269

Records

Records consist of a specific number of bytes representing data either about a specific entry facility(Header Record) or a specific piece (Detail Record).

l Header 1 (H1): General information about the mailer and specific information about themailing

l Detail 1 (D1): Information about an individual parcel under the Header Record in theelectronic manifest

l Detail 2 (D2): Recipient name and address information as well as fields for email and SMSaddress for the recipient and sender

NOTE Each Header Record in the electronic manifest is identified by an Electronic FileNumber (EFN) that must remain unique for a 180-day period from first use. See Assigning andtracking unique serial numbers.

Fields within the records follow these formatting rules:

l All unpopulated alphanumeric fields will be filled with a space and all numeric fields will befilled with zeroes.

l All alphanumeric fields will have trailing spaces and all numeric fields will be padded withzeroes if the data does not take up the entire field.

Certain fields not required for file type 2 are mandatory for file type 1 (eVS), and are noted. For moreinformation, see the Intelligent Mail Package Barcode (IMpb) Implementation Guide (Publication 199)found at https://postalpro.usps.com/impbimplementationguide.

Header record

The following table explains the required fields in the H1 record. Optional fields are omitted.

Field Name Position Notes

Header RecordID

001 - 002 A two-character system constant that identifies a header record.For example, H1.

User Guide | 270

Field Name Position Notes

Electronic FileNumber

003 - 036 Unique 26-digit number assigned to identify the electronic file.This number must be unique for 180 days from first use andinclude the following information:

l Channel AI (2 digits - Presort uses 92 or 93)

l STC (3 digits - Presort always uses 750)

l MID of the shipper (company transmitting the file) (6 or 9digits. This MID is pulled from the Elec. File Num MailerID parameter in the Shipping Services File block.) This isthe master MID for eVS.

l Serial number (10- or 14-digit SN for 6-digit MID and 7- or11-digit SN for 9-digit MID. This information is pulled fromthe Elec. File Num Serial Num Start parameter in fromthe Shipping Services File block. If 'AUTO' is specified inthis parameter, Presort will use the next available numberin the tracking database.)

l Check Digit (1 digit)

EFNs used in the SSF are printed on the Presort Job Summary.

Electronic FileType

037 - 037 The type of file you are transmitting.

l 1 for Tracking and Postage file for eVS

l 2 for Tracking File for Original Confirmation ServicesFile.

This number is pulled from the Electronic File Type parameterin the Shipping Services block.

Date of Mailing 038 - 045 The date of mailing. This value is pulled from the InductionStart Date parameter in the Entry Point block.

User Guide | 271

Field Name Position Notes

Time of Mailing 046 - 051 The time of the mailing. This value is pulled from the Time ofMailing parameter in the Shipping Services File block.

Entry FacilityType

052 - 052 The type of USPS facility where mail is tendered. This value ispulled from the Entry Point block. Values for this field are asfollows:

l A - ADC

l B - NDC

l S - SCF

l D - DDU

l F - ASF

Entry Facility ZIPCode

053 - 057 The 5-digit ZIP Code of the Post Office where mail is presentedby the mailer. This value is pulled from the Entry Point block.

Entry FacilityZIP+4

058 - 061 This value is pulled from the Entry Point block.

Direct EntryOrigin CountryCode

062 - 063 Required only for international mail.

Shipment FeeCode

064 - 066 Currently used for Pickup on Demand fee. Presort populates thisfield with spaces.

Extra Fee forShipment

067 - 072 Currently used for Pickup on Demand fee. Presort populates thisfield with zeroes.

Filler 073 - 074 N/A

User Guide | 272

Field Name Position Notes

USPS ElectronicFile VersionNumber

075 - 077 The Electronic File Version Number. For example, 017 forversion 1.7.

Transaction ID 078 - 089 The Transaction ID is required for IMpb compliance. It is aunique 12-digit number made up of two parts: a date (year,month, and day) and a four-digit number determined by the last4 digits of the first EFN in the job.

Software VendorCode

090 -093 The 4-character ID that the USPS provides software vendors thatsuccessfully complete the Postal Service file certificationprocess. Presort's vendor number is 0850.

Software VendorProduct VersionNumber

094 - 101 The software's version number. For example, 8.00c.19. Thisfield accepts up to 8 digits.

File RecordCount

102 - 110 The total number of all records in the electronic file. Thisincludes Header records and all Detail records within thatfacility. Leading zeroes are required.

Mailer ID 111 - 119 Mailer ID contained in the Electronic File Number. This is theMailer ID certified for file transmission.

Filler 120 - 130 N/A

Detail records

The following tables explain the required fields in the D1 and D2 records. Optional fields areomitted.

Required D1 fields

Field Name Position Notes

Detail Record ID 001 - 002 Identifies the type of electronic record. For example, D1.

IMpb 003 - 036 Tracking number encoded in the barcode on the package.

User Guide | 273

Field Name Position Notes

Class of Mail 037 - 038 Class of Mail codes:

l BB - Bound Printed Matter

l BL - Library Mail

l BS - Media Mail

l FC - First-Class Mail

l PS - Parcel Select

l LW - Parcel Select Lightweight

l SA - Standard Mail

l S2 - Standard Mail Non-Profit

Service TypeCode

039 - 042 N/A

BarcodeConstruct Code

043 - 046 Barcode Construct Codes:

l C02 - 9-digit MID, 11-digit serial, 5-digit ZIP Code

l C03 - 9-digit MID, 7-digit serial, 5-digit ZIP Code

l C06 - 6-digit MID, 14-digit serial, 5-digit ZIP Code

l C07 - 6-digit MID, 10-digit serial, 5-digit ZIP Code

Destination ZIPCode

047 - 051 N/A

Destination ZIP+4 052 - 055 N/A

User Guide | 274

Field Name Position Notes

DestinationFacility Type

056 - 056 Type of USPS facility where Mail is tendered.

l A - ADC

l B - NDC

l S - SCF

l D - DDU

l F - ASF

LogisticsManager MailerID

075 - 083 MID of company that manages/prepares the mailing of thisshipment.

This value is pulled from either the IMb/IMpb MailerID parameter in the Version block or the PW.IMB_MID inputfield if populated.

Presort will populate this field only if the Logistics Manager MIDand the Mail Owner MID are NOT the same.

Mail OwnerMailer ID

084 - 092 This value is pulled from the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameterin Version block.

Presort will populate this field only if the Logistics Manager MIDand the Mail Owner MID are NOT the same.

PaymentAccount Number

275 - 284 Presort will populate this field with the value entered in thePermit No. parameter from the version block.

Method ofPayment

285 - 286 Presort only supports Permit postage payment methods for theShipping Services File.

Presort populates this field with 01 when the Postage PaymentMethod parameter in the Mailing Information block is set toPermit.

User Guide | 275

Field Name Position Notes

Post Office ofAccount ZIPCode

287 - 291 For File Type 1 (eVS), this field will be populated with 20260.

For File Type 2, Presort will populate this field with the valueentered in the Permit Holder ZIP+4 parameter in the Versionblock.

Postage 318 - 324 Required only for File Type 1 (eVS).

This field is populated with spaces in File Type 2.

Postage Type 325 Required only for File Type 1 (eVS). Presort only supports P(Published).

This field is populated with spaces in File Type 2.

Unit of MeasureCode

362 Unit:

l 1 - LBS

l 2 - OZ

l 3 - KILOS

Weight 363 - 371 Leading zeroes required. In unit of measure and significant to 4decimal positions. For example, 14.3 lbs would be entered as'000143250'.

ProcessingCategory

372 Supported category codes:

l 3 - Machinable Parcel

l 4 - Irregular Parcel

Rate Indicator 373 - 374 For File type 1 (eVS), describes the kind of price paid. Forexample, 5D is 5-digit price, BM is NDC price.

For File Type 2, this field is populated with XX.

User Guide | 276

Field Name Position Notes

DestinationDelivery Point

506 - 507 An additional two digits placed at the end of the ZIP+4 Codethat completes the 11-digit Delivery Point ZIP Code.

DestinationDelivery Address

627 - 674 Destination delivery address is populated in this field if the 11-digit ZIP Code is not available.

Does not include city or state. May contain secondary unitdesignator, such as APT or SUITE.

Required D2 fields

NOTE Although the D2 record is not required by the USPS, Presort will still generate it if theCity Name and State are available.

Field Name Position Notes

Detail Record ID 001 - 002 Identifies the type of electronic record. For example, D2.

IMpb 003 - 036 Tracking number encoded in the barcode on the package.

Filler 037 - 132 N/A

City Name 133 - 160 N/A

State 161 - 162 N/A

DeliveryZIP Code

163 - 167 N/A

How the Transaction ID is created

The Transaction ID is required for IMpb compliance. It is a unique 12-digit number made up of twoparts: a date (year, month, and day) and a four-digit number. Presort determines the transaction IDautomatically and populates it in the Shipping Services File (in the Header Record positions 078-089) and prints it on the FCPS, STD, and PSVC Sum Job postage statements. The Transaction ID isthe same for all header records within the whole job and is unique per job per day.

The format is YYYYMMDD####; for example: 201402281234, where 20140228 is the date ofFebruary 28, 2014. The last four digits (1234 in the example) are the same as the last 4 digits of the

User Guide | 277

first EFN serial number used in the job. This ensures Transaction ID uniqueness for mailers that runmultiple jobs in a single day.

You must enter a date in the IDEA Pstg Stmt Mlg Date parameter. Presort uses this date in the datepart of the ID (YYYYMMDD). If there are multiple entry points with different dates, the first entrypoint postage statement mailing date will be used.

The Transaction ID also appears on the SUM JOB format postage statement.

For more information, see the Intelligent Mail Package Barcode (IMpb) Implementation Guide(Publication 199) found at https://postalpro.usps.com/impbimplementationguide.

Including the Destination Delivery Address or Delivery Point Validated (DPV) 11-digit ZIP Code forALL Parcel mailings

To comply with the USPS IMpb requirements, ALL Shipping Services Files must include either thecomplete Destination Delivery Address or the Delivery Point Validated (DPV) 11-digit ZIP Code. Ifneither of these pieces of information is provided, mail pieces will receive the single piece rate, ornot sort at all, depending on the class of mail.

The 11-digit DPV ZIP Code consists of the 5-digit ZIP Code, the ZIP+4, and the 2-digit DestinationDelivery Point. You must define the following input fields in your DEF file and map them to theappropriate fields:

l Both PW.ZIP (ZIP Code field) AND PW.ZIP4 (ZIP+4 field); OR just PW.ZIP10 (field for both ZIPand ZIP+4, including the hyphen)

l PW.DPBC (Destination Delivery Point field)

If the 11-digit ZIP Code is not available, Presort will use the destination delivery address informationto populate the Shipping Services File (.manifest) and the Uncoded Parcel Address (UPA) file. Youmust define PW.AdrSsfUpa in your definition file and map it to the primary address field of yourinput file in order for the D2 record to be created properly. (For example: PW.AdrSsfUpa=addr_1.) This field must be populated with the destination delivery address when the 11-digit ZIP Code isnot present.

Presort first looks for the 11-digit ZIP Code to verify that the piece should qualify for presorted prices.If an address does not have an 11-digit ZIP Code, Presort looks at the PW.AdrSsfUpa input field fordestination delivery address information. If any information in present in this field, Presort will treatthe record as if it has an 11-digit ZIP Code and allow it to qualify for presorted prices.

You must create .UPA file if the 11-digit ZIP Code is not available. To create a .UPA file, set theCreate IDEA UPA File (Y/N) to Y in the IDEA Mail.dat block.

User Guide | 278

IMpb Mailer IDs (MIDs)

You are required to use a conforming Mailer ID (MID) if you are using IMpb. A conforming MID isdefined as follows:

l A six-digit MID that begins with 0–8

l A nine-digit MID that begins with 9

AcquiringMIDs

If you are a mail preparer making mailings on behalf of one or more mail owners, you must request aunique Mailer ID for each mail owner to designate package ownership. Both eVS and non-eVSmailing agents must assign a unique MID for each mail owner. This MID will be used exclusively forthat client, for mailings with that particular mailing agent.

You can request a MID though the Business Customer Gateway (BCG). You may not use a MID untilit is registered.

l Customers that are considered mail preparers must obtain and register a MID for inclusion ina Shipping Services file.

l Customers that are considered mail owners must complete certification processes to obtaina MID for inclusion in a Shipping Services file.

There are additional requirements for acquiring and using MIDs for eVS. See eVS Mailer IDs (MIDs).

How Presort populates MIDs for Parcel mailings

Presort uses the value in the Elec. File Num Mailer ID parameter from the Shipping Services blockto create the Electronic File Number in the H1 record (position 4-37).

Presort populates the Tracking Number field (position 3-36) in the D1 record with the mail preparerMID, which comes from the IMB Mailer ID parameter in the Version Defaults block or the PW.IMB_MID input field. (This is the MID of the company that is managing the mailing.)

NOTE Either the IMB Mailer ID parameter in the Version block or the PW.IMB_MID input fieldcan be populated with the mail preparer MID. If both of these are populated, Presort defaults tousing the MID in the PW.IMB_MID field.

The way Presort populates the mail preparer MID and mail owner MID into the D1 record of theShipping Services File depends on if you are the mail preparer only, or both the mail preparer andthe mail owner. Presort determines this by comparing the mail preparer MID (from either the

User Guide | 279

IMB Mailer ID or the PW.IMB_MID field) and the mail owner MID (from the Mailer ID of Mail Owneror the PW.IMBOwnrMID field).

l If the MIDs do not match, Presort determines that you are the mail preparer only.

l Presort populates the Logistics Manager Mailer ID field (position 075-083) with themail preparer MID, which comes from the IMB Mailer ID parameter in the Versionblock or the MID in the PW.IMB_MID input field.

l Presort populates the Mail Owner Mailer ID field (position 084-092) with the mailowner MID, which comes from the Mailer ID of Mail Owner parameter in the Versionblock or the PW.IMBOwnrMID input field.

l If the MIDs do match, Presort determines that you are both the mail preparer and the mailowner.

l Presort will NOT populate the Logistics Manager Mailer ID field OR the Mail OwnerMailer ID field of the D1 record. Because both MIDs are the same, the TrackingNumber, which contains your mail preparer MID, is all that is needed to indicate thatyou are both the mail preparer and the mail owner.

Multiple mail owners

If you have multiple mail owners in a job, you can populate the PW.IMBOwnrMID input field toassign a specific mail owner MID to each piece in the job. This MID will take precedence over theMID in the Mailer ID of Mail Owner ID parameter in the Version Block.

Report: Shipping Services File

When the Intelligent Mail Barcode parameter in the Execution block is set to IMpb, you mustpopulate these parameters in the Report: Shipping Services File block.

Parameter Description

Output File Enter the path to the folder in which you want Presort to putyour output files. Also include the base file name. Thesoftware automatically adds the .manifestextension foryou.

Elec. File Num Mailer ID The 6- or 9-digit Mailer ID that is included in the unique 26-digit number assigned to identify the electronic file.

User Guide | 280

Parameter Description

Elec. File Num Serial Num Start The starting number for the serial number that is included inthe unique 26-digit number assigned to identify the electronicfile.

If you are using a 6-digit MID, the serial number will be 10- or14-digits.

If you are using a 9-digit MID, the serial number will be 7- or 11-digits.

TIP Look at the Job Summary report to find the range ofnumbers used.

Time of Mailing The time (in HHMM format) you ran the mailing.

Electronic Verification System (eVS) for IMpb

This feature requires a license key to use. Contact your BCC Software Sales Representative formore information.

The Electronic Verification System (eVS®) allows parcel shippers to prepare parcel mailings withIMpb compliant shipping labels, submit a single Shipping Services File (.manifest) for Tracking andPostage Payment, and manage quality across all mailings with a monthly reconciliation process.

There are many benefits of using eVS:

l You can use a single national permit account for all mailing sites.

l There is no permit imprint application fee.

l You can bypass the traditional Mail Acceptance/Verification process at Business Mail EntryUnit; enter mail directly at Origin or Destination facilities.

l Mail entry times are flexible with FAST appointments.

l You do not need to submit PS Form 8125 for Drop-Shipments.

l Electronic postage statements generated from the Shipping Services File are visible inPostalOne! along with additional account monitoring and mailing data reports.

NOTE eVS requires secure transmission of materials in order to ensure data security and

User Guide | 281

integrity of its systems and those of USPS customers.

IMPORTANT You must generate a Shipping Services File type 1 when using eVS. You specifythe file type in the Electronic File Type parameter. File type 1 requires that the electronic filenumber (EFN) in the Header record and the IMpb number in the Detail 1 record be unique for 180days. Also, certain fields in the Detail 1 record that are not required for file type 2 are mandatoryfor file type 1. See Shipping Services File for more information.

The following references contain more details about using eVS:

l Intelligent Mail Package Barcode (IMpb) Implementation Guide (Publication 199) athttps://postalpro.usps.com/impbimplementationguide

l Electronic Verification System (eVS®) Business and Technical Guide (Publication 205) athttps://postalpro.usps.com/pub205

l DMM 705.2.1.2 Electronic Verification System

l https://postalpro.usps.com/shipping/evs

eVS Mailer IDs (MIDs)

Using eVS requires a unique MID that identifies the eVS mailer or the eVS mailer’s client, and canonly be used for eVS mailings and data file transmission.

Each eVS mailer must have a single master MID (used for file transmissions from the eVS mailer andmust be the MID used in the unique EFN submitted for all eVS files), and may have multiple pieceMIDs relating to each mailing site. Mail Service Providers (MSPs) must have a unique MID for eachclient. For information on how MIDs are populated in the Shipping Services File, see Mailer ID (MID)and Mail Ownership.

An eVS MID typically contains 9 digits and begins with "9". It is possible to get a 6-digit MID if youmeet certain conditions.

To receive an eVS MID, you must first establish a permit account number exclusively for eVS useand obtain a CAPS Debit postage payment account. Then you can request a Mailer Identification(MID) number from the USPS Business Customer Gateway. You must then have those MIDs eVS-certified. For details, see "Appendix B" in the Electronic Verification System (eVS®) Business andTechnical Guide (Publication 205) at https://postalpro.usps.com/pub205.

User Guide | 282

Mail preparation for eVS

You must prepare mail for eVS according to the standards in DMM 705 and the following additionalstandards:

l Only items as defined in the DMM may be mailed using eVS.

l Assigned eVS permit imprint may only be used as the postage payment method for eVSmailings.

l Destination entry rate mail must meet the applicable standards in the DMM.

l Presort rate mail must meet the applicable presort standards and volumes in the DMM.

l All mail must meet the classification and content eligibility requirements in the DMM.Content Based Prices (Bound Printed Matter, Library Mail and Media) are subject toinspection and review.

l eVS mail must be separated from non-eVS mail when presented for mailing. At a minimum,eVS and non-eVS mail must be presented in separate containers and clearly identified.

l Postage must be computed according to the applicable standards in the DMM, includingDMM 604.7.0 for computing postage.

Parcel marking requirements

l Each parcel included in an eVS mailing must bear the same permit imprint indicia followingthe standards in DMM 604.5.0 on use and format

l Each parcel mailed under eVS must bear the appropriate eVS label with all the appropriatemarkings following the standards in DMM. Please refer to the USPS Parcel Labeling Guide,available on RIBBS, for further details and sample images.

User Guide | 283

Container marking requirements

l DMM 202.3.8(b) "Elements on the Face of a Mailpiece -- Exceptions to Markings": Mailmanifested using the Electronic Verification System (eVS) under 705.2.0 must bear the basicmarking and the additional marking “eVS” (or the alternative "e-VS" or "EVS") in two places:

l In the required permit imprint as described in 604.5.0.

l In the human-readable text above the required barcode described in 705.2.9 and204.2.2.

l DMM 203.5.4 "Electronic Verification System": All sacks containing parcels prepared andidentified using the Electronic Verification System (eVS) under 705.2.9 must show "eVS" (orthe alternatives "EVS" or "E-VS") on the label directly below Line 3 using the same size andlettering used for Line 3. As an option, "eVS" may be placed as the first element on Line 3.

Label design files that meet these requirements are available in Label Studio 7.90c.04.00.

Assigning and tracking unique serial numbers

As a requirement to comply with the Full Service Mail option, the USPS requires that informationsuch as Intelligent Mail (IM) barcodes and electronic file numbers be unique for a minimum numberof days from the postage statement mailing date. Presort can automatically create unique serialnumbers and assign them to letters and flats, trays/sacks, pallets, parcels, and air freight boxes(AFB). (AFB numbers are tracked as pallet numbers, not sack numbers, regardless of the AFBweight. See AFB pricing for details.)

NOTE This feature is sometimes referred to as "IMb tracking," "IMpb tracking," or "uniquenesstracking."

See https://postalpro.usps.com/GuidesandSpecs for more information about Intelligent Mail.

Uniqueness periods of serial numbers

Uniqueness periods of serial numbers vary depending on what the number is tracking:

l IM barcodes (IMb) must be unique for at least 45 days for letters and flats.

l IM parcel barcodes (IMpb) must be unique for 180 days for parcels.

l Presort will enforce a uniqueness period of 180 days for the Electronic File Number (EFN).

User Guide | 284

(The EFN is used in the Header 1 record of the Shipping Services File to uniquely identify thefile.)

l Presort will enforce a uniqueness period of 180 days for pallet barcodes for all piece types(letters, flats, and parcels). Presort does not track pallets of letters and flats separately frompallets of parcels, so ALL pallet barcodes must be unique for 180 days.

l Container (tray and sack) barcodes must be unique for 45 days if the container holds lettersor flats, or 180 days if the container holds parcels. Presort tracks containers of letters and flatsseparately from containers of parcels; containers have a different CIN for each mail class thatprovide uniqueness.

l Air freight box (AFB) barcodes are tracked like pallets, and therefore will be unique for 180days.

By default, Presort will enforce the uniqueness of a serial number for the minimum number of daysrequired, from the date in the Date to Start Tracking parameter. You can increase the uniquenessperiods to 90, 180, or 365 days for letters and flats and 365 days for parcels and the electronic filenumber by using a copy of one of the sample databases located in the ...\ss\pst\samplesfolder. (Be sure to make a copy of the sample database and place it in the appropriate location forthis purpose before you use it;do not write to the sample database itself.)

If you need a uniqueness period of something other than 45, 90, 180, or 365 days, or are using anexisting tracking database file and want to change the uniqueness period, contact BCC SoftwareTechnical Support for assistance.

The sample tracking database files are:

Filename Uniqueness period

sample_45.s3db 45 days

sample_90.s3db 90 days

sample_180.s3db 180 days

sample_365.s3db 365 days

* If you are using the 45-day uniqueness tracking database file, verify that the Date to Start Trackingvalue is accurate.

User Guide | 285

Sample job #3 is set up to assign and track serial numbers, located in ...\ss\pst\samples. Thefilenames for each platform are:

l UNIX: quikunx3.pst

l Windows: QUIKWIN3.PST

How unique serial numbers are created

Presort creates unique serial numbers by combining the mailer ID and a serial number. This uniqueserial number is stored in a database along with the date that was entered in the Date to StartTracking parameter. (If you used the $date or $date+<<n number of days>> macro, the date ascalculated by the macro is stored in the database.) Presort verifies the uniqueness of a serial numberby determining whether the number has previously been used and how long ago it started beingtracked. In this example, we will use a uniqueness period of 45 days.

Presort first searches the database for the mailer id and serial number combination. If the numberexists, this means that the serial number has been used. If the serial number has been used, Presortchecks the date entered to start tracking the number. If the date that tracking started is within 45days of the mailing date, Presort will not reuse this number at this time. Presort will increment theserial number it attempts to use until it finds a number that has not been used in the last 45 days.Once Presort identifies a serial number that has not been used in the last 45 days, Presort combinesthe number with your mailer ID and assigns this unique serial number to your mail piece.

Each time you process a job with serial number tracking, Presort will start with the lowest availablenumber in the database. For example, if numbers 1 to 1000 were last used for a job that was runmore than 45 days ago, these numbers are available to be reused. Presort will use 1 as the firstnumber to assign when you run your next job.

NOTE Serial numbers are identified as available only in batches, so you may notice thatgroups of available serial numbers are skipped if your mailing requires more serial numbers thanare in a range of available numbers. To continue the previous example, if your job requires 1500serial numbers, Presort will not start at 1 in this case. Even though serial numbers 1 - 1000 areolder than 45 days and available to be reused, Presort must find a range of at least 1500available numbers. Presort will start with the first number of that range. So, say the first numberin that range is 5000, Presort will reuse numbers up to 6500. When you run your next job,Presort will repeat this process, starting at 1 and looking for a range of available dates toaccommodate the number of serial numbers needed by the job.

To assign and track unique barcode serial numbers

This section describes the parameters for assigning and tracking unique barcode serial numbers.

User Guide | 286

For instructions on assigning and tracking electronic file numbers, see To assign and track electronicfile numbers.

Assigning barcode serial numbers

Set the following parameters as shown to assign barcode serial numbers.

NOTE The AUTO option for all serial number start parameters is used for automaticallyassigning and tracking serial numbers. Presort will automatically assign the next available serialnumber and track it in the tracking database. If AUTO is specified in any of the serial numberstart parameters, you must set up your job for tracking .

Execution block

Intelligent Mail Barcode imb or impb

Intelligent Mail block

Pallet Serial Num Start <your number> or AUTO

Pallet Serial Num is Alphanum Y or N

Tray/Sack Serial Num Start <your number> or AUTO

Tray/Sack Increment Serial Num Y or N

Version Defaults block

IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start <your number> or AUTO

IMb/IMpb Serial Num Max <your number>

IMb/IMpb Increment SerialNumber

Y or N

User Guide | 287

Version Description block

IMb/IMpb Serial Num Start <your number> or AUTO

IMb/IMpb Serial Num Max <your number>

IMb/IMpb Increment SerialNumber

Y or N

Tracking barcode serial numbers

In addition to setting the parameters for assigning barcode serial numbers, set these parameters asshown to track the serial numbers.

Intelligent Mail block

Track Serial Numbers l ALL to track all barcode serial numbers

or

l EXCLUDE INPUT to track piece and containerserial numbers generated by Presort, but notthose that were already present (along with aMID numbera) when records were input toPresort

IMb/IMpb Job ID (to 8 chars) <job ID#>

IMb/IMpb Database (path &imb.s3db)

<database path and filename>

This path must point to an initialized database (.s3db)file, such as the file provided with Presort.

Date to Start Tracking(MMDDYYYY)

<The first day of the uniqueness period>

You can also use $date or $date+<<Xnumber of days>>in this parameter.

a If an imported record contains a serial number but not a Mailer ID number (MID), the serialnumber will still be tracked. The only serial numbers excluded from tracking are imported serialnumbers in records that also contain a MID.

User Guide | 288

To assign and track electronic file numbers

This section describes the parameters for assigning and tracking unique electronic file numbers.

For instructions on assigning and tracking barcode serial numbers, see To assign and track uniquebarcode serial numbers.

Assigning electronic file numbers

Set the following parameters as shown to assign electronic file numbers.

NOTE The AUTO option for all serial number start parameters is used for automaticallyassigning and tracking serial numbers. Presort will assign and track the next available serialnumber in the tracking database when you specify AUTO. If AUTO is specified in any of theserial number start parameters, you must set up your job for tracking .

Shipping Services File

Elec. File Num Serial Num Start <number> or AUTO

Tracking electronic file numbers

In addition to setting the parameters for assigning electronic file numbers, set these parameters asshown to track the numbers.

Intelligent Mail

Track Serial Nums Y

IMb/IMpb Job ID (to 8 chars) <job ID#>

IMb/IMpb Database (path &imb.s3db)

<database path and filename>

This path must point to an initialized imb.s3db file, suchas the file provided with Presort.

Date to Start Tracking (MMDDYYYY) <The first day of the uniqueness period>

You can also use $date or $date+<<n number of days>> inthis parameter.

User Guide | 289

Regenerating reports and output files without re-presorting

After running a job to assign and track serial numbers, if you want to run the job again to justregenerate reports and output, the job may be re-presorted and new serial numbers may be createdand assigned based on what the serial numbers are for:

l For address pieces, new serial numbers will NOT be created or assigned to the pieces if youset the Presort parameter to No in the Execution block. If you set this parameter to Yes,your job will be re-presorted and new serial numbers will be created and assigned.

l For electronic file numbers, parcels, containers, and pallets, if the Presort parameter is set toNo, your job will not be re-presorted, but new serial numbers will be created and assigned.However they will not be tracked in the database. If the Presort parameter is set to Yes,your job will be re-presorted and new serial numbers will be created and assigned, and theywill be tracked in the database. We recommend leaving the Presort parameter set to Yes totrack the newly assigned serial numbers so they are not re-used too early.

Keep in mind that re-presorting could change the sortation of your mailing.

User Guide | 290

Introduction to reportsThe software generates all the reports that you'll need to submit to the USPS with a mailing. The soft-ware also provides reports for your own management, for clients, or for other bureaus or vendors.

See Also

USPS forms to submit with mailings

Reports for your own mail management

The software creates reports for each mailing

To the USPS, each mailing is a separate deposit, and each must be separately documented and paid.So when your job involves multiple mailings, the software generates reports for each one auto-matically.

Most jobs do result in more than one legal mailing. As we've said, each presort scheme, entry point,segment, and version (Periodicals only) results in a separate mailing.

For example, consider a Standard Mail job that involves two entry points and two presort schemes.Although you set up the Postage Statement only once, the software automatically generates fourstatements.

User Guide | 291

Figuring out the total number of mailings in a job

To find out the total number of mailings in your job, use the provided formulas.

NOTE The formulas provided yield the maximum possible number of mailings. Your actualnumber may be less because each combination of entry point, segment, and scheme is a poten-tial mailing. If there are not enough pieces to form a mailing, the software cancels it, and alsocancels the reports that would have gone with it.

First-Class, Standard Mail, and Package Services

Maximum number of legal,documented mailings inthe job

= Number of pre-sort schemes

X Number ofsegments

X Number of entrypoints

Periodicals

In Periodicals Class, each edition must be documented as a separate mailing. For Periodicals mailersthe formula is as follows:

Maximum number of legal,documented mailings inthe job

= Number ofpresortschemes

X Numberofsegments

X Number ofentrypoints

X Number ofversions oreditions

Exceptions

Some reports cover more than one mailing, or the whole job. So when the software produces thesereports, it makes only one of each, no matter how many mailings in the job.

l Job Summary

l USPS Register of Mailings

l PVDS Consolidated Postage Statement Register

l Any report printed in a "summary" format

Required reports

The USPS requires certain reports for each mail class. This following tables should help you decidewhat reports you must create and what reports we recommend you create to help you manage yourmailings.

User Guide | 292

First-Class reports

The following table lists required and recommended reports for the First-Class:

Job type Required report Recommended reports

First-Class mailing PS Form 3600

USPS Qualification Report

Job Summary

Mail Sort Listing inContainer or Packageformat

First-Class manifest mailing USPS Manifest Listing, Detail andSummary versions

N/A

First-Class job

Mixed weight, metered, butnot registered for ManifestMailing System

PS Form 3600, Summaryversion

N/A

Periodicals class reports

The following table lists required and recommended reports for Periodicals:

Job type Required report Recommended reports

Periodicals mailing PS Form 3541

USPS Qualification Report ZIPCode Listing in USPS format

Job Summary

Mail Sort Listing inContainer or Packageformat

Periodicals job

Drop-shipping withpayment made atentry facility

PS Form 8125 N/A

User Guide | 293

Job type Required report Recommended reports

Periodicals job withCentralized PostagePayment (CPP)

USPS Register of Mailings

If you have a single job, the soft-ware produces a CPP Postage State-ment. If you have multiple runs thatneed to be consolidated on a singleCPP statement, you must useanother software product to com-bine the presort information ontoone consolidated CPP PostageStatement.

N/A

CAUTION If your Periodicals job contains polybags generated with the static polybags add-onfeature of Presort, the postage numbers in reports can serve as an estimate of your postagecosts, but these numbers may not be exact. Please use your post presorting software orPostalOne! to generate postage statements for jobs that include polybags.

Standard Mail reports

The following table lists required and recommended reports for Standard Mail:

Job type Required reports Recommended reports

Standard Mail mailing PS Form 3602

USPS Qualification Report

Job Summary

Mail Sort Listing inContainer or Packageformat

Standard Mail manifestmailing

USPS Manifest Listing, Detailand Summary versions

N/A

User Guide | 294

Job type Required reports Recommended reports

Standard Mail,drop-shipping

PS Form 8125 USPS Registerof Mailings

PVDS Consolidated PostageStatement Register

USPS Postage StatementSummary (one for the wholejob, and one for each entry point)

N/A

Package Services reports

The following table lists required and recommended reports for the Package Services:

Job type Required reports Recommended reports

Package Servicesmailing

PS Form 3605

USPS Qualification Report

ZIP Code Listing in USPS format

Job Summary

Mail Sort Listing in Container orPackage format

Package Services,drop-shipping

PS Form 8125

USPS Register of Mailings

USPS Postage Statement Sum-mary (one for the whole job, andone for each entry point)

N/A

Package Servicespalletized mailing

USPS Pallet Mixed-ZoneListing (for BPM mailings only)

N/A

User Guide | 295

Mixed-class comail reports

The following table lists required and recommended reports for the Mixed-class comail:

Job Type Required reports Recommended reports

Mixed-classcomail mailing

USPS Qualification Report

Plant-Verified Drop Shipment(PVDS) Verification and Clear-ance

PS Form 3541

PS Form 3602

Detailed Zone Listing(ZIP Code Listing inUSPS format)

Bundle totals (Mail SortListing in PKG or EXT format)

Job Summary

NOTE In order to produce some postage statements for Mixed-class comail, you must use aMail.dat tool.

Report file set up

You can send your reports directly to your printer or to a file. Saving reports to a file gives you achance to preview reports before committing them to paper. That's a sensible precaution, especiallywhen the job involves a new user, an unfamiliar mailing list, or other unknowns.

User Guide | 296

You need to decide how you want the software to save your reports. You have the followingchoices:

Method Description

One file The software can write all your reports into one file. The single report file canbecome quite large, but the software offers options that can help you organ-ize and print it conveniently. For example, you can insert banner pages andprinter-control codes.

To save your reports to one file, navigate to the Report Defaults block andenter location and file name information into the Location and FileName/Printer Device parameter.

Multiple files You may choose to write each report to a separate file. This approach givesyou more files to handle, but it's easier to find a particular report. Multiplefiles can be smaller and you have more control over printing them.

To do this, navigate to a specific report block (for example, Job Summary) andenter location and file name information into the Location and FileName/Printer Device parameter.

See Also

Banner pages

Printer-controlled report formats

Organize your report files

If you choose to place all reports in one file, you can then choose how the reports are organizedwithin that file.

To organize your report files

User Guide | 297

1. Navigate to the Report Defaults block.

2. Choose a value for the Report Order parameter.

Option Description

Report type Tells the software to group all the Postage Statements, then all theMail Sort Listings, and so on.

Mailing Tells the software to group all reports for each mailing. After that thesoftware produces the summary reports (Job Summary, PostageStatement summaries, and any other reports printed in summaryformat).

3. Name your report file by entering location and file name information into the Location andFile Name/Printer Device parameter.

To save time and keep files manageable, the software offers a shortcut for naming reportfiles. It's called $job ("dollar job"). The following table shows an example of how you mightname your files:

Job file Report type Report namein job file

Report nameafter processing

northern.pst Job Summary

Pstg Stmt 3602

Mail Sort Listing

USPS QualificationReport

$job.pjs

$job.362

$job.msl

$job.pqr

northern.pjs

northern.362

northern.msl

northern.pqr

Report formats

Before printing reports, you need to set several options to help define their appearance. These set-tings include page dimensions, margins, and header lines, and so on.

You can set these options once and make them apply to all reports in the Report Defaults window.Then, if you want a particular report to look a little different, you can override your default settingsby changing the settings in the applicable report block.

User Guide | 298

However, some formatting is strictly governed by the USPS (for example, the format of facsimileforms such as Postage Statements). Most other reports are formatted as follows:

l The report name is shown in the upper left-hand corner of each page.

l Normally, the software name and version number are shown. You have the option to sup-press this information at the Report Defaults window, but we highly recommend that youchoose to display it.

l You can define up to four header lines. You can enter them once, to appear the same on allreports, or set up a different header for a particular report type. The software will print all fourlines at the top of many reports. However, at the top of USPS facsimile forms, there is roomfor only the first three page header lines and only the first 40 characters of each of thoselines.

l Mailing identification information helps you to see the portion of the job that this report isabout. This may include the presort scheme, entry point, and segment.

l The report format and, if applicable, the portion of the report are shown.

Banner pages

A banner page announces the beginning of a report in large type and makes it easier to find yourway in a thick stack of reports. You can use banners to separate one mailing from the next, or onetype of report from another type. At the bottom of each banner page, the software lists the entrypoint, segment, and presort scheme names that define the separate mailings.

Use the Banner Page parameter in the Report Defaults window to print a banner page only at thebeginning of the job, at the beginning of each mailing or report type, or if you don't want to print anybanner pages at all.

Printer controlled report formats

With some types of printers, you can select font, lines-per-inch, and other options on the controlpanel. This works fine; however, if the settings aren't saved in the printer's memory, you are forcedto edit your settings every time you print.

A better way is to embed printer-control codes (also known as escape sequences) in your reports.You can set up these codes in your job, using features called Printer Init and Printer Reset. You canset up one format (one set of codes) for USPS facsimile forms, and another for the mail-managementreports. Also see Presort Job-File Reference.

User Guide | 299

Smooth report lines

By using extended ACSII characters, the software can make the following forms with smooth reportlines. This allows you to create more professional looking USPS facsimile forms.

l USPS Postage Statement Form 3600 (1C)

l USPS Postage Statement Form 3541 (PER)

l USPS Postage Statement Form 3602 (STD)

l USPS Postage Statement Form 3605 (PSVC)

l PVDS Consolidated Postage Statement Register (STD)

l USPS Drop Shipment Document Form 8125 (PER/STD/PSVC)

NOTE The USPS Drop Shipment Document Form 8125 (PER/STD/PSVC) block also controls the3152a form.

Select the Print Extended ASCII Characters option in Views or type Y in Job-file if your printer sup-ports the extended ASCII character set. If your printer can print characters in the extended ASCII set,the software will draw the form with smooth lines. If you indicate that you can't print extendedASCII, the software will use hyphens and pipes instead. If you're not sure, please check your printermanual.

Printable area for reports

Because of margins (top and bottom, left and right), report text cannot occupy the entire sheet.Remember to subtract your margins from the height and width of your paper. The result is called theprintable area. If you set ½-inch margins, for example, the printable area of a normal sheet is just 7.5by 10 inches, not 8.5 by 11.

USPS reports

Most of our facsimiles of USPS reports require a printable area of at least 88 lines long and 132 char-acters wide. To print them on letter-size paper (8.5 by 11 inches), you will need to use a condensedfont, a small point size (7 or 8 pt.), and narrow margins (usually .25 inch). Some reports require a print-able area of up to 107 lines.

The required lines for each USPS form is listed in the Job-File Reference manual (Appendix A) or theViews online help (keyword search on reports).

User Guide | 300

Other reports

The non-USPS reports that you can use for mail management require a minimum printable area atleast 132 characters wide. If you provide a wider printable area (up to 250 characters), the softwarewill use the extra space to print data in more columns. So a wider report occupies fewer sheets andmay print faster. We recommend a wide-carriage printer and 11- by 14-inch paper.

Use two printers when printing a lot of reports

If you're going to be printing a lot of reports, you might save time by investing in a second printer.Set up one printer with letter-sized paper for USPS forms, and another with wide "computer" paperfor reports. This will save you the trouble of changing papers and print modes all the time.

You may also be able to print faster by using two printers. The software, by itself, cannot drive twoprinters at the same time. However, it can take advantage of system or network spooling, becausethe software can generate reports faster than your printer can print them.

On-Demand Reporting

It's very common in the mailing industry to divide a job and enter it over two or more days. Forexample, you might split up a job if the following occurs:

l A job is too large to prepare all in one day.

l Key equipment fails before the job is complete, so you enter the mail that you have done. (Ifyou've ever scrambled to enter a partial job because of equipment failure, then you knowwhy On-Demand Reporting might be a day-saver.)

l In-home dates—that is, delivery dates—are deliberately staggered so that the customer ser-vice department receives orders at a steady pace.

When you submit a day's mail, the acceptance clerk will expect to see forms that reflect just that por-tion of the job. With On-Demand Reporting, you can print a suite of reports that reflect just a portionof your mailing. You'll then have the USPS forms you need to submit with your partial mailing.

When you use On-Demand Reporting, the software tailors all of the reports produced except one.The Job Summary always reflects the entire job; its scope is never affected by On-Demand Report-ing.

Set a range for On-Demand Reporting

You need to tell the software what portion of the job you intend to mail. You do this by setting arange of pallet, container, package, or piece numbers. Actually you can specify more than one

User Guide | 301

range.

When you specify ranges, use absolute numbers: numbers that start at 1 at the beginning of the jobstream, and keep going up through the end of the whole job. You can find absolute numbers listedin the Running Totals column on the Mail Sort Listing.

In the General Output window of the job, you may select other styles of pallet, container, package,or piece numbering. (For example, you might specify that package numbers should start over at 1 ineach sack.) But for On-Demand Reporting, you must use absolute numbers.

Choose which pieces to show on your reports

To specify which part of the mailing should be reflected in the reports, do the following:

l Pick starting and ending points that fall at the start and end of an entry point. Otherwise youmight have less mail than is legally required to qualify for an entry point. The same adviceapplies to segments and schemes.

l Specify a range of pallet or container numbers, rather than package or piece numbers. Usingpallet or container numbers will help you to keep whole pallets or containers intact. A half-filled pallet or container might cause trouble at the acceptance dock.

l Specify a range of piece numbers in case you run out of pieces in the middle of preparing apallet. On-Demand Reporting would give you documentation based on the actual piecesmailed. When equipment fails—but there is a prospect of getting the bindery back up—youmight decide to hold off mailing the partial pallet.

If you define a range of piece numbers, you can still keep whole containers intact. Look at the Run-ning Totals column on the Mail Sort Listing. It lists absolute container, package, and piece numbers.Find the last piece number that you processed. Now look for the nearest full container. Use that fig-ure as the top value in your piece range.

TIP On-Demand Reporting is faster if you've chosen to save the software work files. There isno need to go back and run the presort itself. You can turn off the presort process in the Exe-cution window, and merely generate reports.

CAUTION Reports generated through On-Demand Reporting will reflect just that portion ofthe job. However, the software does not verify the eligibility of the partial mailing. You shouldset the end point at the container level.

BCC Software, LLC cannot accept responsibility for any mail-acceptance dispute that might arisewhen the beginning or end point of your partial mailing falls within an entry point, segment, orscheme.

User Guide | 302

Avoid overwriting report files

On-Demand Reporting does not allow you to automatically place each day's reports in a separatefile. You must plan carefully to avoid overwriting one day's reports with the next day's reports. Con-sider the following options:

l In the Report windows, choose to replace any existing files. Be sure to print all reports eachday. When you run reports again tomorrow, they will overwrite today's reports.

l Write each report to a separate file. In the Report windows, change the report file name eachday.

l In the Report windows, choose to append data to any existing files. Then, for example, onefile would contain all of your 3602 forms.

NOTE Whenever you use On-Demand Reporting, the software prints a special mark on mostreport headers.

User Guide | 303

USPS forms to submit with mailingsYou must submit Postage Statements and a qualification report to the USPS with all your mailing.The software produces many USPS-regulated forms for you.

To generate forms, complete the Postage Statement window in your job. There are separate win-dows for each class of mail. If you use the Views Wizard, the software presents you with the correctPostage Statement window.

Mail class Title of window/block

First Class USPS Postage Statement Form 3600

Periodicals USPS Postage Statement Form 3541

Standard Mail USPS Postage Statement Form 3602

Package Services USPS Postage Statement Form 3605

Mixed-class comail USPS Postage Statement Form 3541

USPS Postage Statement Form 3602

Introduction to Postage Statements

Postage Statements contain fields that you must fill out with information about your mailing, yourcompany, and your postage payment. You can enter all of this information just once, in the MailingInformation window. The software uses the information to fill out your forms.

There might be information that you don't know when generating your report files or prefer not toinclude on your forms. Simply leave the parameter blank in the Mailing Information window. You canthen write in the information by hand, or edit your report files before printing them.

Options for report scope

Within the Postage Statement blocks, there's a parameter called Report Information. There you canselect the scope of the report.

Abbreviation Scope Discussion

Mlg Mailing One statement per mailing.

User Guide | 304

Abbreviation Scope Discussion

Sum Job Job Summary One cumulative statement covering the whole job.

Sum EP Entry-pointsummary

One cumulative statement per entry point, each covering allmailings entered there. This report is required for CentralizedPostage Payment.

Sum Ver Versionsummary

One cumulative report per version (available for Periodicals3541 only).

Sum Seg Segmentsummary

One cumulative report per segment, each covering all mail-ings in the segment. If you segment by client or project, thisreport can be useful for chargeback.

Sum EP&Seg Entry-pointand segmentsummary

One cumulative report per combination entry point and seg-ment.

Sum EP&Ver Entry-pointand versionsummary

One cumulative report per combination entry point and ver-sion (available for Periodicals 3541 only).

Sum Pub Publicationnumber

One statement for every publication number in your job (Peri-odicals only).

Sum Permit Permit number One statement for each permit number.

See Also

Figuring out the total number of mailings in a job

USPS Qualification Report

You must submit the USPS Qualification Report to the USPS with any mailing. The report followsUSPS guidelines, though it doesn't have the formal look of a Postage Statement. Acceptance clerksuse this report to ensure that your mailing was sorted correctly.

User Guide | 305

The report details the following information.

l All containers. For large-volume jobs, this report can be very long.

l The rate and sortation level.

l The number of pieces per sort level.

l The versions that are in each container. For multiple-version, palletized jobs, the first 20 con-tainers are detailed by version number. Thereafter, every 20th container also is broken byversion. If you require more detail, or if you have USPS permission to print less detail, youcan use the Detail Every Nth Container parameter in the report block.

l After each container, the software lists the number of mail pieces per rate level.

l In Periodicals jobs, the grand total weight is listed along with the grand total pieces. Theweight reflects the mail pieces only. It does not include the weight of the package strapping,trays (if applicable), pallet, or pallet wrapping or banding material.

l To prove you are using ZAP approved software, the software prints the date of the zone dataon the header of this report. This is for Periodical jobs only. For more on ZAP, and to see alist of approved software vendors, refer to https://postalpro.usps.com/certifications/zone-ana-lysis-program-zap.

5-digit scheme reporting

You can find each 5-digit ZIP Code in a 5-digit scheme package in the Pkg Zip column. An "S" fol-lows each package destination ZIP Code in the Pkg Dest column of the report. The S appears whenthe package is a part of a scheme sack. The Pkg Zip column contains the 5-digit ZIP Codes that are apart of 5-digit scheme package.

USPS Postage Statement Form 3600 for First-Class mailings

Some areas of this form are filled in based on information about the mailing and information you sup-ply in the Mailing Information window. You must fill in other areas by hand.

Please note:

l Statement sequence numbers are assigned automatically.

l Fill out the Dun & Bradstreet No. and CAPS Cust. Ref ID by hand only if applicable to your

User Guide | 306

mailing.

l The software calculates the total postage for this mailing.

l The "USPS Use Only" section is for USPS staff to complete when they verify your mail.

Note that the third page matches the reverse side of the original USPS form. The software com-pletes this information automatically. Normally, the software prints one copy of this page. If your jobincludes pieces of multiple-ounce weights (1-ounce pieces and 2-ounce pieces, for example), thesoftware doesn't itemize the rates; the form doesn't provide for that.

That's fine with the USPS, but if you're interested in viewing the rates for each weight increment inyour mailing, you can choose to print multiple second pages of Form 3600 (for your internal use)and receive a page that reflects each ounce increment.

USPS Postage Statement Form 3541 for Periodicals mailings

Some areas of this form are filled in based on information about the mailing and information you sup-ply in the Mailing Information window. You must fill in other areas by hand.

Please note:

l Statement numbers are assigned automatically.

l The software calculates the total postage for this mailing.

l Fill out the Dun & Bradstreet No. by hand if applicable to your mailing.

USPS Postage Statement Form 3602 for Standard mailings

Some areas of this form are filled in based on information about the mailing and information youprovide in the software.

Please note:

l Statement sequence numbers are assigned automatically.

l Fill out the Dun & Bradstreet No. and CAPS Cust. Ref ID by hand only if applicable to yourmailing.

User Guide | 307

l The software calculates the total postage for this mailing.

l The "USPS Use Only" section is for USPS staff to complete when they verify your mail.

l The second page matches the reverse side of the original USPS form. The software com-pletes all of this information automatically.

USPS Postage Statement Form 3605 for Package Services

Form 3605 is used for Package Services Bound Printed Matter and Package Services Media andLibrary mailings.

Please note:

l The software completes the Permit Holder, Mailing Agent, and Mail Owner sections frominformation you supply in the Mailing Information window of the job.

l The software assigns serial mailing numbers. You can set a prefix and a starting point fornumbering in the General Output window of your job.

l The software calculates the total postage for this mailing. You can prevent the software fromprinting its figure if for some reason you need to adjust it. The option is called Print TotalPostage.

l The section below the double line is completed by USPS staff who verify your mail.

The software completes the reverse side of the form automatically, without input from the settingsin your job.

USPS Pallet Mixed-Zone Listing for Package Services

You must submit a Mixed-Zone Listing with any palletized Package Services Bound Printed Matter orParcel Select mailing.

You can produce Detail and Summary versions of this report. Both versions list the number of piecesgoing to each postal zone. The Detail version breaks down each pallet by 3-digit ZIP Code; the Sum-mary version contains just one line per pallet.

User Guide | 308

USPSManifest Listing for First-Class and Standard Mail

The Manifest Listing is required if you prepare mixed-weight or non-identical pieces under the USPSManifest Mailing System (MMS).

The report shows batch size, postage, and related information. You can produce a Detail or Sum-mary version or both. The Detail version is a breakdown by batch, showing the range of serial num-bers on mail pieces. The Summary replicates information from the second page of a PostageStatement.

PVDS Consolidated Postage Statement Register for Standard Mail

If you drop-ship, but maintain permits at several local post offices or SCFs, and have the mail verifiedand paid for at these facilities, all you need is the regular 3602 Postage Statement.

However, you'll need the PVDS (Plant Verified Drop Shipment) form instead if:

l You are not paying for the mail at the facility where it is entered.

l You drop-ship and pay at one facility (local).

Keep the following in mind about this report:

l The software produces one PVDS form for the whole job. This form contains one row foreach qualified mailing.

l The software automatically produces the appropriate facsimile version (for example, non-profit versus regular, imprint versus permit or stamps).

l The software will assign serial mailing numbers. You can set a prefix and a starting point fornumbering in the General Output window of your job.

l The software calculates the total postage for this mailing. You can prevent the software fromprinting its figure if for some reason you need to adjust it. The option is called Print TotalPostage.

l The software completes the reverse side of the form automatically, without input from thesettings in your job. This guide does not include a sample of the reverse side, because itlooks just like the reverse side of an ordinary Form 3602.

See Also

User Guide | 309

USPS Postage Statement Form 3602 for Standard mailings

USPS Drop Shipment Document Form 8125

You'll need Form 8125 if you enter mail at several points, but pay postage at one location.

Your mail will be verified locally (perhaps in your plant); this is called the origin office. Once yourmail is verified, the USPS staff places your Form 8125 in the truck or rail car, for transport with themail. At the destination-entry office, the USPS staff uses Form 8125 to verify that the mailing theyare receiving is the same as the mailing for which you paid.

When you generate this report, the software creates one form for each mailing.

There are areas for which you must provide information. The software provides the rest of the inform-ation automatically.

l The software takes the origin and publication information from parameters that you set in theForm 8125 window in your job.

l The software calculates the total gross weight. Supply the software with the tare weight of asingle container and it will calculate the total container weight for the mailing and add theweight of the mail itself to calculate the total gross weight.

NOTE If your job contains multiple EFNs, and you wish to affix EFN barcode(s) to each 8125 fortracking purposes, the appropriate barcode(s) should be placed in field 34 of form 8125 whengenerating Shipping Services File Type 2. This allows you to track by job when packages havebeen accepted at a facility. Since a single 8125 can potentially have more than one EFN bar-code, be sure to match the correct barcode(s) with each 8125.

USPS Consolidated Postage Statement for CPP

If you mail Periodicals, you can arrange to pay your postage through a process called CentralizedPostage Payment system, or CPP. CPP allows you to pay postage at one place when you produce aPeriodicals mailing that is dropped at multiple post offices.

Turn on the Print Form in CPP Format parameter in the Report: USPS Postage Statement Form 3541(PER) block to generate the CPP Postage Statement.

CAUTION The software produces a CPP Postage Statement for a single job. If you participatein the CPP system and you have multiple runs that need to be consolidated on a single CPPstatement, you must use a software product to combine the presort information onto one

User Guide | 310

consolidated CPP Postage Statement.

Please note:

l The report is different from a regular Postage Statement.

l "Consolidated" appears at the top of the postage statement.

l In-county and outside county ride-along weights are listed on the first page.

l The second paragraph of the signature section is updated.

USPS Register of Mailings for CPP

The Register of Mailings is required when you drop-ship and you are registered for Centralized Post-age Payment (CPP).

The report shows the number of containers, weight, and postage for each mailing. The USPS spe-cifies the content of this report, but it is not a facsimile of any USPS form.

ZIP Code Listing in "USPS" format

With any Periodicals or Package Services BPM mailing, you must submit a ZIP Code Listing in "USPS"format. This report breaks down the mailing by 3-digit ZIP Code and zone, showing the number ofcopies destined for each.

The Edition Legend is helpful for multi-edition jobs. It lists the version numbers and informationtaken from your Version Descriptions. On the last page, the software reports the total number of cop-ies per zone and for the mailing.

NOTE The USPS format is available only for Periodicals and Package Services jobs. When youselect this format, the software automatically produces a separate ZIP Code Listing for each mail-ing (as the USPS requires), even if your report setup called for a summary covering the wholejob.

NOTE To generate a Detailed Zone Listing report for your comail job, set the Report Formatparameter in the Report: ZIP Code Listing block to USPS. This report provides the informationneeded for a Periodicals mailing about zone coverage, as documented in DMM 207.17.4.

User Guide | 311

Reports for your own mail managementThe software can produce reports that you can use for your own purposes. You are not required tosubmit these reports to the USPS with your mail.

Abbreviations

Rate levels Description

CAR Carrier-route rate.

PS Regular presort rate; in barcode mailing, 3-digit barcode rate; in a numericZIP+4 mailing, the 3/5 rate.

PS5 Barcode 5-digit presort

BAS Basic rate

WSS Walk-sequence saturation

HD High-density

HDP High-density Plus

5B 5-digit barcode

3B 3-digit barcode

AB AADC barcode

AD Presorted ADC

MB Mixed AADC barcode

SP Ground

Sort levels Description

3DG 3-digit

User Guide | 312

Sort levels Description

3DGS 3-digit scheme

3DGU 3-digit unique

5DG 5-digit

5DGS 5-digit scheme

AADC Automated Area Distribution Center

ADC Area Distribution Center

ASF Auxilliary Service Facility

NDC Network Distribution Center

CR3 Carrier-route 3-digit

CR5 Carrier-route 5-digit

CRD Carrier-route direct

FRM Firm

MAAD Mixed AADC

MADC Mixed ADC

MNDC Mixed NDC

MXD Mixed

NPS Nonpresort (First-Class only)

QFY Qualified

RES Residual

SCF Sectional Center Facility

User Guide | 313

Sort levels Description

UNQ Unqualified

Delivery routes Description

Cxxx Carrier-route number

Rxxx Rural-route number

Hxxx Highway contract number

Gxxx General delivery

Bxxx Post-office-box section

Tray size Description

1 One-foot full tray

1-O One-foot overflow tray

1-U One-foot underfilled tray

2 Two-foot full tray

2-O Two-foot overflow tray

2-U Two-foot underfilled tray

Job Summary

The Job Summary report provides a quick way to make sure that your job ran as expected. Werecommend that you generate a Job Summary report in every job. If there's something you'll want tochange, it's better to discover it before printing other reports and wasting time and money printinglabels.

Here are some things to keep in mind about this report:

User Guide | 314

l Most of the Job Summary, including the General Information, General Output, Mailing Inform-ation, Auxiliary Files, and Mailing Information sections, is a reiteration of how you set up yourjob.

l The Auxiliary Files section lists the file date and time of the Presort directories used. Thisinformation enables you to confirm that your job was run with current directories. There isalso a message just after this section about limitations on when you can submit your mailingbased on the expiration dates of the directories used in the sort.

l The Input Files section shows a breakdown of records in the input files. You can see variousstatistics about records in the file, and perhaps most importantly, how many are eligible forthe mailing.

l The Job Summary section reiterates your setups for versions, entry points, and presortschemes.

l The Mailing Summary section, at the end of the report, shows statistical information abouteach scheme, including the postage per scheme, and the total postage due.

l In First-Class, postage savings are calculated by subtracting actual postage from the single-piece rate.

l In Standard Mail and Package Services, savings are determined by comparing the actual post-age with the postage that you would pay if the AADC or MAADC rate (Standard Mail) or basicrate (for Package Services) was applied to all pieces. Postage savings are not shown for Peri-odicals.

l Normally, at the end of the Job Summary report, the software prints a list of warnings. Thesemay include warnings about your job setup and potential mailings that were canceled. Youmay suppress these warnings by setting the Suppress Warnings parameter in the Job Sum-mary Report block of your job.

Mail Sort Listing

We recommend that you produce a Mail Sort Listing in every job. It is very helpful because it showshow the software has placed mail pieces into packages and containers.

The Mail Sort Listing is available in the following formats:

User Guide | 315

Format Description

Container Shows one line of data per container (tray or sack).

Package Shows one line of data per package. Weight and volume data are notshown.

Extended Shows one line of data per package; includes weight and volume data.

All of the formats show totals per mailing at the end of the report. If you choose the Package orExtended format, your report will be lengthy. The software tries to use additional columns to keepthe report as short as possible. You may choose whether packages will be listed in north/south oreast/west fashion.

NOTE The USPS acceptance for mixed-class comail may require you to produce the Mail SortListing, but they may refer to it as the "Bundle report." The Mail Sort Listing is included in the p_comail.pst template. To generate the Bundle report, you must set the Report Format para-meter to PKG or EXT.

ZIP Code Listing

The ZIP Code Listing can help you find out where your mail is going. The report lists the number ofpieces at each rate level. You can request a breakdown by 3-digit ZIP, 5-digit ZIP, or carrier route. Afourth format, called "USPS" format, is required in all jobs in Periodicals and Package Services BPM.

If the job involves multiple versions or editions, the report shows information for each version, thentotals the information for all versions at each ZIP.

See Also

ZIP Code Listing in "USPS" format

Processing Center Listing

The Processing Center Listing is useful especially for mailers who drop-ship to SCFs, ADCs, andNDCs.

You can select a breakdown by NDC, ADC, SCF, or state. When drop-shipping, you can use the Pro-cessing Center Listing to select entry points. You will have to run the presort twice.

User Guide | 316

For the first pass, don't bother setting up a lot of entry points or other reports. Set up the report forNDC or SCF format. Or use two report sections in your job to generate both formats. Once you'vechecked the report, you can set up your entry points and run the job for real.

You have the following options for the report layout.

Option Description

Rate Gives you a finer breakdown of rate levels, but it lumps together weights at allrates.

Weight Gives more detail about weight, but rate levels are lumped together into threegroups.

Summary Listing

The Summary Listing can help you manage and analyze your mailings. It may be particularly usefulto you if you use the auto segment or auto version features.

You decide if you want the Summary Listing to contain one line of data per entry point, per seg-ment, per version, or per combination of version and entry point.

The information on the report includes piece counts at each rate level, total copies, total weight,and total postage.

Mail.dat

Mail.dat® is a data formatting standard and set of files that are used for communicating details abouta mailing among publishers, presort bureaus, printers, and the United States Postal Service®. Thesedetails include almost everything there is to know about a mailing except name and address data.

With this software, you can generate PostalOne!®-compliant Mail.dat files.

IDEAlliance

IDEAlliance® sets the rules for the Mail.dat® standard and updates the rules periodically. IDEAlliancepublishes a manual that explains the Mail.dat standard and the record layout for Mail.dat files. To useMail.dat, you need the IDEAlliance manual and a provider code. Contact IDEAlliance through theirwebsite at http://www.idealliance.org.

User Guide | 317

All support questions regarding Mail.dat must go to IDEAlliance. Unless you have reason to suspectthat a faulty Mail.dat file is being generated, do not call BCC Software Technical Support withMail.dat questions.

If you want to produce output files based on the IDEAlliance standard, include the Report: IDEAMail.dat block in your job.

PostalOne!

PostalOne!® is a United States Postal Service® program that uses Mail.dat® files to accept mailingselectronically. By using PostalOne!, you can send your Mail.dat files to the USPS® for postal accept-ance and payment.

To participate in PostalOne!, you must apply with the USPS. For details about PostalOne! or to applyfor a new PostalOne! account, go to http://www.usps.com/postalone.

See Also

PostalOne!-required fields

One segment per Mail.dat

Tracking multiple Mail.dat file sets

Mail.dat files provided by BCC Software

The Mail.dat standard actually encompasses a number of different data files. Some of them arerequired by IDEAlliance and are created automatically by the software if you include the IDEA blockin your job file. The other files are optional.

You can generate some of the optional files by setting parameters in the IDEA block. The otheroptional files are not supported by the software because they are not likely to be useful to you.

BCC Software provides a format file for each of the Mail.dat data files. Use these format files to viewthe Mail.dat files with the FilePrep utility, Pwfmt. You can find these format files in the template sub-directory.

File Status FMT file name

Characteristic ComponentRecord (.ccr)

Optional ccrxx_x.fmt

Component Record (.cpt) Required compxx_x.fmt

User Guide | 318

File Status FMT file name

Container Quantity (.cqt) Required ctnqtyxx_x.fmt

Container Summary (.csm) Required ctnsumxx_x.fmt

Extra Piece Detail (.epd) Optional epdxx_x.fmt

Header Record (.hdr) Required headerxx_x.fmt

Mail Piece Unit/ComponentRelationship Record (.mcr)

Required mpu_cxx_x.fmt

Mail Piece Unit Record (.mpu) Required mpuxx_x.fmt

Mailer Postage Account (.mpa) Required mpaxx_x.fmt

Package Quantity (.pqt) Required pkgqtyxx_x.fmt

Seed Name Record (.snr) Optional seedxx_x.fmt

Segment Record (.seg) Required segmenxx_x.fmt

Piece Detail Record (.pdr) Optional

NOTE PostalOne! requiresyou to include a PBC or aPDR file in your Mail.dat.

pdrxx_x.fmt

Piece Barcode Record (.pbc) Optional

NOTE PostalOne! requiresyou to include a PBC or aPDR file in your Mail.dat.

pbcxx_x.fmt

User Guide | 319

File Status FMT file name

Referenceable Mail Record(.rmr)

Optional

You can specify which type offile to associate the .rmr with.Options include:

l PBC

l PDR

l CPT

rmrxx_x.fmt

Referenceable Mail Summary(.rms)

Optional rmsxx_x.fmt

Uncoded Parcel Address (.upa) Optional upaxx_x.fmt

Walk Sequence Record (.wsr) Optional

The software automatically cre-ates this record if the job iswalk-sequenced.

walk_sxx_x.fmt

PostalOne!-required fields

The following tables map PostalOne!-required Mail.dat field names to the corresponding job-fileparameters. For more information about required fields, see the latest PostalOne! ® Mail.dat Tech-nical Guide at https://postalpro.usps.com/Releases/Jan2018Release/maildattechspecsv3.

Header (.hdr) record

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

Licensed User's Job Num-ber

Licensed User's Job Num parameter in the Report: IDEA Mail.datblock.

Provider Code N/A. The value of this field is always 9999.

User Guide | 320

Segment (.seg) record

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

Verification FacilityName

Origin Post Office City and Origin Post Office State parameters inthe Entry Point blocks.

Verification Facility ZIP+4 Origin Post Office ZIP Code parameter in the Entry Point blocks.

eDoc Sender CRID eDoc Sender CRID parameter in the Entry Point blocks.

CSA Agreement ID CSA Agreement ID parameter in the Entry Point blocks. Required forstart the clock information.

Mailer Postage Account (.mpa) record

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

USPS Publication Num-ber

PER Publication No. parameter in the Version blocks.

Permit Number Permit No. parameter in the Version blocks.

Permit ZIP+4 Permit Holder ZIP+4 parameter in the Version blocks.

Postage Payment Option IDEA MPA Payment Option parameter in the Version blocks.

CAPS Reference Number CAPS Cust. Ref. ID parameter in the Version blocks.

Mailing Facility DUNSNumber

IDEA Mailing Fac. DUNS No. parameter in the Mailing Informationblock.

Mail Owner's Lcl PermitRef Num/ Int’l Bill Num -Type

Mail Owners Lcl Pmt Ref Type parameter in the IDEA Mail.dat block.

This field is required only when you have the Mail Owners Lcl PermitRef Number parameter in the IDEA Mail.dat block populated.

User Guide | 321

Additional Postage Payment Method

According to the USPS, if you have a mailing that uses metered or precanceled stamp postage,PostalOne! validation requires that you have a Mailer Postage Account (.mpa) file containing inform-ation about the permit to which the USPS should charge additional postage.

Use the following parameters:

User Guide | 322

Parameter Description

Addl. Pstg Pymt Method Use these values to define the method of payment.

l Permit

l GOVT Fed Use Permit

You must populate this parameter if any of these options are selectedin either of these parameters:

l IDEA MPA Postage Payment Method in either Version blockuses one of the following options:

l Stamp

l Metered Lowest

l Metered Correct

l Metered Neither

l Postage Payment Method in the Mailing Information blockuses one of the following options:

l Correct Meter

l Lowest Meter Job

l Lowest Meter Mlg

l Metered Neither

l Multi Meter

l Stamps

User Guide | 323

Parameter Description

Addl. Permit No.

Addl. Permit Holder City

Addl. Permit Holder State

Addl. Permit HolderZIP+4

The additional postage in the MPA record can have different permitinformation than the primary postage payment parameters. If youleave this information blank, the software uses the permit informationfrom the Version blocks.

The permit information you add here does not apply to the followingparameters:

l IDEA MPA Postage Payment Method in the Mailing Inform-ation block.

l Postage Payment Method in the Version Description or Ver-sion Defaults block.

Component (.cpt) record

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

Component - Weight:Source

IDEA Piece Weight Source parameter in the Version blocks.

Component - PeriodicalAd%

PER Advertising Percentage parameter in the Version blocks.

Periodical Issue Date PER Issue Date parameter in the Version blocks.

Container Summary (.csm) record

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

Postage Statement Mail-ing Date

IDEA Pstg Stmt Mlg Date parameter in the Entry Point blocks.

USPS Pick Up IDEA USPS Pick Up parameter in the Entry Point blocks.

Container Ready To PayTransaction ID

Container Status Ready To Pay parameter in the Report: IDEAMail.dat block.

User Guide | 324

Mail.dat field name Parameter name (in Job-file)

Scheduled Ship Date Scheduled Ship Date parameter in the Entry Point blocks. Requiredfor start the clock information.

Scheduled Ship Time Scheduled Ship Time parameter in the Entry Point blocks. Requiredfor start the clock information.

CSA Separation ID IDEA CSA Separation ID parameter in the Entry Point blocks.Required for start the clock information.

FAST-required fields

PostalOne! does not require the Mail.dat fields discussed in the following table. However, FASTrequires them for appointments and reservations.

Component (.cpt) record

Mail.dat field Job file parameter

Mail Owner Iden-tifier

IDEA Mail Owner ID parameter in the Mailing Information block.

Container Summary (.csm) record

Mail.dat field Job file parameter

FAST Content ID FAST Content ID parameter in the Entry Point blocks.

FAST Scheduler ID FAST Scheduler ID parameter in the Entry Point blocks. The informationfrom this parameter appears in Box 4 of PS 8125.

PBC or PDR?

PostalOne! requires that you use either a PBC or a PDR record type to send data for a Mail.dat job. AMail.dat job cannot have a mixture of these files.

Use one of the following parameters in the IDEA Mail.dat block:

User Guide | 325

l Create IDEA PBC File

l Create IDEA PDR File

PBC

The PBC record is a smaller version of the PDR. It contains key pieces of information for those pro-cessing Intelligent Mail barcode mailings.

PDR

It's recommended that you use a PDR in the following scenarios:

l You're using pre-assigned IMb serial numbers (for example, serial numbers from an inputfile).

l Your serial numbers are coming from mixed sources (some pieces are auto-assigned by thesoftware and other are pre-assigned).

See Also

IM barcode serial numbers

EPD record

The Extra Piece Detail record (EPD) is used to provide additional information about a mail piece. It islinked to the PDR and PBC records. It is an optional record.

To generate the EPD file:

l Set the Create IDEA EPD File parameter to Y.

l Define PW.EpdMvUCrid and/or PW.EpdPcMCrid in at least one DEF file.

l Populate either one or both of the PW fields in the input file.

Presort will populate "CRID" field (EPD-1004) of each EPD record as described:

l If PW.EpdMvUCrid is populated in the input file, Presort will populate the "CRID" field withthat CRID, and will populate the "CRID Type" field with "M".

User Guide | 326

l If PW.EpdPcMCrid is populated in the input file, Presort will populate the "CRID" field withthat CRID, and will populate the "CRID Type" field with "U".

NOTE A changed data value in this field will not, by itself, force the creation of a new versionwhen using auto dimension.

The number of EPD records created depends on how many input records have the PW fields pop-ulated. There could be 0, 1, or 2 records for each piece:

l 0 records if both fields exist, but are blank.

l 1 record if only one of the fields contains a value.

l 2 records if both fields contain values.

If you attempt to create an EPD file without defining either of the PW fields, you will receive anerror. If the PW fields are defined but neither is populated, no EPD record will be created for thatpiece.

NOTE The EPD file is NOT populated with the CRIDs from the CRID of Move Update Supplieror CRID of Piece Uniq Manager parameters, even though they contain the same CRIDs as thePW.EpdMvUCrid and PW.EpdPcMCrid fields, respectively. The parameters are used to onlypopulate the MPU record, and the two PW fields are used to only populate the EPD record. Fur-thermore, populating the PW.EpdMvUCrid and PW.EpdPcMCrid fields does NOT overwrite theentries in the CRID of Move Update Supplier or CRID of Piece Uniq Manager parameters in thiscase.

For more information, see:

l "Create IDEA EPD File" in the Job File Reference

l PW.EpdMvUCrid and PW.EpdPcMCrid in the Quick Reference for Views and Job FileProducts guide or help file

One segment per Mail.dat

PostalOne! requires that there be only one segment per Mail.dat. PostalOne! defines "segments" asgroupings of pieces that have been sorted to the finest extent possible. The software's segmentingfeature groups portions of a single mailing into separate mailings. Therefore, there may be multiplePostalOne!-type segments in one Mail.dat.

User Guide | 327

Verification error

The software issues a verification error when your job setup has created a Mail.dat segment that con-tains more than one Presort-type segment (which is not allowed). You must correct any verificationerrors before you can run your job.

An error appears when your job setup includes all of the following:

l Your job includes more than one Segment Description block.

l The Segment File Creation Optionsparameter in the IDEA Mail.dat report block is set to JOBor EP.

l The Create Files Per Seg parameter in the IDEA Mail.dat report block is set to N.

Verification warning

The software issues a verification warning when your job setup creates the possibility of multiplePresort-type segments in one Mail.dat segment. The warning appears when your job is set up asabove except that the Action parameter in the Segment Defaults block is set to AUTO.

Tracking multiple Mail.dat file sets

The software assigns unique job IDs (PostalOne! required) to each Mail.dat file set it creates for asingle job.

Presort creates multiple Mail.dat file sets when any one of the following parameters in the IDEAMail.dat block is set to Yes:

l Create Files Per Entry Point

l Create Files Per Segment

l Create Files Per Presort Scheme

Unique job IDs

Presort creates a unique ID by overwriting the last characters of the Production Job ID parametervalue (starting with 1).

User Guide | 328

For example, let's say you have 100 Mail.dat sets and your Production Job ID parameter in the IDEAMail.dat block is set to "abcdefgh". Presort would generate the following IDs:

Mail.dat set Job ID

1 abcdefg1

2 abcdefg2

3 abcdefg3

...

99 abcdef99

100 abcde100

If your Production Job ID parameter is set to "Test," the IDs would be:

Mail.dat set Job ID

1 Test0001

2 Test0002

3 Test0003

...

99 Test0099

100 Test0100

Defining your own version descriptions

For auto dimension jobs, you can use the PW.Ver_Name input field to define a version description.This description is independent of what is defined in the PW.Version_ID input field.

If the software finds two different PW.Ver_Name values in one version, it populates the MPU namefield in the Mail.dat file with a software generated serial number.

NOTE You can use this field only to populate the MPU Name in the Mail.dat.

User Guide | 329

Identifying the mail owner by CRID

For auto dimension jobs, you can use the PW.IMB_CRID input field to identify a mail owner by theCustomer Registration Identification (CRID) number for each version. Before this release, you couldprovide only one mail owner CRID for the entire job.

If you are processing a Auto Dimension job and set the IMb/IMpb Owner By/For Option to CRID orBoth, you can use the PW.IMB_CRID input field to identify the mail owner (CRID) for each version.Previously, you could only provide one mail owner (CRID) for the entire job.

See Also

Using MIDs and CRIDs in the Mail.dat

The seed file

The seed file contains one record per piece mailed to a seed name. If your mailing list includes seednames, it should have a field that contains a unique identifier (usually a number) on each seedrecord. In ordinary records, this field is blank.

Present your seed-number field to the software through the field PW.Seed_ID. For example, yourDEF file entry might look like this: PW.Seed_ID = DB.SEED

If your job involves multiple versions or editions, then it's possible that two or more versions mightbe mailed to the same seed name. Your Mail.dat seed file is supposed to contain one record foreach combination of seed-name and version—in effect, one record per seed piece.

PW.Key_Code is a field for the version code. It works much like PW.Version_ID. In fact, you mightvery well use the same database field for both purposes. For example, your DEF file entries mightlook like this:

PW.Version_ID = DB.EDITION

PW.Key_Code = DB.EDITION

Split output

The software always produces just one Header file per Mail.dat file set. You have the option to splitother Mail.dat files by entry point, segment, or scheme. This works much like the Split Output fea-ture. But note that when you use Split Output to divide ordinary output files, you can use the file-name extension as part of your file naming system. This isn't possible with Mail.dat files, becauseIDEAlliance requires certain extensions on Mail.dat files.

User Guide | 330

File masking

If you create split output, you must use a method called file masking to design your own pattern fornaming split output files. File masks can consist of letters and three special punctuation marks thatrepresent all the possible ways that you can split the output:

Separate output files by Mask character

Entry Point !

Segment @

Presort scheme #

For example, if you have 88 entry points, 38 segments, and three presort schemes, then you mightuse a mask like this:

#e!!s@@.*

Then the base file name would be 3e01s22 for scheme #3, entry point #1, and segment #22. Thesoftware determines the extensions per IDEAlliance rules.

This is only one example of dozens of ways that you could arrange the information.

Here are some guidelines for designing your own file masks:

l You must allot enough mask characters in the name to accommodate all the file names to begenerated. For example, if you're splitting by segment and your job has 115 Segment Descrip-tion blocks, then "test@@.*" is not a valid mask, and you would get a verifier error. However,"test@@@.*" or "test@@@@.*" would be valid.

l The mask cannot be specified in the extension. For example, "test.@@@" is invalid.

l All characters within a mask must be consecutive. For example, "@@test@@.*" is invalid.

l If you're using the Auto Segmenting feature, then the number or segments will not beknown at the time your job file is verified. The verifier will issue a warning that your maskmay not be big enough to accommodate all the possible file names. If your mask does turnout to be too small, the software will exit with an error when the mask limit is reached. Forexample, if there are 115 segments and only 2 characters for the mask, then the softwarewould stop creating output files after segment 99.

User Guide | 331

Handling foreign recordsUse the software to detect any foreign records that might appear in your input file. The software canthen keep these pieces out of your U.S. presorted mailing.

To detect foreign records, the software requires that your database include a discrete field for coun-try.

In First-Class, Periodicals, and Standard Mail jobs, that country field can include the country name oran abbreviation. It doesn't really matter, because the software does not support any special handlingof foreign pieces, because you are not permitted to include any foreign pieces in your presortedmailing or documentation.

The software simply drops foreign pieces out of the presort, down to the Unqualified portion of themail stream.

Input country field for foreign records

In Periodicals, the input country field must contain a standard abbreviation. the software recognizesthe standard set by the International Organizations for Standardization (ISO) 3166 list for countryabbreviations. For the ISO 3166 list, visit the United Nations Statistics Division web site at http://un-stats.un.org/unsd/methods/m49/m49alpha.htm.

Present your field to the software though the field PW.Country. For example, your DEF file entrymight look like PW.Country = DB.COUNTRY.

NOTE If the foreign pieces in your mailing are limited to Canada and Mexico, you needn't con-vert the contents of your country field to the ISO standard abbreviations. The software willrecognize these country names: "Canada," "Mexico," "USA," and "United States." Capitalization isnot important.

IMPORTANT When you print address labels, you need a field that contains the full countryname. Be sure to include a database field in your input file that contains the country name (forexample, DB.CNTRY_NM). Later, post that field to your output file.

Options for handling foreign records in output files

In non-Periodicals jobs, the software drops foreign pieces out of the presort portion of the job, intothe unqualified portion. (The unqualified portion also includes domestic U.S. records with bad ZIPs.)

In Periodicals jobs, the software groups foreign records together into a foreign mail portion of thejob after the presorted records in the Address output file. The software automatically sorts foreign

User Guide | 332

records by country; within each country, the software outputs records in the same sequence thatthey were input. If you want, you can divert foreign records to a separate output file. You also havethe option to perform a simple sort on foreign pieces.

Some of our customers mail enough foreign mail that sending those pieces to a separate file ishandy. Since mail preparation of foreign mail is different from that for domestic mail, large mailingstaffs may include one or two people who specialize in foreign-mail preparation. A separate file canbe created for them to work from. Other, smaller companies might send that file out to a service bur-eau that specializes in foreign-mail preparation. Then those pieces rejoin the domestic portion ofthe mailing for entry to the USPS.

Separate foreign output file

You may use the Split Output or Output Selection features to direct foreign pieces to a separate out-put file.

You can split your Address output file into separate files per presort scheme. In output file names,the software will use the letter "F" in place of a scheme number.

Additional sorting on foreign pieces

For foreign mail, as for other unqualified mail, the software does not support container labels orother trappings of a presorted mailing. However, the software can do a simple sort to prepare for-eign mail for entry.

To prepare foreign mail for entry

In your output file, the software sorts foreign pieces by country. For additional sorting of foreignpieces, you may define two other PW fields in your DEF file(s): City and Intl_Regn. Simply by settingup these fields in your DEF file, you can make the software sort foreign pieces first by Intl_Regn,then by Country, then by City.

l If you have a discrete field for city name, you can set it up in your DEF file(s) as the PW fieldCity. Then when output files or labels are generated, the foreign pieces will be sorted first bycountry, and within each country, by city name. Your DEF entry probably will look like this:

PW.City = DB.CITY

l Some customers have an "international region" database field that is coded for continents orother geographical units larger than countries. To sort on such a field, you might set it upwith a DEF entry like this one:

PW.Intl_Regn = DB.REGION_CODE

User Guide | 333

Technically, this field is used as a primary sort key (before Country and City), so you can useit to sort foreign pieces by region or any other basis that suits your needs. The softwaresimply accepts whatever data the Intl_Regn field may contain. So, for example, you mightuse it to sort foreign pieces according to the vendor or presort bureau to which they will begoing.

How foreign records are sorted

The software groups records that are destined for the same city, country, and region. However, thissorting is not done in the usual alphabetical or numerical order. The software simply begins at thefirst foreign record and groups records as it reads them. So all records destined for Zimbabwe couldbe grouped at the top of the foreign output file, followed by Argentina, then Germany, etc. It alldepends on the order in which the records are read on input. If you need to sort these records alpha-betically, use a database-management tool before or after processing with the software.

User Guide | 334

How to create and manipulate output filesThe software lets you create address, package, container, and pallet output files.

If you're just getting started with the software, we urge you read the Database Prep manual. Itexplains a lot that you need to know about how the software works with databases, and how itmakes output files.

Introduction to output files

To mail, you will need labels on your mail pieces, containers, and so on. The software itself does notproduce labels. However, the software does produce the data that you need for input to your label-or document-printing system.

The software can create four types of output files:

l Address

l Package

l Container

l Pallet

Address output file

Use an Address output file with your own labeling software, or in your word-processing program toproduce mail-merge letters. The software produces one output record per mail piece.

Break marks in the Address output file

You can use output fields to allow break marks before a new segment or version in the Address Out-put file. These fields are not available for the Container, Package, or Pallet output files and cannotbe posted to an input file.

Field Description

AP.seg_brk_f Adds a segment break mark. For each output file that you create, the softwareposts a pound sign (#) in the record of the first piece in the segment.

AP.ver_brk_f Adds a version break mark. For each output file that you create, the softwareposts a pound sign (#) in the record of the first piece in the version.

User Guide | 335

Package output file

Create a package file to prepare package labels called "facing slips." The software produces one out-put record per package. Package output files are most useful for nonautomated mailings, especiallycarrier-route and walk-sequenced mailings. Most automated mailings are prepared loose in trays, butif your automated mailing involves packaging, then the package output file will be useful for you aswell.

Container output file

Create a Container output file to prepare tray or sack labels. The software produces one outputrecord per tray or sack. The software does not make any kind of distinction between tray and sackrecords, but you can set that up.

Pallet output file

Create a Pallet output file to prepare pallet placards. The software produces one output record perpallet. Your printing software must convert one record into two (or more) placards.

Many palletized jobs also include sack schemes. In this situation, you should produce both a palletand a container output file. The pallet file will cover only the palletized portion of the job, and thecontainer file will cover only the sacks.

Setting up output files

You must perform two separate and equally important tasks when you set up an output file:

1. Define the format. This task includes defining the file type, the sequence of fields, theirnames and lengths, and so on. Use the Create Output File window of your job. If order isimportant to you, set up the fields in the order that you want them to appear in the outputfile.

For address files, you can use one of two methods to define the format and determine thecontent:

Method How it works Available fields

Cloning The software automatically clones thesame format and content of the input filewhen it creates the output file.

All input fields plus any addi-tional that you choose.

User Guide | 336

Method How it works Available fields

Field-by-field

If your input file contains fields that youdon't want to carry over, you can specifyoutput fields individually. This method is alittle more work, but gives you greater con-trol over the makeup of your output file.

Input fields of your choiceplus any additional that youchoose.

For Package, Container, and Pallet files, you can use the automatic cloning feature only toset up the file's format.

2. Determine the content. Determine what information your want to post in the fields of the out-put file. Use the Post to Output File window of your job.

l For address files, append additional fields to the end of each output record to holddata that is generated in the software process (for example, keylines, break marks,and endorsements). You can use the cloning or the field-by-field method to do this.

l For package, container, and pallet files you must use the field-by-field method to spe-cifically determine the content or data that you want posted in each field (forexample, destination, contents, and origin, mail count, and weight). You can use thisdata and your label software to produce facing slips, sack or tray tags, and pallet plac-ards.

Output file templates

It is important that you take care in setting up your output files so that software, such as our LabelStudio software, can read and use all of the data. To help you fill out the output file sections of yourjob, we have included template files to help you set up different types of output files. If you useViews, you can also use the Views Wizard to create output files.

Output file type Template

Address lsadr.pst

Tray lstry.pst

Sack lssck.pst

Pallet lsplt.pst

User Guide | 337

Output file sequence

Normally, the software produces one output file of each type (address, package, container, pallet).Within each file, all mailings of the job are included. Mailings are organized in a hierarchy by:

l Entry point

l Segment

l Presort scheme

Versions are mingled, so they do not count as a fourth level in the mail-stream hierarchy.

The normal output sequence might not suit your needs. So the software offers four options for cus-tomizing your output files:

l Mailflow

l Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy

l Output Selection

l Split Output

You might end up using two of these features together.

See Also

Introduction to Mailflow

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Output selection

Split output

Introduction to Mailflow

Mailflow is a way to change the order in which the software produces output, reports, and labelswithin a job or mailing.

When you use Mailflow, your reports are output with the same alternate sequence that you set upwith Mailflow. In other words, the reports will be output in an order that reflects the new outputsequence.

User Guide | 338

With Mailflow, you can change the sequence by using the following parameters as described:

Parameter Description

Alternate Mailstream HierarchySequence

Change the traditional hierarchy of output from entry point,then segment, then scheme to a different combination of thethree.

Alternate Entry Point Sequence

Alternate Segment Sequence

Alternate Presort Sequence

Change the sequence of mailings by entry point, segment, orpresort scheme.

Processing Center Sequence Organize your mailings according to USPS processing cen-ters.

Pallet Sequence

Container Sequence

Package Sequence

Change the sequence of containers or pallets within mailings,or the sequence of packages within containers or pallets.

Print Together by Bindery/Ver-sion

Print Non-Pst's with Segments

Keep versions together. (This option is discussed in the sec-tion on multiple versions, not in this section.)

You can use Mailflow at the same time as Output Selection or Split Output. For example:

l Suppose you split your output files by entry point or use Output Selection by entry point.You could still use Mailflow to control, within each entry-point file, the sequence of seg-ments or schemes.

l If you use Split Output so that each mailing is a separate output file, you might still use Mail-flow to control the sequence of containers within each mailing.

Using Mailflow to change the sequence of mailings

When altering the sequence of mailings, Mailflow is probably most useful for altering entry pointsequence, and not segments or schemes.

User Guide | 339

That's because mailflow by segment would allow you to control the sequence of segments onlywithin each entry point, and Mailflow by scheme controls only the sequence of schemes withineach entry point and segment, neither of which seems very useful.

If you want to organize your output file, by segments, while superseding entry points or by presortschemes, while superseding entry points and segments, use Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy featureof Mailflow.

Entry-point sequence example

Suppose we are preparing a large catalog run at a printing plant near Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Thesecatalogs will travel in the printer's own trucks, for destination entry at NDCs and SCFs around theMidwest.

In this job, the entry points are set up for maximum destination-entry discounts (SCFs first, thenNDCs). But that isn't the order that we want in the output file or reports.

Some of our trucks carry loads for several points and make stops along their route. We want to pro-duce mail for the last point first, so that it can be loaded on the truck first. Then we work our way tothe first stop, loaded at the rear of the truck.

So for this job, we would use Mailflow to rearrange the sequence of entry points, by going into theAlternate Entry Point Sequence block to put our output files and reports in truck-load sequence.

See Also

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Using Mailflow to change sequence within each mailing

Using Mailflow to change sequence within eachmailing

You can change the sequence of containers or packages within each mailing.

Processing center sequence

Processing Center Sequence (PCS) gives you some control over the order of your output.

Despite the name, PCS does not have to be used for USPS processing centers. You can use it torearrange containers by 3-digit ZIP for almost any purpose. The software accepts your ZIP ranges atface value, and verifies only that they are valid 3-digit ZIPs.

If you drop-ship, you probably have little use for PCS. It is used primarily in plant-load jobs, or jobsentered at a single USPS facility, for two reasons:

User Guide | 340

l You might be able to reduce delivery time.

l You might earn the undying gratitude of your postmaster.

PCS enables you to present your containers in groups, ready for immediate transfer from the entryfacility to other USPS facilities. For example, you might present the following:

l A nationwide mailing in containers grouped by NDC.

l A statewide mailing in containers grouped by SCF.

l A local mailing in containers grouped for other delivery units in the area.

PCS saves time and labor at the entry office, because less processing there is necessary. Ideally,your mail can be transferred directly to outgoing USPS trucks. This might save a day or more,depending on the time of day and workload at your post office. And your postmaster will appreciatethe labor savings. However, PCS does not earn you any kind of postage discount.

We cannot tell you how to set up PCS. That is something that you must work out with your post-master. It will depend on USPS truck routes, the scope and size of your mailings, and other factors.To be sure that the plan is clear, you might ask your postmaster to provide a written list of pro-cessing centers and their 3-digit ZIP ranges.

Pallet, container, and package sequence

Pallet, Container, and Package Sequence give you some control over the order in which the soft-ware outputs these items within each mailing.

The normal sequence makes sense for most users. Pallets, containers, and packages are output bysort level, and within each sort level, by destination ZIP. The most common use of Container andPackage Sequence is to reverse this, so that they will be output in ZIP order.

You can choose the priority or precedence of sorting, but not the direction. The direction of sortingis always as shown in the table below.

Sequenceoption

Direction of sort for containers Direction of sort for pack-ages

Sort Level Finest to lowest (for example, CART Direct first,Mixed-NDC last)

Finest to lowest

ZIP Lowest to highest (00000 first, 99999 last) Lowest to highest

User Guide | 341

Sequenceoption

Direction of sort for containers Direction of sort for pack-ages

Zone Local first, Zone 8 last Local first, Zone 8 last

Rate DDU, DSCF, DNDC, none None, DNDC, DSCF,DDU

In the Pallet Sequence block you have the ability to sort packages and containers by ascending ordescending weight when using the Mailflow feature. For packages, this sorting applies only to directpackages on pallets. This feature does not work for packages placed in sacks or trays.

The USPS requires that you arrange your trays so that the heaviest (fullest) trays are on the bottom,lightest trays on top.

Most mailers should select the Descending sort, which means that within each pallet, the heaviesttray comes first, and the lightest tray last. The Ascending option works in the opposite direction; itmight be useful if, in your label-printing software, you print in reverse order.

See Also

Using Mailflow to change the sequence of mailings

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Alternate mailstream hierarchy

Alternate mailstream hierarchy is actually a feature of Mailflow; you'll find it in the Mailflow block inyour job. Remember that the Presort mail stream is a hierarchy. The software normally arranges out-put records first by entry point, then by segment, then by presort scheme.

Because of the hierarchy, the software normally does not keep pieces together by segment,scheme, or version. However, if you want to do that, you can use Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy tochange the mailstream hierarchy from the normal order of entry point, segment, and scheme, to anycombination of the three.

You can also accomplish this through the Split Output feature, but using Alternate Mailstream Hier-archy instead offers two benefits:

1. Output remains in a single file (no need to split into separate files).

2. The output order of the reports reflects the new hierarchy.

User Guide | 342

To establish a new output hierarchy

You can establish a new hierarchy by changing the order of the three options any way that you like.Output by scheme first, if you like, or output by entry point first, then by scheme, and finally seg-ment; whatever fits your needs.

Once you have rearranged the mail stream sequence by Mailflow, it is possible to return to the "nor-mal" mailstream order. Simply turn off all options in the Mailflow window, and run the job one moretime.

To keep output records together by segment

You might want to keep segments intact—that is, output all records for a segment together. To keepa segment intact, spanning entry points, do the following:

1. In the Mailflow block, set the Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy Sequence parameter to Yes.

2. In the Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy Sequence block, set the hierarchy to:

l Segment

l Entry point

l Scheme

To keep output records together by scheme

You might want to keep output records together by presort scheme, ignoring entry points and seg-ments. This option is handy if you use different label designs or different container types, depend-ing on the presort scheme.

Keeping schemes together means you don't have to switch labels or containers so often. To changethe hierarchy, do the following:

1. In the Mailflow block, set the Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy Sequence parameter to Yes.

2. In the Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy Sequence block, set the hierarchy to:

l Scheme

l Entry Point

l Segment

User Guide | 343

Output selection

Output selection lets you output just part of the job. You might do this if you need to reprint labelsfor just a portion of the job.

You can select a portion of the job by entry point, segment, or scheme (but not by version). Outputselection also offers you the ability to select output by status, such as presort, qualified nonpresort,unqualified, and foreign.

Output selection gives you an option that split output does not: you can lump together two or moreentry points, segments, or schemes.

When you use output selection, it affects all types of output files (address, package, container, andpallet). Even though you might have output selection turned on, the software produces a Job Sum-mary for the whole job. The Mail Sort Listing report, Qualification report, and the postage statementsare produced only for the selected mail.

Output selection by segment

Suppose you're preparing a magazine that has four regional editions. Your job would be segmentedby region. Late in the process, your customer discovers that the Northern Edition contains a graveerror. The Northern Edition must be scrapped and reprinted, and you must reprint all the labels for it.So you need a new set of output files covering only the Northern Edition.

To generate output files by segment

1. In the Output Select block, enable the Select Segments to Output and the Select PresortPieces parameters.

2. In the Output Segment Selection block, add the segment(s) with which you want to work.

Output selection by entry point

Output selection gives you the option to lump together two or more entry points, segments, orschemes.

For example, by using output selection by entry point, you can produce output files covering two ormore entry points. Furthermore, you can then generate separate output files per truck route.

To create an output file for a truck that will stop at two points, you would do the following:

1. In the Output Select block, enable the Select Entry Point to Output, the Select PresortPieces, and the Select Qualified Non-Presort Pieces parameters.

User Guide | 344

2. In the Entry Point Selection block, add the segment(s) with which you want to work.

The software outputs entry points in the order in which you define the entry points in thejob. The order in which you list the selected entry points in the Entry Point Selection blockdoes not affect output order.

To stagger in-home dates, you might use output selection to separate what you will mail on day 1from what you will mail on day 2 and 3. Here again you might perform output selection by entrypoint, to output the trucks that will depart each day.

Split output

Split output is a way to divide mailings or versions into separate output files. You might want to dothat if you plan to process the job on separate printing lines or even in separate facilities. Splitting ispossible by status, entry point, segment, presort scheme, version (in address output files), or a com-bination of these.

You can apply the split output feature separately to each type of output file—address, package, con-tainer, and pallet. You could, for example, split your address output into several files, while pro-ducing just one container output file to cover the whole job. Of course, if you do this, your containerlabels may not be organized and sequenced in the same way as your address labels. Split outputaffects only your output files, not your reports.

In your job, the splitting options appear in the windows where you post data to your output file(address output file, container output file, and so on).

Split output example

Let's say that you have several printing plants around the country where you print copies of thesame magazine. This allows you to save on trucking costs when you distribute the magazines toUSPS entry points in the region surrounding each plant. Address data will be applied to eachmagazine using an inkjet printer, not labels.

You use the entire national database to process the mailing list at one plant. In the Address OutputFile block of Presort, you set the parameters to create files per entry point, and you include thenecessary masking characters in the output file name (as described in Naming your split outputfiles). Then you distribute the files to your various plants according to the entry points where theydrop.

User Guide | 345

Naming your split output files

When you split output files, it's important to use meaningful file names. You will want each file nameto indicate which mailing that file is for. The software helps you craft good file names. Our systemfor setting up file names is called file masking. Some people call these wildcards.

File masks can consist of letters and four special punctuation marks. When the software makes splitoutput files, it substitutes numbers for these special punctuation marks. For example, you couldenter the file mask adr_ent!!_seg@@_sch#_ver???.dat.

Then the file name adr_ent01_seg22_sch3_ver044.dat would mean that this is the Addressoutput file for entry point #1, segment #22, scheme #3, and version #44.

Splitting by Mask character

Entry Point !

Segment @

Presort Scheme #

Version ?

Fixed # of records %

Status &

Concatenating files

Split output can give you a lot of files to handle. So we give you the option to combine the files backinto a single file using the Concatenate Files option.

However, a much simpler way to change the mailstream hierarchy and generate a single output fileis to use the Alternate Mailstream Hierarchy feature of Mailflow. This feature also provides theadded benefit of generating reports in an order that reflects the order of the output file.

If you do choose to split output and then concatenate files, the file-masking feature is not used; inyour job, you enter the name of the concatenated file exactly as you want it created. For details,refer to the Help or Presort Job-File Reference manual.

User Guide | 346

ZIPCountThe ZIPCount Utility is designed to analyze ZIP Code list information from a postal processing centerperspective. It also organizes the ZIP Codes in a numeric database to maximize efficiency in ZIPCode entry points.

Presort users can incorporate ZIPCount to view breakdowns of the mailing to select SCF and NDCentry points. It is important to understand that ZIPCount reports the number of records, not mailpieces. So, if you are using PW field Copies, then the Processing Center Listing may be needed.

ZIPCount can produce additional savings by calculating quantities of mail pieces for specified areas.This demonstrates how many mail pieces are needed to profit from specialized bulk mail delivery(less the cost of extra transportation and labor).

NOTE The version number of ZIPCount and the version number of Presort may not always bethe same.

This section briefly describes each parameter within the master.zct file and the reports that thisutility produces.

General block

BEGIN General=====================================File Protection (OVERWRITE/PROMPT)............. =Mail Class (FIRST/PER/STD/PSVC)................ =Processing Category (See Note)................. =Rate Category (See Note)....................... =PER Authorized as a Newspaper (Y/N)............ = nEstimated Drop Date (MMDDYYYY)................. =Work File Directory (Location)................. =END

File Protection (OVERWRITE/PROMPT)

Prompt pauses execution, sends a warning message, and waits for your response during verification.

Overwrite destroys the existing output file and creates a new one. There aren't any warnings dis-played during verification.

Mail Class (FIRST/PER/STD/PSVC)

Select the class of mailing; First-Class, Periodicals, Standard Mail, Package Services.

User Guide | 347

Processing Category

Type the processing category that describes the mail piece. The Processing Category parameter isused to verify mail-piece dimensions and other entries. If you're not sure which category bestdescribes the mail piece, ask your postmaster.

l Automated Letter

l Machinable Letter

l Nonmachinable Letter

l Per Nonautomation Letter

l Automated Flat

l PER Alternative Auto Flat

l Flat

l Postcard

l Double Postcard

l Machinable Marketing Parcel

l Irregular Marketing Parcel

l Machinable Parcel

l Irregular Parcel

l CMM

l 1C Parcel

l 1C Irregular Parcel

Rate Category

Choose from the following Commercial rate categories:

User Guide | 348

Option Rate Class

Reg Profit All

Nonprof Nonprofit Periodicals and Standard Mail only

Class Classroom Periodicals only

Ag Science of agriculture Periodicals only

BPM Bound Printed Matter Package Services only

Media Media Mail Package Services only

Library Library Package Services only

Parselect Parcel Select Package Services only

PSLW Parcel Select Lightweight Package Services only

PER Authorized as a Newspaper (Y/N)

Select Yes if your publication is issued weekly or more frequently. Also select Yes if your pub-lication was authorized for newspaper treatment prior to March 1, 1984.

Estimated Drop Date (YYYYMMDD)

Enter the estimated date and time that you plan to drop the mailing at the USPS facility.

Work File Directory (Location)

This parameter defaults to the current directory, if left blank.

NOTE ZIPCount uses .xzt for work file extensions.

Auxiliary Files block (ZIPCount)

BEGIN Auxiliary Files =====================Mail Proc Ctr Dir (Location & YYMM_mpc.dir).... =Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_facility.dir).. =Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_maildirect.dir) =

User Guide | 349

Default ASCII FMT File (Location & <file>.fmt). =END

Mail Proc Ctr Dir (Location & YYMM_mpc.dir)

Contains information about SCFs, ADCs, NDCs, and other facilities used for sorting mail and forforms and labels. Also used in creating containers and labeling using the USPS labeling lists.

Type the name and location of the Mail Processing Center Directory, for example:

l Windows: \ss\dirs\YYMM_mpc.dir

l UNIX: /ss/dirs/YYMM_mpc.dir

Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_facility dir)

Contains information about USPS drop ship facilities, such as site keys, site names, and site deliveryaddresses.

Type the location and file name of the Facility directory file, YYMM_facility.dir.

Mail Direction (Location & YYMM_maildirect.dir)

Used to determine where mail should be dropped based on when the drop will occur, so that youcan receive discounts.

Type the location and file name of the Mail Direction directory file, YYMM_maildirect.dir.

Default ASCII FMT File (Location & <file>.fmt)

Indicates to Presort the format file to use for your input files if a corresponding FMT file is not found.

If all your input files are in the same format, you do not need to create separate FMTs for each file.Create just one FMT file, and type its path and name on this line.

If you have input files that differ from the standard format, you may create an individual FMT for theexceptions. ZIPCount looks for an individual FMT within the same directory and with the same basename as the input file. If one is found, it overrides the default FMT. You can use $JOB in this para-meter, which converts to the base job file name (without a path or extension).

User Guide | 350

Input File block

BEGIN Input File ==============================Input File Name (Location & file name)......... =Input File Type (ASCII/DBASE3)................. =Input Filter (to 512 chars).................... =Field to Count................................. =END

To specify multiple input files, repeat this block for each input file.

Input File Name (Location & file name)

Remember to include the full path name if the input file is not located in the current directory.

$JOB is accepted at this parameter. For example, $job.dbf, $job.dat or $job.txt.

Input File Type (ASCII/DBASE3)

All ASCII files must have an accompanying FMT file.

All DBASE3 file field lengths and names are read from the header at the top of the file.

Input filter (to 512 chars)

Use this feature to exclude records and focus your ZIPCount reports. For example, if you want todrop-ship within a certain radius of your plant, you could use an input filter to eliminate distant ZIPCodes.

As in our other programs, ZIPCount processes only those records that result in TRUE when the filterexpressing is evaluated.

Field to Count

$JOB is accepted at this parameter. For an example, refer back to the code report. If you routinelywant a report based on the exp_date field, you could create a job file called exp_date.zct andenter $job at this parameter. ZIPCount then looks for the exp_date field. The Code Report readsthe entire field defined.

NOTE ZIPCount does not read the DEF file. It simply relies on the FMT or header to find thefield to count.

User Guide | 351

Report block

*To generate multiple reports, the report block may be repeated.BEGIN Report ==================================================Location and File Name/Printer Device.......... =Existing File (APPEND/REPLACE)................. =Page Header Line 1 (to 80 chars)............... =Page Header Line 2 (to 80 chars)............... =Page Header Line 3 (to 80 chars)............... =Page Header Line 4 (to 80 chars)............... =Page Length (40-100 lines)..................... =Page Width (60-250 chars)...................... =Format of Output (DATA FILE/REPORT)............ =Type of Count (3DG/5DG/STATE/ADC/SCF/NDC/CODE). =Sort by (QUANTITY/VALUE/DEST ZIP).............. =Display Record Number Column (Y/N)............. =Minimum Quantity for Reporting................. =Palletized Mail (Y/N).......................... =END

* NOTE Sort By Options* QUANTITY - for use with all types of counts* VALUE - for use with all types of counts* DEST ZIP - for use with SCF and NDC counts

Location and File Name Printer Device

Print to an output file or to a printer port by specifying the file name or printer option.

$JOB is accepted at this parameter, for example, $job.rpt.

Existing File (APPEND/REPLACE)

Append attaches the current report to the existing file.

Replace overwrites the last report. This choice saves file space.

Page Header Line 1-4 (up to 80 chars)

This is only for report style.

$DATE and $TIME are only accepted in the Page Header Lines. Use these commands when gen-erating multiple reports.

$JOB is accepted to include the job name in the report header, for example $job.

User Guide | 352

Four blank lines are included in the report, if you don't type anything in these lines.

Page length (40-100 lines)

You must specify the length. If the format of the output is set to data file, the page length is ignoredbecause the data file does not have headers, footers or form feeds.

Page Width (60-250 chars)

You must specify the width. The default data file width is 66 characters. Increase this number to 88if you print in 8 lines per inch.

Format of Output (DATA FILE/REPORT)

The data file only prints one column per page, without any form feeds, headers or footers. Thisformat is easy to import into a spreadsheet.

The report is printed with as many columns that will fit on the page, with form feeds, headers andfooters. ZIPCount automatically calculates and prints the amount of columns that fit on the pageaccording to the page width specified. You can specify four additional header lines.

Type of Count (3DG/5DG/STATE/SCF/ADC/NDC/CODE)

Choose the type of report you want to have.

Sort by (QUANTITY/VALUE/DEST ZIP)

Tells ZIPCount how you'd like your reports sorted.

Value Description

Quantity Tells ZipCount to sort the report from maximum to minimum count.

Use this option when you want to initially browse through the report to see the ZIPCodes or facilities that have the largest number of records.

Value Tells ZipCount to sort according to a value in the input file (for example, pieces orcopies).

Dest ZIP Tells ZipCount to sort by destination ZIP Codes taken from the mail direction dir-ectories.

Display Record Number Column (Y/N)

Type Y when producing the 3DG or 5DG reports.

User Guide | 353

Minimum Quantity for Reporting

This parameter defaults to 1. For example, if you have a standard mailing which needs at least10,000 pieces to profit from periodical rate privileges, suppress those records to 9,999 and less bychoosing 10,000 as a minimum.

Palletized Mail (Y/N)

Outputs a list of facilities that accept pallets or sacks/trays.

The values you can use for this parameter include the following:

Value Description

Yes This option generates a list with the following information:

l Facilities that accept pallets.

l Redirection facilities for pallets.

No This option generates a list with the following information:

l Facilities that accept non-palletized mail.

l Redirection facilities for non-palletized mail.

Command line options

You can run ZIPCount quickly by adding options to your command line. For a list of options, typezipcount and press Enter .

Command line vs. job file

The job file is more flexible, but takes a little more setup time than using the command line. Hereare some reasons to use the job file instead of the command line options:

l Creates multiple reports in one pass.

l Uses multiple input files of mixed file types (ASCII and DBASE3).

l Uses multiple input files with different field names.

User Guide | 354

l Prints page headers (command line displays four blank lines).

l Suppresses prompt suppressed for overwrite.

l Specifies work file location (default is current directory).

l Uses the default FMT file.

l Changes page size.

l Displays record number columns.

Messages during verification and processing

The ZIPCount job-file verifier is a part of the ZIPCount utility, job-file error messages display discreteline numbers, which associate the error messages to specific blocks. It also checks for mistakes andomissions, such as:

l The mail direction, facility direction, or mpc directory file was not found.

l Input file is defined as fixed-length ASCII, but FMT file cannot be found.

l Entry at the File Protection parameter is not among the options available.

l The field "zip_code" was not found in the input file.

Correcting errors

The verifier identifies more than one error and tells you where they are located. To correct theerrors, open the job file, or change the command line accordingly, then run ZIPCount again. Keepup this cycle until your job makes it all the way through the verification process without errors.

Processing messages

ZIPCount reports progress by printing messages on your screen. The processing messages refer totasks that ZIPCount performs: verification, reading input records, sorting the work file and gen-erating reports. ZIPCount reports progress percentages when reading the input records.

User Guide | 355

Reports generated without the YYMM_mpc.dir file

5-digit, 3-digit, and code

Entire fields specified are extracted and sorted (not parts of a field). You can generate code reportsbased on any field. It compares all characters in the field when specifying the FMT field (ASCII) orwithin the database (DBASE3).

There is some information listed at the end each report, as described in this table.

Informationprovided

Report Description

Records Filteredout on Input

5-Digit3-digitCode

When you filter records on input, the report lists the number ofrecords excluded from processing because they did not passthe input filter.

Blank Code Fields Code The Blank Code Fields indicates the number of recordschecked without any information in the field specified. Thiscount is different from the Undetermined ZIP Codes countbecause it only counts fields that are completely blank,whereas the Undetermined ZIP Codes field counts full fieldwith non-numeric characters in the first five digits.

UndeterminedZIP Codes

5-Digit3-digitCode

These ZIP Codes have a non-numeric character in the first fivecharacters. Blank fields are counted, but not displayed in therecord.

Records belowthe Minimum Qty

5-Digit3-digitCode

Indicate the minimum quantity declared to process ZIPCountdata.

Counted Records 5-Digit3-digitCode

Lists the number of records included in processing becausethey passed the input filter.

Reports generated with the YYMM_mpc.dir and YYMM_maildirect.dir files

SCF, ADC, and NDC reports

The SCF, ADC, and NDC reports look up information in the YYMM_maildirect.dir file beingused for your job for each unique 3-digit ZIP Code.

User Guide | 356

State report

The State report looks up information in the YYMM_ mpc.dir file being used for your job.ZipCount then generates a report containing the center name, center code, or State, and the num-ber of ZIP Codes that belong to that center or state.

Code State

AA American Atlantic

AE American European

AP American Pacific

AS American Samoa

FM Federated Micronesia

GU Guam

PR Puerto Rico

VI Virgin Islands

The "ZIP Codes Not Associated with an SCF, ADC, NDC or State Report" field displays the number ofZIP Codes that occur when the ZIP Codes read are associated with a military organization or areunused or inactive.

User Guide | 357

ZoneshowZoneShow is a simple program that produces zone tables. ZoneShow displays a zone table relatedto a given three-digit ZIP Code. You can choose to display the table on your screen or save it to afile.

ZoneShow presents data from the USPS Zone directory (YYMM_zone.dir). The Zone directory listsZIP ranges and the corresponding USPS zones throughout the country.

Using ZoneShow

ZoneShow is automatically installed into the Presort subdirectory when you install Presort.

l For Windows, if you installed to the default location, the Zoneshow executable(zoneshow.exe) is located in the c:\ss\pst\ folder.

l For UNIX, ZoneShow is located in /ss/presort/zoneshow.

Start ZoneShow in DOS by typing the following command at the C:\>zoneshow command prompt.All of the items in italics require your own paths and file names. Type the words that are in boldbelow exactly as shown.

[path]YYMM_zone.dir <3-digit origin ZIP> [path]YYMM_mpc.dir [>logfile]

Variable Description

path You may need to provide a full path name for the Zone directory.

3-digitorigin ZIP

You may type any 3-digit ZIP Code. Usually you will want the zone table for thepost office where you plan to enter your mail.

[path] Optional: If you include the path for the Mail Processing Center (MPC) directory, theZoneShow output will indicate which 3-digit ZIPs are eligible for the SCF Zone ratein Periodicals class. If you don't want to include the MPC directory in the commandline, the same ZIPs will be listed as Zone 1. You may need to provide a full pathname for the MPC directory.

>logfile We recommend that you direct ZoneShow's output into a text file. Otherwise,Zoneshow displays the zone table on your screen. If the output is lengthy, it mayscroll off the screen and you may not be able to read it all.

User Guide | 358

The following is an example of the command:

C:\>zoneshow c:\ss\pst\dir\YYMM_zone.dir 537 c:\ss\pst\dir\YYMM_mpc.dir>c:\ss\pst\zone.txt

User Guide | 359

DSF_ShowDSF_Show is a program that presents data from the USPS Delivery Statistics File (YYMM_dsf.dir).It displays the carrier routes for a given ZIP Code, along with the number of residences and the totalnumber of stops for each route; from this you can also calculate the number of business stops on aroute.

DSF_Show is automatically installed into the Presort subdirectory when you install Presort. It can berun from the command prompt of any operating system supported by Presort. When you run DSF_Show, you can choose to display data on your screen or save it as a text file.

Using DSF_Show

DSF_Show is not visible from the Windows Start menu, nor within the Presort product. You run itfrom the command line.

To run DSF_Show

The directions below are based on the Windows command line. To run DSF_Show from theLinux or Solaris command line, substitute the appropriate paths and syntax for your operatingsystem.

1. Open a command prompt.

2. Change the directory to the location where the DSF_Show utility is installed. (For Windowsusers, this is usually C:\ss\pst).

3. When you receive a prompt at the location where DSF_Show is installed, type the followingcommand. For the parameters in <brackets>, substitute your own path, file name, anddesired ZIP Code.

dsf_show <Path to USPS Data Directory Files>\<Name of DSF File><ZIP Code>

EXAMPLE dsf_show C:\ss\dirs\1812_dsf.dir 98101

NOTE If you would like the results to be directed to a .txt output file rather than dis-played on the screen, add the following to your command line after the ZIP code: onespace, the character >, the location where you'd like to create the text file, a backslash,and the desired name of the text file.

User Guide | 360

dsf_show <Path to USPS Data Directory Files>\<Name of DSFFile> <ZIP Code> ><Path to Desired Location of OutputFile>\<Desired Name of Output File>

EXAMPLE dsf_show C:\ss\dirs\1812_dsf.dir 98101 >C:\res-ults\dsf_results.txt

4. On your screen or in the text file created, you can view the following: (1) the ZIP Code (2) thecarrier route (3) the number of residential stops in the route (4) the number of total stops inthe route.

To calculate the number of business stops, subtract residential stops from total stops.

Command Line Parameters

Parameter Required orOptional

Definition Example Value

Path toUSPS DataDirectoryFiles

Required The path to the DSF directory. C:\ss\dirs

User Guide | 361

Name ofDSF File

Required The name of the DSF file; this will be in theformat YYMM_dsf.dir.

1812_dsf.dir

Zip Code Optional The 5-digit ZIP Code for which you'd like toview DSF information.

This parameter is optional. You can leave itblank if you'd like to view data for more thanone ZIP Code; however, you will not be ableto save the data to a text file. The followinghappens if you leave this parameter blank:

1. The software prompts you to enter aZIP code. Enter a ZIP code and pressEnter.

2. The software displays a table of DSFinformation for that ZIP code. If there ismore than one screen's worth ofinformation, you will be prompted topress Enter to see more. When allinformation has been displayed, press-ing Enter results in a prompt to enteranother ZIP code.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to see inform-ation for additional ZIP codes.

4. When you have seen information forall the desired ZIP codes, type STOPand press Enter to return to the com-mand prompt.

98101

Path toDesiredLocation ofOutputFile

Optional (but ifpresent, must beaccompanied bythe Desired Nameof Output File para-meter)

If you wish to save the table as a text filerather than viewing it on screen, type the loc-ation where you want to save it.

C:\results

User Guide | 362

DesiredName ofOutputFile

Optional (but ifpresent, must beaccompanied bythe Path toDesired Locationof Output File para-meter)

If you wish to save the table as a text filerather than viewing it on screen, type thename you want to give the text file.

dsf_res-ults.txt

User Guide | 363

Accessing DocumentationYou can access the latest documentation from your computer. Release notes, manuals, and otherdocuments for each product that you have installed can be accessed from the BCC Softwarefolder in your Startmenu. PDF files are also available online.

PDFs

Release notes, manuals, and other product documents are available from the Documentation short-cuts accessed via the Startmenu. Click Start > All Programs > BCC Software > Documentation orDocumentation (Cross-Product). You can also navigate to the documents directly (see the tablebelow for their locations).

Help Files

Help files are accessible within the software by clicking Help from the menu bar. Select the help fileshown in the dropdown menu. You can also press F1 at any time to display specific informationabout the active window.

The default installation locations are shown in the following table (using Windows operating systempathnames as examples).

Document or Help file Pathname

Presort User Guide ...\ss\documentation\pst\pst_ug_ss.pdf

Presort Job File Reference Guide ...\ss\documentation\pst\pst_jfr_ss.pdf

Presort Help File ...\ss\pst\pstvws_ss.chm

Presort Release Notes ...\ss\documentation\pst\pst_rn_ss.pdf

System Administrator Guide ...\ss\documentation\sysadminguide_ss.pdf

Defmap Help File ...\ss\adm\DEFMAP_ss.chm

Edjob Help File ...\ss\adm\EDJOBGUI_ss.chm

User Guide | 364

Edjob User Guide ...\ss\documentation\edjob_usersguide_ss.pdf

Quick Reference for Views and JobFiles

...\ss\documentation\quickref_views_ss.pdf

Quick Reference for Views and JobFiles Help File

...\ss\documentation\quickref_views_ss.chm

Views Quick Start Guide ...\ss\documentation\views_quickstart_ss.pdf

Database Prep Guide ...\ss\documentation\databaseprep_ss.pdf

If you cannot find the files, contact your System Administrator or the person who installed the soft-ware for assistance in locating your documents. For further assistance, contact BCC Software sup-port.

User Guide | 365

Additional ResourcesThe following resources are available to help you with your software.

Documentation Updates Available Online

Documentation is updated on a regular basis and available online in PDF format. You can access themost current versions of the documentation from the following links:

l Presort User Guide ⇨

l Presort Job File Reference Guide ⇨

l Presort Release Notes ⇨

l System Administrator Guide ⇨

l Edjob User Guide ⇨

l Quick Reference for Views and Job Files ⇨

l Views Quick Start Guide ⇨

l Database Prep Guide ⇨

Knowledge Base

BCC Software offers tips, tricks, and best practices for using our products. Knowledge Base and Sup-port articles can help empower both experts and new users.

Beginning in December 2019, we're transitioning the Knowledge Base to a new web experience:

l Through December 31, 2019, you can visit the existing BCC Software Knowledge Base ⇨.

l From January 1, 2020 forward, use the BCC Software Knowledge Base on the BCC SoftwareCustomer Portal ⇨. This will replace the existing Knowledge Base.

In December, you should receive an email from our Support Team inviting you to set up anaccount on the BCC Software Customer Portal. As soon as you have an account, you can usethe portal to access the Knowledge Base, as well as other resources such as product down-loads.

User Guide | 366

How to Contact Support

l BCC Software Technical Support online:https://bccsoftware.com/customer-center/customer-support/ ⇨

l Email: support@bccsoftware.com ⇨